Ar 287
Ar 287
Digital Copier
AR-405/407
(AR-501/505) (AR-507)
MODEL AR-501/505/507
CONTENTS
[ 1 ] GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[ 2 ] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
[ 3 ] CONSUMABLE PARTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
[ 4 ] INSTALLATION AND SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
[ 5 ] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE. . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[ 6 ] SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[ 7 ] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[ 8 ] DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY, MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[ 9 ] TROUBLE CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[10] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
[11] SPECIAL FUNCTIONS (AR-287/337/407/507). . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
AR-405/407 AR-501/505/507
TO 8½X11 100%
ER SELECT COPY RATIO
G. 1-set 2-copy
The right and the left pages of a book, etc. can be copied onto two
sheets of paper continuously.
1–1 7/13/2000
H. Edge erase copying M. Auto duplex copy
Shade at the copy edge can be automatically erased. (AR-250/280/281 requires the option)
Duplex copy is made automatically.
Original Copy
INSERTS WITH
PRINTING
4
3
2 4
1
3
2
P. Hi-Fi copy (AR-280/285/335 only)
This function produces high image quality copies.
1
3
1 Q. DATE SIGN
4
2
The DATE SIGN function adds the current date to the copies. The
INSERTS WITHOUT date will be printed at the upper right of the copies.
PRINTING
R. WATERMARK
The WATERMARK function adds a selected watermark such as
K. Copy conditions registration/recall “CONFIDENTIAL” and “URGENT” to the copies. The watermark will
Nine sets of complicated copying procedures can be stored and re- be printed in gray tone at the center of copies.
called when necessary.
S. SELECT STAMP
L. Key operator program The SELECT STAMP function adds a selected string such as “CON-
The key operator program is used by the key operator to set and FIDENTIAL” and “URGENT” to the copies. The string will be printed in
cancel the customer functions. white on a shaded background.
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
T. PAGE NUMBER
COPIER MODE OK The PAGE NUMBER function adds page numbers to the copies.
7/13/2000 1–2
2. System outline (Options)
Copier model
Name Model AR-250 AR-280 AR-281 AR-285 AR-286 AR-287 AR-335 AR-336 AR-337 AR-405 AR-407 AR-501 AR-505 AR-507
Automatic AR-SP1 ❍ Standard Standard — — — — — — — — — — —
document
feeder RSPF — — — — — — — — — — — Standard Standard Standard
1–3 7/13/2000
AR-250
Finisher Finisher
(AR-FN1) (AR-FN1N)
Document cover
(AR-VR2)
7/13/2000 1–4
AR-280/285/335
Finisher Finisher
(AR-FN1) (AR-FN1N)
Finisher
(AR-FN2)
EXIT trays
(AR-TE1)
Desk (AR-DD1)
500-sheet paper drawer
(AR-CS1)
1–5 7/13/2000
AR-281/286/336
AR-281
Stand/500 sheet
paper drawer Stand/500 sheet
(AR-DE1) paper drawer
(AR-DE1N)
7/13/2000 1–6
AR-405
Finisher (AR-FN2)
Finisher (AR-FN1N)
1–7 7/13/2000
AR-501/505
Finisher (AR-FN3)
Large capacity tray (AR-LC1N)
Exit tray
(AR-TE1) Dual tray output unit
(AR-TE2) (AR-TR1)
Desk (AR-DD1)
AR-505 only
·· Printer board (AR-PB2)
NIC card (10baseT/2) (Provided by Europe) (JX96NCE8)
··NIC card (10baseT/2) (Provided by Europe) (AR-NC1D)
NIC card (10baseT/100baseTX) (AR-NC3D)
··
Printer board (Expansion memory 16MB x2 SIM) (AR-SM1)
AXIS fixing angle (AXIS scanner)
·
Tandem connection cable (AR-CA1)
7/13/2000 1–8
AR-287/337/407/507
Finisher: Finisher: Finisher:
AR-FN1N (AR-287/337/407) AR-FN2 (AR-287/337/407) AR-FN3 (AR-507)
AR-407
Stand/500 sheet
paper drawer:
AR-DE1N (AR-287/337/407)
500-sheet paper drawer:
AR-CS1 (AR-287/337/407)
AR-507
Stand/500-sheet
paper drawer:
AR-DE7 (AR-507)
Desk: AR-DD1
· Printer board: AR-PB2A
· NIC card (10baseT/2) (Provided by local distributors):
AR-NC1D
· NIC card (10 base T/100 base TX): AR-NC3D
· Printer board (Expansion memory 16MB x2 SIM):
AR-SM1 (AR-507)
· Network scanner kit: AR-NS1
· Tandem connection cable AR-CA1
· Mounting kit: AR-XB3 (AR-287/337/407)
· Sharpdesk 5 license kit: AR-U11M/U15M
· Security ROM: AR-FR1 (AR-287/337)
AR-FR2 (AR-407)
AR-FR3 (AR-507)
1–9 7/13/2000
3. Installation requirements A small amount of ozone is produced within the copier during opera-
tion. The emission level is insufficient to cause any health hazard.
To ensure safety and proper machine performance, please note the NOTE: The present recommended long term exposure limit for
following before initial installation and whenever the machine is to be ozone is 0.1 ppm (0.2 mg/m3) calculated as an 8 hr. time-
relocated. weighted average concentration.
1) The copier should be installed near an accessible power outlet for
However, since the small amount that is emitted may have
easy connection.
an objectionable odor, it is advisable to place the copier in a
2) Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that ventilated area.
meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
Also make certain the outlet is properly grounded. Cautions
1) Do not touch the photoconductive drum. Scratches or smudges on
the drum will cause dirty copies.
2) The fusing unit is extremely hot. Exercise care in this area.
3) Since a hard disk drive is built into the copier, be sure to turn the
power switch to the "OFF" position when moving the copier. Take
care not to subject the copier to any vibration or shock.
4) Since a hard disk drive is built into this copier, place the copier on 5) Installation adjusters are provided on the optional stand/500-sheet
a firm, level surface. Choose an area which is not subject to any paper drawer.When moving the machine with the optional
vibration. stand/500-sheet paper drawer, be sure to raise the installation
adjusters. After moving the machine, lower the installation adjust-
ers until they reach the floor to lock the machine in place. (If the
casters are not locked securely, the machine will gradually move
and the cables of the RADF and the SPF are rubbed against the
wall, causing internal disconnection.)
Caster
Release
Lock Release
5) Be sure to allow the required space around the machine for serv-
Lock
icing and proper ventilation.
11-13/16" Adjuster
(30cm)
6) When copying is interrupted (for example, because the INTER-
23-5/8" 11-13/16" RUPT function has been used, paper or toner has run out, a
(60cm) (30cm) misfeed has occurred, etc.), this copier will store the image data of
the originals read prior to the interruption. If copying of secret
documents is interrupted due to the above reasons, be sure to
either resume the interrupted copying by pressing the START key,
or clear the image data by pressing the clear all key after the
interrupt copying is completed or the trouble is cleared, because
23-5/8"
the stored data may be printed by other operators.
(60cm)
7/13/2000 1 – 10
[2] SPECIFICATIONS E. First Copy time
(1) Basic Speed
1. Machine type AR-280
AR-285 AR-335
AR-405
AR-501
Model AR-250 AR-286 AR-336 AR-505
Product Document Paper Memory AR-281 AR-407
CPM Type AR-287 AR-337 AR-507
Name Feeder Exit RAM HD Speed (sec.) 5.2 5.2 5.2 5.2 4.5 4.3
AR-250 25 Simplex Desk top – 1 tray 48 MB –
AR-280 28 Simplex Desk top SPF 2 tray 16 MB 1 GB When the paper is fed from the Upper tray on the base unit.
AR-281 28 Simplex Desk top SPF 1 tray 16 MB 2 GB Machines are measured when paper is fed from the upper tray of 2-
AR-285 28 Duplex Desk top RADF 2 tray 16 MB 1 GB tray exit unit.
AR-286 28 Duplex Desk top RADF 1 tray 16 MB 2 GB
AR-287 28 Duplex Desk top RADF 1 tray 32 MB 4.3 GB (2) Detail
AR-335 33 Duplex Desk top RADF 2 tray 16 MB 1 GB AR-285 AR-335 AR-501
AR-280 AR-405
AR-336 33 Duplex Desk top RADF 1 tray 16 MB 2 GB AR-250 AR-286 AR-336 AR-505
AR-281 AR-407
AR-337 33 Duplex Desk top RADF 1 tray 32 MB 4.3 GB AR-287 AR-337 AR-507
AR-405 40 Duplex Desk top RADF 1 tray 16 MB 2 GB Upper cassette
5.2 5.2 5.2 5.2 4.5 4.3
AR-407 40 Duplex Desk top RADF 1 tray 32 MB 4.3 GB (sec.)
AR-501 50 Duplex Desk top RSPF 1 tray 48 MB 2 GB Lower cassette
5.7 5.7 5.7 5.7 5.0 4.5
AR-505 50 Duplex Desk top RSPF 1 tray 48 MB 2 GB (sec.)
AR-507 50 Duplex Desk top RSPF 1 tray 48 MB 4.3 GB Multi-Baypass
5.3 5.3 5.3 5.3 4.6 4.3
* Memory capacity is of the main body only, excluding optional Tray (sec.)
Stand/Upper pa-
expansion memory. 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6 5.9 5.2
per drawer (sec.)
* Standard’s spec. Stand/Medium
paper drawer 6.9 6.9 6.9 6.9 6.2 5.5
2. Copy speed (sec.)
LCC (sec.) 5.9 5.9 5.9 5.9 5.2 4.7
A. Basic Speed
Refer to each specification for the first copy time when paper is fed
AR-285 AR-335 AR-501 from the document feeder or the optional paper feed tray.
AR-280 AR-405
per 1 scan AR-250 AR-286 AR-336 AR-505
AR-281 AR-407
AR-287 AR-337 AR-507 (3) First copy time from the document feeder
Single 25 cpm 28 cpm 28 cpm 28 cpm 34 cpm 47 cpm AR-250 AR-285
Multiple 25 cpm 28 cpm 28 cpm 33 cpm 40 cpm 50 cpm AR-501
AR-281 AR-335 AR-405
Model AR-280 AR-505
* Speeds from all the paper feed ports including the normal copy AR-286 AR-336 AR-407
AR-507
and the manual feed copy. AR-287 AR-337
When the SPF is used
7.8 7.8 — — —
B. Normal copy (100%) (sec.)
AR-285 AR-335 AR-501 When the RADF is
AR-280 AR-405 8.8 — 8.8 7.6 —
AR-250 AR-286 AR-336 AR-505 used (sec.)
AR-281 AR-407 When the RSPF is
AR-287 AR-337 AR-507 — — — — 7.0
A4/8.5 ´ 11 25 28 28 33 40 50 used (sec.)
A3/11 ´ 17 13 14 14 17 19 25
When the paper is fed from the Upper tray on the base unit.
B4/8.5 ´ 14/
15 17 17 21 24 29
8.5 ´ 13
B5/A5/
25 28 28 33 40 50
3. OC/DF
8.5 ´ 5.5
A4R/B5R/ A. Document table
18 20 20 24 27 35
8.5 ´ 11
Max. document size A3/11 ´ 17
C. Enlargement copy Document reference position Center left
AR-285 AR-335 AR-501 Document detection Yes
AR-280 AR-405
AR-286 AR-336 AR-505 11 ´ 17, 8.5 ´ 14, 8.5 ´ 11,
AR-250 AR-281 AR-407 Inch Series
(800%)
AR-287 AR-337
(400%)
AR-507 8.5 ´ 11R, 8.5 ´ 5.5
(800%) (800%) (400%) Detection size AB Series A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5
A4/8.5 ´ 11 25 28 28 33 40 50
A3/11 ´ 17 13 14 14 17 19 25 Australia A3, 216 ´ 330, A4, A4R, A5 (Note 1)
B4/8.5 ´ 14/ B5 areas A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R
15 17 17 21 24 29
8.5 ´ 13 Inch Series 11, 8.5, 5.5
B5/A5/ OR guide dis-
25 28 28 33 40 50 play A3/A4, B4/B5, A4R/A5, B5R,
8.5 ´ 5.5 AB Series
11, 8.5 (Note 2)
A4R/B5R/
18 20 20 24 27 35
8.5 ´ 11 (Note 1) For areas other than Australia, "B4/8.5 ´ 11" can be
changed to "8.5 ´ 13" by the simulation.
D. Reduction copy (25%)
(Note 2) The display of 8.5" for AB series is of the line display only.
AR-285 AR-335 AR-501
AR-280 AR-405 There is no size display.
AR-250 AR-286 AR-336 AR-505
AR-281 AR-407
AR-287 AR-337 AR-507
B. SPF (AR-280/281)
A4/8.5 ´ 11 25 28 28 33 40 50
A3/11 ´ 17 13 14 14 17 17 25 (1) Document set
B4/8.5 ´ 14/
15 17 17 21 24 29 Set direction Face down
8.5 ´ 13
Set position Center reference
B5/A5/
8.5 ´ 5.5
25 28 28 33 40 50 A4/8.5 ´ 11 30 sheets 30 sheets of 80g/m2 must be set.
A4R/B5R/ Set quantity Greater than For 80 ~ 128g/m2, paper of max.
18 20 20 24 27 35 15 sheets 4.7mm thick can se set.
8.5 ´ 11 the above.
2–1 7/13/2000
(2) Document transport (5) Document detection on the tray
Document transport system Sheet through type Document detection on the tray Yes
Document feed sequence Top take-up feed Inch Series 11 ´ 17, 8.5 ´ 14, 8.5 ´ 11,
8.5 ´ 11R, 8.5 ´ 5.5, 8.5 ´ 13
(3) Document Size Detection size AB Series A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 8.5 ´ 13
AB Series A3 ~ A5 B5 area A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5
Document Size
Inch Series 11 ´ 17 ~ 8.5 ´ 5.5 Australia A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 216 ´ 330
Paper Weight 50 ~ 128g/m2 (14 ~ 34 lbs.) Inch Series 11, 8.5, 5.5
Document
(4) Multi quantity guide display AB Series A3/A4, B4/B5, A4R/A5, B5R,
8.5 (Note)
Multi quantity In the high fidelity mode, multi copy is inhibited.
(Note) AB series 8.5" display is of line display only. Size display is
(5) Document mix feed not made.
Mix paper feed Allowed. When setting Sim, "8.5 ´ 14" and "8.5 ´ 13" are separately detected.
Random paper feed Not allowed. (7) Document mix feed
No linkage with AMS is made. Document Mix paper feed Possible (Same width size)
(6) Document detection mix feed Random paper feed Possible
11 ´ 17, 8.5 ´ 14, 8.5 ´ 11, No linkage with AMS is made.
Inch Series
Detection 8.5 ´ 11R, 8.5 ´ 5.5
(8) Document reversion
size AB Series A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5
Australia A3, A4, A4R, A5, 216 ´ 330 (Note 1) Document reversion Yes
Inch Series 11, 8.5, 5.5 (9) Display
Document
guide display AB Series A3/A4, B4/B5, A4R/A5, B5R, 8.5
Document feed display section
(Note 2) Display section LED display
Document remaining display
(Note 1) For areas other than Australia, "B4/8.5 ´ 11" can be
changed to "8.5 ´ 13" by the simulation. (10) Stream mode
(Note 2) The display of 8.5" for AB series is of the line display only. The stream mode can be selected by the key
Stream mode
There is no size display. operation program. (Only group mode)
7/13/2000 2–2
4. Paper feed 6. Warm up
A. Outline of paper feed AR-250/280/
AR-501/
281/285/286/287/ AR-405/407
Copy size AB Series A3 ~ A6R, Postcard 505/507
335/336/337
(Max. ~ Min.) Inch Series 11 ´ 17 ~ 8.5 ´ 5.5
Less than About
Paper feed system 2 Tray + Manual Feed Tray Warm up time Less than 65 sec
75 sec 150 sec
Paper feed capacity 500 ´ 2 + 50 (80g/m2)
Pre-heat yes/no Yes
Level detection available
Paper feed About 10sec (Leaving the
Remaining tray section 0~ 25%, 25%~ 50%, 50%~ 85%, Jam recovery machine for 60 sec after About
detection 85%~ time opening the door, standard 30 sec
Manual condition, polygon stop.)
Empty detection only available
Feed Tray
Detection
AB Series A3/B4/A4/A4R/B5/B5R/A5/A6R B. Loss width
size 11 ´ 17/8.5 ´ 14/8.5 ´ 11/ AR-501
Inch Series
8.5 ´ 11R/5.5 ´ 8.5/7.25 x 10.5 AR-505
Lead edge 4 mm or less, rear edge 4 mm
Manual feed A3/A4, B4/B5, A4R/A5, A5R, B5R, or less, FR total 5 mm or less
AB Series Void area AR-507
tray guide 11, 8.5 (NOTE 1) Other Lead edge 3 mm or less, rear edge 4 mm
display Inch Series 11, 8.5, 5.5 models or less, FR total 5 mm or less
(Note 1) For 11" ´ 8.5" of AB series, only the line is displayed and Image Loss Less than 5 mm
the size is not displayed.
(3) Dehumidifying heater 10. Paper exit
Yes/No No A. Paper exit form
AR-250/281/286/287/336/
AR-280/285/335
5. Multi copy 337/405/407/501/505/507
Paper exit form 2-tray paper exit 1-tray paper exit
Multi max. quantity 999
2–3 7/13/2000
B. Paper exit section B. Copy function
AR-250/281/ AR-250/280/281/285/286/335/336/405/501/505
AR-280/ AR-501/
286/287/336/
285/335 505/507 AR-250/280/281/
337/405/407 AR-405 AR-501/505
285/286/335/336
Paper exit tray Upper Tray 250 sheets
capacity Job call/
Lower Tray 100 sheets — 9
registration
Paper exit Face up &
Upper Tray Face up Max. 50 dept. Max. 500 dept.
surface Face down Dept. control
(Face up/Face (Only the copy function is controlled.)
Lower Tray Face up — Shift width AB series: 10mm, Inch series: 1/2" with
down) Binding margin
adjustment (Binding direction selectable)
C. Paper size Edge erase AB series: 10mm, Inch series: 1/2" with adjustment
Center erase
Size Paper Weight
1-set, 2-copy
Upper AB Series A3 ~ A6R 50 ~ 128g/m2, Independent 25 ~ 800% for
Tray Inch Series 11 ´ 17 ~ 8.5 ´ 5.5 176g/m2, 200g/m2 25 ~ 400% for vertical/horizontal
zooming vertical/horizontal
Lower AB Series A3 ~ A5 White/black
50 ~ 105g/m2 reversion
All surface only (only in the manual mode)
Tray Inch Series 11 ´ 17 ~ 8.5 ´ 5.5
Cover paper Cover/back cover/cover and back cover
Duplex pass section : 56 ~ 105g/m2 Insert paper copy Yes/No Only 1 face-up paper exit is
OHP insert paper
selectable possible
11. Duplex module (AR-285/286/287/335/ Centering
Multi shot (Nin1) Paper feed size is up to A4.
336/337/405/407/501/505/507) Repeat copy
Date print Time setting by the key operation.
A. Auto duplex unit
Stamp function
AR-285/286/287/335/336/ Middle binding HD is required for AR-250.
AR-250/280/281
337/405/407/501/505/507 Page print HD is required for AR-250.
Option
Auto Duplex Unit Standard AR-287/337/407/507
(AR-DU1)
AR-287/337 AR-407 AR-507
B. Paper size Job call/ registration 9
AB Series A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5 Max. 50 dept. Max. 500 dept.
Dept. control
Paper size 11 ´ 17, 8.5 ´ 14, 8.5 ´ 13, 8.5 ´ 11, (Copy/Print/Tandem)
Inch Series Shift width AB series: 10mm, Inch series: 1/2" with
8.5 ´ 11R, 7.25 ´ 10.5R Binding margin
adjustment (Binding direction selectable)
56 ~ 105g/m2 (Same as the paper feed
Paper Weight Edge erase AB series: 10mm, Inch series: 1/2" with adjustment
section of the main body)
Center erase
C. Capacity 1-set, 2-copy
25 to 800% for
Capacity 1 Sheet (Single Pass Method) Independent zooming 25 to 400% for vertical/horizontal
vertical/horizontal
White/black reversion All surface only (only in the manual mode)
12. Shipping form Cover paper Cover/back cover/cover and back cover
Insert paper copy Yes/No Only 1 face-up paper
OHP insert paper
A. Packing form selectable exit is possible
Centering
Body Body/accessories
Multi shot (Nin1)
B. Paper size Repeat copy Combination with AMS allowed
Date print Time setting by the key operation.
AB Series A3
First Tray Stamp function
Inch Series 11 ´ 17 Middle binding
AB Series A3 Page print
Second Tray
Inch Series 11 ´ 17 Confidential print
Security function Security ROM is installed. (AR-FR1/FR2/FR3)
Tandem print When the tandem connection cable is connected
13. Additional functions (copy/print) (AR-287 invalid)
A. Main body functions Network scanner When the scanner expansion kit is installed
Large quantity
APS Documents of 120 sheets *1
document mode
AMS AMS by flow scan with DF is not allowed. *1: 60 sheets for sizes greater than A4 with print data
Auto tray switching
1 scan multi copy
Rotation copy
Pre-heat Conditions are set with the key operation.
Auto shut off Conditions are set with the key operation.
Message display
Key operator program
E-mail Status/E-mail Alerts
Communication
(AR-287/337/407/507)
Process control
Coin vendor Only the connector is provided on the PWB.
7/13/2000 2–4
14. Options 16. Outlook
AR-285 AR-336 Machine
AR-501
AR-286 AR-337 W x D x H (mm) occupying Weight
AR-250 AR-280 AR-505
AR-287 AR-405 dimensions
AR-507
AR-335 AR-407 AR-250 600 ´ 695 ´ 658 1292 ´ 630 About 81 kg
SPF Option Standard — — — AR-280 600 ´ 695 ´ 698 1292 ´ 695 About 89 kg
Document
RADF Option — Standard Standard —
feeder AR-281 600 ´ 695 ´ 735 1292 ´ 695 About 87 kg
RSPF — — — — Standard
AR-285/335 600 ´ 695 ´ 750 1292 ´ 695 About 98 kg
1 tray desk Option
(AR-DE1)
Option Option Option Option
(AR-DE7) AR-286/336 600 ´ 695 ´ 718 1292 ´ 695 About 101 kg
Large capacity Option AR-287/337 600 ´ 695 ´ 750 1292 ´ 695 Approx 98 kg
Paper Option Option Option Option
tray (AR-LC1) (AR-LC1N) AR-405 600 ´ 700 ´ 750 1292 ´ 700 About 98 kg
feed
Tray module AR-407 600 ´ 700 ´ 750 1292 ´ 700 Approx 98 kg
Option Option Option Option Option
(AR-CS1) AR-501/505 600 ´ 700 ´ 773 1292 ´ 700 About 102 kg
Desk (AR-DD1) Option Option Option Option Option AR-507 600 ´ 700 ´ 773 1292 ´ 700 Approx 102 kg
Auto duplex
Duplex
module Option Option Standard Standard Standard
module
(AR-DU1) 17. Power supply
Dual tray
output unit Option Standard Standard Option — Voltage 100 V, 110 V, 120 V, 127 V, 220-230 V, 240 V
(AR-TR1) Frequency 50/60 Hz Common
Finisher
Finishing Option Option Option Option —
(AR-FN1)
Finisher
Option — — Option —
18. Power consumption
(AR-FN2)
FN3 Option — — — Option AR-250/281/
AR-280/ AR-501/
286/287/336/
285/335 505/507
337/405/407
15. Other specifications Max. power Less than Less than Less than
Photoconductor kind OPC drum consumption 1440 W 1440 W 1590 W
Photoconductor dia. 65 f
Process cleaning Blade
Exposure lamp No-electrode xenon lamp
Developing system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush
development
Charging system DC negative scorotron (saw tooth electrode)
Transfer system DC positive control
Separation system AC corotron/DC bias separation pawl
(AR-287/337/407 only)
AC corotron/DC bias separation pawl/
Separation lamp (AR-501/505 only)
Photo discharge/AC corotron/
DC bias separation pawl (AR-507 only)
Fusing system Heat roller
Fusing cleaning Yes (AR-501/505/507 only)
2–5 7/13/2000
20. Combination of functions
AR-280/285/335
Inde- AMS Water Stamp Page Date Black- Cen- Edge Bind- 1-set Mid- Re- Multi OHP Cover Hi-Fi Du- Offset Group Sort Staple
pend- mark print print white tering erase ing 2- dle peat shot insert inser- copy plex sort
ent rever- mar- copy bind- (DF paper tion copy
zoom- sion gin (Docu ing only) (DF direc-
ing -ment only) tion
table switch
only)
S®S ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ▲ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
S (Even number) ® D ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ▲ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
S (Odd number) ® D (DF only) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ▲ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
S ® D (Auto) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ▲ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
D ® D (DF only) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ▲ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ✕ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
D ® S (DF only) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ▲ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Staple sort ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ✕ ✕
Sort ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ D ❍ D ❍ ❍ ✕
Group ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ D ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Offset ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Duplex copy direction switch ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ✕ ✕ ✕ ❍ ✕
Hi-Fi copy ( )* ❍ ❍ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ✕ ✕ ❍ ❍
Cover insertion (DF only) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
OHP insert paper ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ✕ ✕
Multi shot (DF only) ✕ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ✕ ✕
Repeat ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ✕
Middle binding ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕
1-set 2-copy (Document table only) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍
Binding margin ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Edge erase ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Centering ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Black-white reversion ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍
Date print ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Page print ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Stamp ❍ ❍ ✕
Water mark ❍ ❍
AMS ❍
AR-250/281/286/287/336/337/405/407
Inde- AMS Water Stamp Page Date Black- Cen- Edge Bind- 1-set 2- Mid- Re- Multi OHP Cover Du- Offset Group Sort Staple
pend- mark print print white tering erase ing copy dle peat shot insert inser- plex sort
ent rever- mar- (Docu- bind- paper tion copy
zoom- sion gin ment ing (DF direc-
ing table only) tion
only) switch
S®S ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ▲ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
S ® D (Auto) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ▲ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
D ® D (DF only) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ▲ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
D ® S (DF only) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ▲ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Staple sort ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ✕
Sort ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ D ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕
Group ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ D ❍ ❍ ❍
Offset ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Duplex copy direction switch ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ✕ ✕ ✕ ❍
Cover insertion (DF only) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
OHP insert paper ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ✕ ✕
Multi shot (DF only) ✕ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ✕ ✕
Repeat ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ✕
Middle binding ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕
1-set 2-copy (Document table only) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍
Binding margin ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Edge erase ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Centering ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Black-white reversion ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍
Date print ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Page print ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Stamp ❍ ❍ ✕
Water mark ❍ ❍
AMS ❍
7/13/2000 2–6
AR-501/505/507
Inter- Tan- Inde- AMS Water Stamp Page Date Black- Cen- Cen- Edge Bind- 1-set Mid- Re- Multi OHP Cover Du- Offset Group Sort Stap-
rupti- dem pend- mark print print white tering ter erase ing 2-copy dle peat shot insert inser- plex le sort
on * copy * ent
zoom-
rever-
sion
erase mar-
gin
(Docu-
ment
bind-
ing
paper tion
(DF
copy
direc-
ing table only) tion
only) switch
S®S ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ▲ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
S®D ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ▲ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
D ® D (DF only) ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ▲ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
D ® S (DF only) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ▲ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Staple sort ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ✕ ✕ ✕
Sort ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ D ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕
Group ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ D ❍ ❍ ❍
Offset ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍
Duplex copy direction switch ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ✕ ✕ ✕ ❍
Cover insertion (DF only) ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
OHP insert paper ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ✕ ✕
Multi shot ✕ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ✕ ✕
Repeat ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ✕
Middle binding ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕
1-set 2-copy (Document table
only) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍
Binding margin ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Edge erase ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Center erase ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Centering ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Black-white reversion ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍
Date print ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Page print ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Stamp ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕
Water mark ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
AMS ❍ ❍ ❍
Independent zooming ❍ ❍
Tandem copy ✕
2–7 7/13/2000
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Consumable Parts List
A. USA
AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337
MODEL NAME
No. ITEM CONTENTS LIFE AR-280/285/ AR-250/281/ REMARKS
AR-287/337
335 286/336
1 Drum OPC Drum ´1 160K AR-330DR AR-336DR
AR-330MD AR-336MD AR-330MD = (AR-330ND) ´ 10
2 Developer (Black) Developer (800g) ´10 80K (´10)
(AR330ND) (AR-336ND) AR-336MD = (AR-336ND) ´ 10
AR-330MT AR-400MT AR-330MT = (AR-330NT) ´ 10
3 Toner (Black) Toner Cartridge (700g) ´10 17.5K (´10)
(AR-330NT) (AR-400NT) AR-400MT = (AR-400NT) ´ 10
Upper Heat Roller ´1 Replacement of fusing separation
Upper Heat Roller
4 Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 160K AR-330UH pawl for every 90 K should be done
Kit
Heat Roller Gear ´1 using those supplied separately.
Replacement of fusing separation
Lower Heat Roller Lower Heat Roller ´1
5 160K AR-330LH AR-505LH pawl for every 90 K should be done
Kit Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2
using those supplied separately.
Cleaner Blade ´1
80K Maintenance
6 Charging Plate Unit ´1 80K AR-330KA1 AR-400KA
Kit
Drum Separation Unit ´1
7 Cleaner Blade Cleaner Blade ´10 80K (´10) AR-330CB AR-330CB= (AR-330BL) ´10
Cartridge for AR-FN1
8 Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge (SF-SC11) ´3 5K staples ´3 SF-SC11
Common with S55,S55 N
Cartridge for AR-FN2
9 Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge (SF-SC12) ´3 5K staples ´3 SF-LS12 Common with S54
SF-LS12= (SF-SC12) ´3
9 Upper Heat Roller Upper Heat Roller ´1 160K AR-330HU
Fusing Separation SF216UP=SF-216TP
10 Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 ´10 80K (´10) SF-216UP
Pawl (upper) (incl.4 pawls) ´10
11 Heat Roller Gear Heat Roller Gear ´10 160K (´10) SF-216HG SF216HG= (SF216JG) ´10
12 Lower Heat Roller Lower Heat Roller ´1 160K AR-330HR AR-505HR
Fusing Separation SF240LP=SF-240MP
13 Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2 ´10 80K (´10) SF-240LP
Pawl (lower) (incl.2 pawls) ´10
Drum Separation SF240DP=SF-240EP
14 Drum Separation Pawl ´2 ´10 80K (´10) SF-240DP
Pawl (incl.2 pawls) ´10
15 Screen Grid Screen Grid ´10 80K (´10) AR-330SU AR-330SU= (AR-330TU) ´10
16 Charging Plate Charging Plate ´10 80K (´10) AR-330PU AR-330PU= (AR-330NU) ´10
Waste Toner
17 Waste Toner Bottle ´1 AR-330TB
Bottle
18 Busing Busing ´2 ´10 160K (´10) SF-240BU SF-240BU= (SF-240DU) ´10
19 Ozone Filter Ozone Filter ´10 80K (´10) AR-330FL AR-330FL= (AR-330JL) ´10
20 Copy Lamp Copy Lamp ´10 AR-330CL AR-330CL= (AR-330DL) ´10
21 MC Unit MC Unit ´10 AR-330MC AR-330MC= (AR-330NC) ´10
: AR-280/285/335 only
Note: Maintenance parts other than mentioned above must be ordered through the parts department using the proper part number.
7/13/2000 3–1
AR-405/407
MODEL NAME
No. ITEM CONTENTS LIFE REMARKS
AR-405 AR-407
1 Drum OPC Drum ´1 180K AR-400DR
2 Developer (Black) Developer (800g) ´10 90K (´10) AR-400MD AR-400MD = (AR-400ND) ´ 10
3 Toner (Black) Toner Cartridge (700g) ´10 22K (´1) AR-400MT AR-400MT = (AR-400NT) ´ 10
Upper Heat Roller ´1 Replacement of fusing separation pawl
4 Upper Heat Roller Kit Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 180K AR-330UH for every 90 K should be done using
Heat Roller Gear ´1 those supplied separately.
Replacement of fusing separation pawl
Lower Heat Roller ´1
5 Lower Heat Roller Kit 180K AR-330LH AR-505LH for every 90 K should be done using
Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2
those supplied separately.
Cleaner Blade ´1
6 90K Maintenance Kit Charging Plate Unit ´1 90K AR-400KA1
Drum Separation Unit ´1
7 Cleaner Blade Cleaner Blade ´10 90K (´10) AR-330CB AR-330CB= (AR-330BL) ´10
Cartridge for AR-FN1
8 Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge (SF-SC11) ´3 5K staples ´3 SF-SC11
Common with S55,S55 N
Cartridge for AR-FN2
9 Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge (SF-SC12) ´3 5K staples ´3 SF-LS12 Common with S54
SF-LS12= (SF-SC12) ´3
9 Upper Heat Roller Upper Heat Roller ´1 180K AR-330HU
10 Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 ´10 90K (´10) SF-216UP SF216UP=SF-216TP (incl.4 pawls) ´10
11 Heat Roller Gear Heat Roller Gear ´10 180K (´10) SF-216HG SF216HG= (SF216JG) ´10
12 Lower Heat Roller Lower Heat Roller ´1 180K AR-330HR AR-505HR
13 Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2 ´10 90K (´10) SF-240LP SF240LP=SF-240MP (incl.2 pawls) ´10
14 Drum Separation Pawl Drum Separation Pawl ´2 ´10 90K (´10) SF-240DP SF240DP=SF-240EP (incl.2 pawls) ´10
15 Screen Grid Screen Grid ´10 90K (´10) AR-330SU AR-330SU= (AR-330TU) ´10
16 Charging Plate Charging Plate ´10 90K (´10) AR-330PU AR-330PU= (AR-330NU) ´10
17 Waste Toner Bottle Waste Toner Bottle ´1 AR-330TB
18 Busing Busing ´2 ´10 180K (´10) SF-240BU SF-240BU= (SF-240DU) ´10
19 Ozone Filter Ozone Filter ´10 90K (´10) AR-330FL AR-330FL= (AR-330JL) ´10
20 MC Unit MC Unit ´10 AR-330MC AR-330MC= (AR-330NC) ´10
Note: Maintenance parts other than mentioned above must be ordered through the parts department using the proper part number.
AR-501/505/507
No. ITEM CONTENTS LIFE MODEL NAME REMARKS
1 Drum OPC Drum ´1 250K AR-500DR
AR-500MD
2 Developer (Black) Developer (800g) ´10 250K (´10) (AR-500ND) ´10 = AR-500MD
(AR500ND)
AR-500MT
3 Toner (Black) Toner Cartridge (700g) ´10 25K (´10) (AR-500NT) ´10 = AR-500MT
(AR-500NT)
Upper Heat Roller ´1
4 Upper Heat Roller Kit Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 250K AR-505UH
Heat Roller Gear ´1
Lower Heat Roller ´1
5 Lower Heat Roller Kit 250K AR-505LH
Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2
Cleaner Blade ´1
Charging Plate Unit ´1
6 125K Maintenance Kit 125K AR-505KA1
Drum Separation Unit ´1
Upper CL Roller Unit ´1
7 Cleaner Blade Cleaner Blade ´10 125K (´10) AR-330CB AR-330CB= (AR-330BL) ´10
8 Curl Adjustment Roller Curl Adjustment Roller ´10 250K (´10) AR-505KR AR-505KR= (AR-505JR) ´10
Cartridge for AR-FN1/FN1N/FN3
9 Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge (SF-SC11) ´3 5K staples ´3 SF-SC11
Common with S55,S55 N
10 Upper Heat Roller Upper Heat Roller ´1 250K AR-505HU
11 Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 ´10 125K (´10) AR-505UP AR-505UP=AR-505TP (incl.4 pawls) ´10
12 Heat Roller Gear Heat Roller Gear ´10 250K (´10) SF-216HG SF216HG= (SF216JG) ´10
13 Lower Heat Roller Lower Heat Roller ´1 250K AR-505HR
14 Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2 ´10 125K (´10) SF-240LP SF240LP=SF-240MP (incl.2 pawls) ´10
15 Drum Separation Pawl Drum Separation Pawl ´2 ´10 125K (´10) AR-505DP AR-505DP=AR-505EP (incl.2 pawls) ´10
16 Screen Grid Screen Grid ´10 125K (´10) AR-330SU AR-330SU= (AR-330TU) ´10
17 Charging Plate Charging Plate ´10 125K (´10) AR-330PU AR-330PU= (AR-330NU) ´10
18 Waste Toner Bottle Waste Toner Bottle ´1 AR-330TB
19 Busing Busing ´2 ´10 250K (´10) SF-240BU SF-240BU= (SF-240DU) ´10
20 Ozone Filter Ozone Filter ´10 125K (´10) AR-330FL AR-330FL= (AR-330JL) ´10
21 Ozone Filter 50 Ozone Filter 50 ´10 125K (´10) AR-505FL AR-505FL= (AR-505JL) ´10
22 MC Unit MC Unit ´10 AR-330MC AR-330MC= (AR-330NC) ´10
Note: Maintenance parts other than mentioned above must be ordered through the parts department using the proper part number.
3–2 7/13/2000
B. Canada
AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337
MODEL NAME
No. ITEM CONTENTS LIFE AR-280/285/ AR-250/281/ REMARKS
AR-287/337
335 286/336
1 Drum OPC Drum ´1 160K AR-330DR AR-336DR
AR-330MD AR-336MD AR-330MD = (AR-330ND) ´ 10
2 Developer (Black) Developer (800g) ´10 80K (´10)
(AR330ND) (AR-336ND) AR-336MD = (AR-336ND) ´ 10
AR-330MT AR-400MT AR-330MT = (AR-330NT) ´ 10
3 Toner (Black) Toner Cartridge (700g) ´10 17.5K (´10)
(AR-330NT) (AR-400NT) AR-400MT = (AR-400NT) ´ 10
Cleaner Blade ´1
Charging Plate Unit ´1
Waste Toner Bottle ´3
4 80K PM Kit Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 80K AR-330KA AR-400KA
Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2
Screen Grid ´1
Drum Separation Unit ´1
Upper Heat Roller ´1
Lower Heat Roller ´1
5 160K PM Kit Toner Receiving Seal ´1 160K AR-330KB AR-337KB
DV Seal ´1
Heat Roller Gear ´1
Cartridge for AR-FN1
6 Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge (SF-SC11) ´3 5K staples ´3 SF-SC11
Common with S55,S55 N
Cartridge for AR-FN2
7 Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge (SF-SC12) ´3 5K staples ´3 SF-LS12 Common with S54
SF-LS12= (SF-SC12) ´3
8 Cleaner Blade Cleaner Blade ´10 80K (´10) AR-330CB AR-330CB= (AR-330BL) ´10
9 Upper Heat Roller Upper Heat Roller ´1 160K AR-330HU
Fusing Separation SF216UP=SF-216TP
10 Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 ´10 80K (´10) SF-216UP
Pawl (upper) (incl.4 pawls) ´10
11 Heat Roller Gear Heat Roller Gear ´10 160K (´10) SF-216HG SF216HG= (SF216JG) ´10
12 Lower Heat Roller Lower Heat Roller ´1 160K AR-330HR AR-505HR
Fusing Separation SF240LP=SF-240MP
13 Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2 ´10 80K (´10) SF-240LP
Pawl (lower) (incl.2 pawls) ´10
SF240DP=SF-240EP
14 Drum Separation Pawl Drum Separation Pawl ´2 ´10 80K (´10) SF-240DP
(incl.2 pawls) ´10
15 Screen Grid Screen Grid ´10 80K (´10) AR-330SU AR-330SU= (AR-330TU) ´10
16 Charging Plate Charging Plate ´10 80K (´10) AR-330PU AR-330PU= (AR-330NU) ´10
17 Waste Toner Bottle Waste Toner Bottle ´1 AR-330TB
18 Busing Busing ´2 ´10 160K (´10) SF-240BU SF-240BU= (SF-240DU) ´10
19 Ozone Filter Ozone Filter ´10 80K (´10) AR-330FL AR-330FL= (AR-330JL) ´10
20 Copy Lamp Copy Lamp ´10 AR-330CL AR-330CL= (AR-330DL) ´10
21 MC Unit MC Unit ´10 AR-330MC AR-330MC= (AR-330NC) ´10
: AR-280/285/335 only
Note: Maintenance parts other than mentioned above must be ordered through the parts department using the proper part number.
7/13/2000 3–3
AR-405/407
MODEL NAME
No. ITEM CONTENTS LIFE REMARKS
AR-405 AR-407
1 Drum OPC Drum ´1 180K AR-400DR
2 Developer (Black) Developer (800g) ´10 80K (´10) AR-400MD AR-400MD = (AR-400ND) ´ 10
3 Toner (Black) Toner Cartridge (700g) ´10 22K (´1) AR-400MT AR-400MT = (AR-400NT) ´ 10
Cleaner Blade ´1
Charging Plate Unit ´1
Waste Toner Bottle ´3
4 90K PM Kit Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 90K AR-400KA
Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2
Screen Grid ´1
Drum Separation Unit ´1
Upper Heat Roller ´1
Lower Heat Roller ´1
5 180K PM Kit Toner Receiving Seal ´1 180K AR-330KB AR-337KB
DV Seal ´1
Heat Roller Gear ´1
Cartridge for AR-FN1
6 Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge (SF-SC11) ´3 5K staples ´3 SF-SC11
Common with S55,S55 N
Cartridge for AR-FN2
7 Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge (SF-SC12) ´3 5K staples ´3 SF-LS12 Common with S54
SF-LS12= (SF-SC12) ´3
8 Cleaner Blade Cleaner Blade ´10 90K (´10) AR-330CB AR-330CB= (AR-330BL) ´10
9 Upper Heat Roller Upper Heat Roller ´1 180K AR-330HU
SF216UP=SF-216TP (incl.4
10 Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 ´10 90K (´10) SF-216UP
pawls) ´10
11 Heat Roller Gear Heat Roller Gear ´10 180K (´10) SF-216HG SF216HG= (SF216JG) ´10
12 Lower Heat Roller Lower Heat Roller ´1 180K AR-330HR AR-505HR
SF240LP=SF-240MP (incl.2
13 Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2 ´10 90K (´10) SF-240LP
pawls) ´10
SF240DP=SF-240EP (incl.2
14 Drum Separation Pawl Drum Separation Pawl ´2 ´10 90K (´10) SF-240DP
pawls) ´10
15 Screen Grid Screen Grid ´10 90K (´10) AR-330SU AR-330SU= (AR-330TU) ´10
16 Charging Plate Charging Plate ´10 90K (´10) AR-330PU AR-330PU= (AR-330NU) ´10
17 Waste Toner Bottle Waste Toner Bottle ´1 AR-330TB
18 Busing Busing ´2 ´10 180K (´10) SF-240BU SF-240BU= (SF-240DU) ´10
19 Ozone Filter Ozone Filter ´10 90K (´10) AR-330FL AR-330FL= (AR-330JL) ´10
20 MC Unit MC Unit ´10 AR-330MC AR-330MC= (AR-330NC) ´10
Note: Maintenance parts other than mentioned above must be ordered through the parts department using the proper part number.
AR-505/507
MODEL
No. ITEM CONTENTS LIFE REMARKS
NAME
1 Drum OPC Drum ´1 250K AR-500DR
AR-500MD
2 Developer (Black) Developer (800g) ´10 250K (´10) (AR-500ND) ´10 = AR-500MD
(AR500ND)
AR-500MT
3 Toner (Black) Toner Cartridge (700g) ´10 25K (´10) (AR-500NT) ´10 = AR-500MT
(AR-500NT)
Cleaner Blade ´1
Charging Plate Unit ´1
Waste Toner Bottle ´3
Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4
4 125K PM Kit Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2 125K AR-505KA
Screen Grid ´1
Drum Separation Unit ´1
Cleaning Roller ´1
Upper CL Roller Unit ´1
Upper Heat Roller ´1
Lower Heat Roller ´1
Toner Receiving Seal ´1
5 250K PM Kit 250K AR-505KB
DV Seal ´1
Heat Roller Gear ´1
Curl Adjustment Roller ´1
Cartridge for AR-FN1/FN1N/FN3
6 Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge (SF-SC11) ´3 5K staples ´3 SF-SC11
Common with S55,S55 N
7 Cleaner Blade Cleaner Blade ´10 125K (´10) AR-330CB AR-330CB= (AR-330BL) ´10
8 Upper Heat Roller Upper Heat Roller ´1 250K AR-505HU
9 Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 ´10 125K (´10) AR-505UP AR-505UP=AR-505TP (incl.4 pawls) ´10
10 Heat Roller Gear Heat Roller Gear ´10 250K (´10) SF-216HG SF216HG= (SF216JG) ´10
11 Lower Heat Roller Lower Heat Roller ´1 250K AR-505HR
12 Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2 ´10 125K (´10) SF-240LP SF240LP=SF-240MP (incl.2 pawls) ´10
13 Drum Separation Pawl Drum Separation Pawl ´2 ´10 125K (´10) AR-505DP AR-505DP=AR-505EP (incl.2 pawls) ´10
14 Screen Grid Screen Grid ´10 125K (´10) AR-330SU AR-330SU= (AR-330TU) ´10
15 Charging Plate Charging Plate ´10 125K (´10) AR-330PU AR-330PU= (AR-330NU) ´10
16 Waste Toner Bottle Waste Toner Bottle ´1 AR-330TB
17 Busing Busing ´2 ´10 250K (´10) SF-240BU SF-240BU= (SF-240DU) ´10
18 Ozone Filter Ozone Filter ´10 125K (´10) AR-330FL AR-330FL= (AR-330JL) ´10
19 Ozone Filter 50 Ozone Filter 50 ´10 125K (´10) AR-505FL AR-505FL= (AR-505JL) ´10
20 MC Unit MC Unit ´10 AR-330MC AR-330MC= (AR-330NC) ´10
21 Curl Adjustment Roller Curl Adjustment Roller ´10 250K (´10) AR-505KR AR-505KR= (AR-505JR) ´10
Note: Maintenance parts other than mentioned above must be ordered through the parts department using the proper part number.
3–4 7/13/2000
C. Europe / U.K. / Australia / New Zealand
AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337
MODEL NAME
No. ITEM CONTENTS LIFE AR-280/285/ AR-250/281/ REMARKS
AR-287/337
335 286/336
1 Drum OPC Drum ´1 160K AR-330DM AR-331DM
AR-330LD AR-336LD AR-330LD = (AR-330DV) ´ 10
2 Developer (Black) Developer (800g) ´10 80K (´10)
(AR330DV) (AR-336DV) AR-336LD = (AR-336DV) ´ 10
AR-330LT AR-400LT AR-330LT = (AR-330T) ´ 10
3 Toner (Black) Toner Cartridge (700g) ´10 17.5K (´10)
(AR-330T) (AR-400T) AR-400LT = (AR-400T) ´ 10
Cleaner Blade ´1
Charging Plate Unit ´1
Waste Toner Bottle ´3
4 80K PM Kit Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 80K AR-330KA AR-400KA
Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2
Screen Grid ´1
Drum Separation Unit ´1
Upper Heat Roller ´1
Lower Heat Roller ´1
5 160K PM Kit Toner Receiving Seal ´1 160K AR-330KB AR-337KB
DV Seal ´1
Heat Roller Gear ´1
Cartridge for AR-FN1
6 Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge (SF-SC11) ´3 5K staples ´3 SF-SC11
Common with S55,S55 N
Cartridge for AR-FN2
7 Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge (SF-SC12) ´3 5K staples ´3 SF-LS12 Common with S54
SF-LS12= (SF-SC12) ´3
8 Cleaner Blade Cleaner Blade ´10 80K (´10) AR-330CB AR-330CB= (AR-330BL) ´10
9 Upper Heat Roller Upper Heat Roller ´1 160K AR-330HU
Fusing Separation Pawl SF216UP=SF-216TP
10 Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 ´10 80K (´10) SF-216UP
(upper) (incl.4 pawls) ´10
11 Heat Roller Gear Heat Roller Gear ´10 160K (´10) SF-216HG SF216HG= (SF216JG) ´10
12 Lower Heat Roller Lower Heat Roller ´1 160K AR-330HR AR-505HR
Fusing Separation Pawl SF240LP=SF-240MP
13 Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2 ´10 80K (´10) SF-240LP
(upper) (incl.2 pawls) ´10
SF240DP=SF-240EP
14 Drum Separation Pawl Drum Separation Pawl ´2 ´10 80K (´10) SF-240DP
(incl.2 pawls) ´10
15 Screen Grid Screen Grid ´10 80K (´10) AR-330SU AR-330SU= (AR-330TU) ´10
16 Charging Plate Charging Plate ´10 80K (´10) AR-330PU AR-330PU= (AR-330NU) ´10
17 Waste Toner Bottle Waste Toner Bottle ´1 AR-330TB
18 Busing Busing ´2 ´10 160K (´10) SF-240BU SF-240BU= (SF-240DU) ´10
19 Ozone Filter Ozone Filter ´10 80K (´10) AR-330FL AR-330FL= (AR-330JL) ´10
20 Copy Lamp Copy Lamp ´10 AR-330CL AR-330CL= (AR-330DL) ´10
21 MC Unit MC Unit ´10 AR-330MC AR-330MC= (AR-330NC) ´10
: AR-280/285/335 only
Note: Maintenance parts other than mentioned above must be ordered through the parts department using the proper part number.
7/13/2000 3–5
AR-405/407
MODEL NAME
No. ITEM CONTENTS LIFE REMARKS
AR-405 AR-407
1 Drum OPC Drum ´1 180K AR-400DM
2 Developer (Black) Developer (800g) ´10 90K (´10) AR-400LD AR-400LD = (AR-400DV) ´ 10
3 Toner (Black) Toner Cartridge (700g) ´10 22K (´1) AR-400LT AR-400LT = (AR-400T) ´ 10
Cleaner Blade ´1
Charging Plate Unit ´1
Waste Toner Bottle ´3
4 90K PM Kit Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 90K AR-400KA
Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2
Screen Grid ´1
Drum Separation Unit ´1
Upper Heat Roller ´1
Lower Heat Roller ´1
5 180K PM Kit Toner Receiving Seal ´1 180K AR-400KB AR-407KB
DV Seal ´1
Heat Roller Gear ´1
Cartridge for AR-FN1
6 Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge (SF-SC11) ´3 5K staples ´3 SF-SC11
Common with S55,S55 N
Cartridge for AR-FN2
7 Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge (SF-SC12) ´3 5K staples ´3 SF-LS12 Common with S54
SF-LS12= (SF-SC12) ´3
8 Cleaner Blade Cleaner Blade ´10 90K (´10) AR-330CB AR-330CB= (AR-330BL) ´10
9 Upper Heat Roller Upper Heat Roller ´1 180K AR-400HU
10 Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 ´10 90K (´10) SF-216UP SF216UP=SF-216TP (incl.4 pawls) ´10
11 Heat Roller Gear Heat Roller Gear ´10 180K (´10) SF-216HG SF216HG= (SF216JG) ´10
12 Lower Heat Roller Lower Heat Roller ´1 180K AR-330HR AR-505HR
13 Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2 ´10 90K (´10) SF-240LP SF240LP=SF-240MP (incl.2 pawls) ´10
14 Drum Separation Pawl Drum Separation Pawl ´2 ´10 90K (´10) SF-240DP SF240DP=SF-240EP (incl.2 pawls) ´10
15 Screen Grid Screen Grid ´10 90K (´10) AR-330SU AR-330SU= (AR-330TU) ´10
16 Charging Plate Charging Plate ´10 90K (´10) AR-330PU AR-330PU= (AR-330NU) ´10
17 Waste Toner Bottle Waste Toner Bottle ´1 AR-330TB
18 Busing Busing ´2 ´10 180K (´10) SF-240BU SF-240BU= (SF-240DU) ´10
19 Ozone Filter Ozone Filter ´10 90K (´10) AR-330FL AR-330FL= (AR-330JL) ´10
20 MC Unit MC Unit ´10 AR-330MC AR-330MC= (AR-330NC) ´10
Note: Maintenance parts other than mentioned above must be ordered through the parts department using the proper part number.
AR-505/507
No. ITEM CONTENTS LIFE MODEL NAME REMARKS
1 Drum OPC Drum ´1 250K AR-500DM
2 Developer (Black) Developer (800g) ´10 250K (´10) AR-500LD (AR-500DV) ´10 = AR-500LD
(AR-500DV)
3 Toner (Black) Toner Cartridge (700g) ´10 25K (´10) AR-500LT (AR-500T) ´10 = AR-500LT
(AR-500T)
Cleaner Blade ´1
Charging Plate Unit ´1
Waste Toner Bottle ´3
4 125K PM Kit Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 125K AR-505KA
Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2
Screen Grid ´1
Drum Separation Unit ´1
Cleaning Roller ´1
Upper Heat Roller ´1
Lower Heat Roller ´1
Toner Receiving Seal ´1
5 250K PM Kit DV Seal ´1 250K AR-505KB
Heat Roller Gear ´1
Curl Adjustment Roller ´1
Upper CL Roller Unit ´1
6 Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge (SF-SC11) ´3 5K staples ´3 SF-SC11 Cartridge for AR-FN1/FN1N/FN3
Common with S55,S55 N
7 Cleaner Blade Cleaner Blade ´10 125K (´10) AR-330CB AR-330CB= (AR-330BL) ´10
8 Upper Heat Roller Upper Heat Roller ´1 250K AR-505HU
9 Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 ´10 125K (´10) AR-505UP AR-505UP=AR-505TP (incl.4 pawls) ´10
10 Heat Roller Gear Heat Roller Gear ´10 250K (´10) SF-216HG SF216HG= (SF216JG) ´10
11 Lower Heat Roller Lower Heat Roller ´1 250K AR-505HR
12 Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2 ´10 125K (´10) SF-240LP SF240LP=SF-240MP (incl.2 pawls) ´10
13 Drum Separation Pawl Drum Separation Pawl ´2 ´10 125K (´10) AR-505DP AR-505DP=AR-505EP (incl.2 pawls) ´10
14 Screen Grid Screen Grid ´10 125K (´10) AR-330SU AR-330SU= (AR-330TU) ´10
15 Charging Plate Charging Plate ´10 125K (´10) AR-330PU AR-330PU= (AR-330NU) ´10
16 Waste Toner Bottle Waste Toner Bottle ´1 AR-330TB
17 Busing Busing ´2 ´10 250K (´10) SF-240BU SF-240BU= (SF-240DU) ´10
18 Ozone Filter Ozone Filter ´10 125K (´10) AR-330FL AR-330FL= (AR-330JL) ´10
19 Ozone Filter 50 Ozone Filter 50 ´10 125K (´10) AR-505FL AR-505FL= (AR-505JL) ´10
20 MC Unit MC Unit ´10 AR-330MC AR-330MC= (AR-330NC) ´10
21 Curl Adjustment Roller Curl Adjustment Roller ´10 250K (´10) AR-505KR AR-505KR= (AR-505JR) ´10
Note: Maintenance parts other than mentioned above must be ordered through the parts department using the proper part number.
3–6 7/13/2000
D. Asia / Middle & South America
AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337
MODEL NAME
No. ITEM CONTENTS LIFE AR-280/285/ AR-250/281/ AR-287/337 REMARKS
335 286/336
1 Drum OPC Drum ´1 160K AR-330DR AR-336DR
2 Developer (Black) Developer (800g) ´10 80K (´10) AR-330CD AR-336CD AR-330CD = (AR-330SD) ´ 10
(AR330SD) (AR-336SD) AR-336CD = (AR-336SD) ´ 10
3 Toner (Black) Toner Cartridge (700g) ´10 17.5K (´10) AR-330CT AR-400CT AR-330CT = (AR-330ST) ´ 10
(AR-330ST) (AR-400ST) AR-400CT = (AR-400ST) ´ 10
Cleaner Blade ´1
Charging Plate Unit ´1
Waste Toner Bottle ´3
4 80K PM Kit Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 80K AR-330KA
Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2
Screen Grid ´1
Drum Separation Unit ´1
Upper Heat Roller ´1
Lower Heat Roller ´1
5 160K PM Kit Toner Receiving Seal ´1 160K AR-330KB AR-337KB
DV Seal ´1
Heat Roller Gear ´1
6 Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge (SF-SC11) ´3 5K staples ´3 SF-SC11 Cartridge for AR-FN1
Common with S55,S55 N
Cartridge for AR-FN2
7 Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge (SF-SC12) ´3 5K staples ´3 SF-LS12 Common with S54
SF-LS12= (SF-SC12) ´3
8 Cleaner Blade Cleaner Blade ´10 80K (´10) AR-330CB AR-330CB= (AR-330BL) ´10
9 Upper Heat Roller Upper Heat Roller ´1 160K AR-330HU
10 Fusing Separation Pawl Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 ´10 80K (´10) SF-216UP SF216UP=SF-216TP
(upper) (incl.4 pawls) ´10
11 Heat Roller Gear Heat Roller Gear ´10 160K (´10) SF-216HG SF216HG= (SF216JG) ´10
12 Lower Heat Roller Lower Heat Roller ´1 160K AR-330HR AR-505HR
13 Fusing Separation Pawl Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2 ´10 80K (´10) SF-240LP SF240LP=SF-240MP
(lower) (incl.2 pawls) ´10
14 Drum Separation Pawl Drum Separation Pawl ´2 ´10 80K (´10) SF-240DP SF240DP=SF-240EP
(incl.2 pawls) ´10
15 Screen Grid Screen Grid ´10 80K (´10) AR-330SU AR-330SU= (AR-330TU) ´10
16 Charging Plate Charging Plate ´10 80K (´10) AR-330PU AR-330PU= (AR-330NU) ´10
17 Waste Toner Bottle Waste Toner Bottle ´1 AR-330TB
18 Busing Busing ´2 ´10 160K (´10) SF-240BU SF-240BU= (SF-240DU) ´10
19 Ozone Filter Ozone Filter ´10 80K (´10) AR-330FL AR-330FL= (AR-330JL) ´10
20 Copy Lamp Copy Lamp ´10 AR-330CL AR-330CL= (AR-330DL) ´10
21 MC Unit MC Unit ´10 AR-330MC AR-330MC= (AR-330NC) ´10
: AR-280/285/335 only
Note: Maintenance parts other than mentioned above must be ordered through the parts department using the proper part number.
7/13/2000 3–7
AR-405/407
MODEL NAME
No. ITEM CONTENTS LIFE REMARKS
AR-405 AR-407
1 Drum OPC Drum ´1 180K AR-400DM
2 Developer (Black) Developer (800g) ´10 90K (´10) AR-400CD AR-400CD = (AR-400SD) ´ 10
3 Toner (Black) Toner Cartridge (700g) ´10 22K (´1) AR-400CT AR-400CT = (AR-400ST) ´ 10
Cleaner Blade ´1
Charging Plate Unit ´1
Waste Toner Bottle ´3
4 90K PM Kit Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 90K AR-400KA
Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2
Screen Grid ´1
Drum Separation Unit ´1
Upper Heat Roller ´1
Lower Heat Roller ´1
5 180K PM Kit Toner Receiving Seal ´1 180K AR-400KB AR-407KB
DV Seal ´1
Heat Roller Gear ´1
Cartridge for AR-FN1
6 Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge (SF-SC11) ´3 5K staples ´3 SF-SC11
Common with S55,S55 N
Cartridge for AR-FN2
7 Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge (SF-SC12) ´3 5K staples ´3 SF-LS12 Common with S54
SF-LS12= (SF-SC12) ´3
8 Cleaner Blade Cleaner Blade ´10 90K (´10) AR-330CB AR-330CB= (AR-330BL) ´10
9 Upper Heat Roller Upper Heat Roller ´1 180K AR-400HU
10 Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 ´10 90K (´10) SF-216UP SF216UP=SF-216TP (incl.4 pawls) ´10
11 Heat Roller Gear Heat Roller Gear ´10 180K (´10) SF-216HG SF216HG= (SF216JG) ´10
12 Lower Heat Roller Lower Heat Roller ´1 180K AR-330HR AR-505HR
13 Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2 ´10 90K (´10) SF-240LP SF240LP=SF-240MP (incl.2 pawls) ´10
14 Drum Separation Pawl Drum Separation Pawl ´2 ´10 90K (´10) SF-240DP SF240DP=SF-240EP (incl.2 pawls) ´10
15 Screen Grid Screen Grid ´10 90K (´10) AR-330SU AR-330SU= (AR-330TU) ´10
16 Charging Plate Charging Plate ´10 90K (´10) AR-330PU AR-330PU= (AR-330NU) ´10
17 Waste Toner Bottle Waste Toner Bottle ´1 AR-330TB
18 Busing Busing ´2 ´10 180K (´10) SF-240BU SF-240BU= (SF-240DU) ´10
19 Ozone Filter Ozone Filter ´10 90K (´10) AR-330FL AR-330FL= (AR-330JL) ´10
20 MC Unit MC Unit ´10 AR-330MC AR-330MC= (AR-330NC) ´10
Note: Maintenance parts other than mentioned above must be ordered through the parts department using the proper part number.
AR-505/507
MODEL
No. ITEM CONTENTS LIFE REMARKS
NAME
1 Drum OPC Drum ´1 250K AR-500DR
AR-500CD
2 Developer (Black) Developer (800g) ´10 250K (´10) (AR-500SD) ´10 = AR-500CD
(AR500SD)
AR-500CT
3 Toner (Black) Toner Cartridge (700g) ´10 25K (´10) (AR-500ST) ´10 = AR-500CT
(AR-500ST)
Cleaner Blade ´1
Charging Plate Unit ´1
Waste Toner Bottle ´3
Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4
4 125K PM Kit Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2 125K AR-505KA
Screen Grid ´1
Drum Separation Unit ´1
Cleaning Roller ´1
Upper CL Roller Unit ´1
Upper Heat Roller ´1
Lower Heat Roller ´1
Toner Receiving Seal ´1
5 250K PM Kit 250K AR-505KB
DV Seal ´1
Heat Roller Gear ´1
Curl Adjustment Roller ´1
Cartridge for AR-FN1/FN1N/FN3
6 Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge (SF-SC11) ´3 5K staples ´3 SF-SC11
Common with S55,S55 N
7 Cleaner Blade Cleaner Blade ´10 125K (´10) AR-330CB AR-330CB= (AR-330BL) ´10
8 Upper Heat Roller Upper Heat Roller ´1 250K AR-505HU
9 Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 ´10 125K (´10) AR-505UP AR-505UP=AR-505TP (incl.4 pawls) ´10
10 Heat Roller Gear Heat Roller Gear ´10 250K (´10) SF-216HG SF216HG= (SF216JG) ´10
11 Lower Heat Roller Lower Heat Roller ´1 250K AR-505HR
12 Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2 ´10 125K (´10) SF-240LP SF240LP=SF-240MP (incl.2 pawls) ´10
13 Drum Separation Pawl Drum Separation Pawl ´2 ´10 125K (´10) AR-505DP AR-505DP=AR-505EP (incl.2 pawls) ´10
14 Screen Grid Screen Grid ´10 125K (´10) AR-330SU AR-330SU= (AR-330TU) ´10
15 Charging Plate Charging Plate ´10 125K (´10) AR-330PU AR-330PU= (AR-330NU) ´10
16 Waste Toner Bottle Waste Toner Bottle ´1 AR-330TB
17 Busing Busing ´2 ´10 250K (´10) SF-240BU SF-240BU= (SF-240DU) ´10
18 Ozone Filter Ozone Filter ´10 125K (´10) AR-330FL AR-330FL= (AR-330JL) ´10
19 Ozone Filter 50 Ozone Filter 50 ´10 125K (´10) AR-505FL AR-505FL= (AR-505JL) ´10
20 MC Unit MC Unit ´10 AR-330MC AR-330MC= (AR-330NC) ´10
21 Curl Adjustment Roller Curl Adjustment Roller ´10 250K (´10) AR-505KR AR-505KR= (AR-505JR) ´10
Note: Maintenance parts other than mentioned above must be ordered through the parts department using the proper part number.
3–8 7/13/2000
E. Middle East / Africa
AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337
MODEL NAME
No. ITEM CONTENTS LIFE AR-280/285/ AR-250/281/ AR-287/337 REMARKS
335 286/336
1 Drum OPC Drum ´1 160K AR-330DM AR-336DM
2 Developer (Black) Developer (800g) ´10 80K (´10) AR-330LD AR-336LD AR-330LD = (AR-330DV) ´ 10
(AR330DV) (AR-336DV) AR-336LD = (AR-336DV) ´ 10
3 Toner (Black) Toner Cartridge (700g) ´10 17.5K (´10) AR-330LT AR-400LT AR-330LT = (AR-330T) ´ 10
(AR-330T) (AR-400T) AR-400LT = (AR-400T) ´ 10
Cleaner Blade ´1
Charging Plate Unit ´1
Waste Toner Bottle ´3
4 80K PM Kit Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 80K AR-330KA
Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2
Screen Grid ´1
Drum Separation Unit ´1
Upper Heat Roller ´1
Lower Heat Roller ´1
5 160K PM Kit Toner Receiving Seal ´1 160K AR-330KB AR-337KB
DV Seal ´1
Heat Roller Gear ´1
6 Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge (SF-SC11) ´3 5K staples ´3 SF-SC11 Cartridge for AR-FN1
Common with S55,S55 N
Cartridge for AR-FN2
7 Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge (SF-SC12) ´3 5K staples ´3 SF-LS12 Common with S54
SF-LS12= (SF-SC12) ´3
8 Cleaner Blade Cleaner Blade ´10 80K (´10) AR-330CB AR-330CB= (AR-330BL) ´10
9 Upper Heat Roller Upper Heat Roller ´1 160K AR-330HU
10 Fusing Separation Pawl Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 ´10 80K (´10) SF-216UP SF216UP=SF-216TP
(upper) (incl.4 pawls) ´10
11 Heat Roller Gear Heat Roller Gear ´10 160K (´10) SF-216HG SF216HG= (SF216JG) ´10
12 Lower Heat Roller Lower Heat Roller ´1 160K AR-330HR AR-505HR
13 Fusing Separation Pawl Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2 ´10 80K (´10) SF-240LP SF240LP=SF-240MP
(lower) (incl.2 pawls) ´10
SF240DP=SF-240EP
14 Drum Separation Pawl Drum Separation Pawl ´2 ´10 80K (´10) SF-240DP
(incl.2 pawls) ´10
15 Screen Grid Screen Grid ´10 80K (´10) AR-330SU AR-330SU= (AR-330TU) ´10
16 Charging Plate Charging Plate ´10 80K (´10) AR-330PU AR-330PU= (AR-330NU) ´10
17 Waste Toner Bottle Waste Toner Bottle ´1 AR-330TB
18 Busing Busing ´2 ´10 160K (´10) SF-240BU SF-240BU= (SF-240DU) ´10
19 Ozone Filter Ozone Filter ´10 80K (´10) AR-330FL AR-330FL= (AR-330JL) ´10
20 Copy Lamp Copy Lamp ´10 AR-330CL AR-330CL= (AR-330DL) ´10
21 MC Unit MC Unit ´10 AR-330MC AR-330MC= (AR-330NC) ´10
: AR-280/285/335 only
Note: Maintenance parts other than mentioned above must be ordered through the parts department using the proper part number.
7/13/2000 3–9
AR-405/407
MODEL NAME
No. ITEM CONTENTS LIFE REMARKS
AR-405 AR-407
1 Drum OPC Drum ´1 180K AR-400DM
2 Developer (Black) Developer (800g) ´10 90K (´10) AR-400LD AR-400LD = (AR-400DV) ´ 10
3 Toner (Black) Toner Cartridge (700g) ´10 22K (´1) AR-400LT AR-400LT = (AR-400T) ´ 10
Cleaner Blade ´1
Charging Plate Unit ´1
Waste Toner Bottle ´3
4 90K PM Kit Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 90K AR-400KA
Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2
Screen Grid ´1
Drum Separation Unit ´1
Upper Heat Roller ´1
Lower Heat Roller ´1
5 180K PM Kit Toner Receiving Seal ´1 180K AR-400KB AR-407KB
DV Seal ´1
Heat Roller Gear ´1
6 Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge (SF-SC11) ´3 5K staples ´3 SF-SC11 Cartridge for AR-FN1
Common with S55,S55 N
Cartridge for AR-FN2
7 Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge (SF-SC12) ´3 5K staples ´3 SF-LS12 Common with S54
SF-LS12= (SF-SC12) ´3
8 Cleaner Blade Cleaner Blade ´10 90K (´10) AR-330CB AR-330CB= (AR-330BL) ´10
9 Upper Heat Roller Upper Heat Roller ´1 180K AR-400HU
10 Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 ´10 90K (´10) SF-216UP SF216UP=SF-216TP (incl.4 pawls) ´10
11 Heat Roller Gear Heat Roller Gear ´10 180K (´10) SF-216HG SF216HG= (SF216JG) ´10
12 Lower Heat Roller Lower Heat Roller ´1 180K AR-330HR AR-505HR
13 Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2 ´10 90K (´10) SF-240LP SF240LP=SF-240MP (incl.2 pawls) ´10
14 Drum Separation Pawl Drum Separation Pawl ´2 ´10 90K (´10) SF-240DP SF240DP=SF-240EP (incl.2 pawls) ´10
15 Screen Grid Screen Grid ´10 90K (´10) AR-330SU AR-330SU= (AR-330TU) ´10
16 Charging Plate Charging Plate ´10 90K (´10) AR-330PU AR-330PU= (AR-330NU) ´10
17 Waste Toner Bottle Waste Toner Bottle ´1 AR-330TB
18 Busing Busing ´2 ´10 180K (´10) SF-240BU SF-240BU= (SF-240DU) ´10
19 Ozone Filter Ozone Filter ´10 90K (´10) AR-330FL AR-330FL= (AR-330JL) ´10
20 MC Unit MC Unit ´10 AR-330MC AR-330MC= (AR-330NC) ´10
Note: Maintenance parts other than mentioned above must be ordered through the parts department using the proper part number.
AR-505/507
MODEL
No. ITEM CONTENTS LIFE REMARKS
NAME
1 Drum OPC Drum ´1 250K AR-500DM
AR-500LD
2 Developer (Black) Developer (800g) ´10 250K (´10) (AR-500DV) ´10 = AR-500LD
(AR500DV)
AR-500LT
3 Toner (Black) Toner Cartridge (700g) ´10 25K (´10) (AR-500T) ´10 = AR-500LT
(AR-500T)
Cleaner Blade ´1
Charging Plate Unit ´1
Waste Toner Bottle ´3
Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4
4 125K PM Kit 125K AR-505KA
Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2
Screen Grid ´1
Drum Separation Unit ´1
Cleaning Roller ´1
Upper Heat Roller ´1
Lower Heat Roller ´1
Toner Receiving Seal ´1
5 250K PM Kit DV Seal ´1 250K AR-505KB
Heat Roller Gear ´1
Curl Adjustment Roller ´1
Upper CL Roller Unit ´1
Cartridge for AR-FN1/FN1N/FN3
6 Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge (SF-SC11) ´3 5K staples ´3 SF-SC11
Common with S55,S55 N
7 Cleaner Blade Cleaner Blade ´10 125K (´10) AR-330CB AR-330CB= (AR-330BL) ´10
8 Upper Heat Roller Upper Heat Roller ´1 250K AR-505HU
9 Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) Fusing Separation Pawl (upper) ´4 ´10 125K (´10) AR-505UP AR-505UP=AR-505TP (incl.4 pawls) ´10
10 Heat Roller Gear Heat Roller Gear ´10 250K (´10) SF-216HG SF216HG= (SF216JG) ´10
11 Lower Heat Roller Lower Heat Roller ´1 250K AR-505HR
12 Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) Fusing Separation Pawl (lower) ´2 ´10 125K (´10) SF-240LP SF240LP=SF-240MP (incl.2 pawls) ´10
13 Drum Separation Pawl Drum Separation Pawl ´2 ´10 125K (´10) AR-505DP AR-505DP=AR-505EP (incl.2 pawls) ´10
14 Screen Grid Screen Grid ´10 125K (´10) AR-330SU AR-330SU= (AR-330TU) ´10
15 Charging Plate Charging Plate ´10 125K (´10) AR-330PU AR-330PU= (AR-330NU) ´10
16 Waste Toner Bottle Waste Toner Bottle ´1 AR-330TB
17 Busing Busing ´2 ´10 250K (´10) SF-240BU SF-240BU= (SF-240DU) ´10
18 Ozone Filter Ozone Filter ´10 125K (´10) AR-330FL AR-330FL= (AR-330JL) ´10
19 Ozone Filter 50 Ozone Filter 50 ´10 125K (´10) AR-505FL AR-505FL= (AR-505JL) ´10
20 MC Unit MC Unit ´10 AR-330MC AR-330MC= (AR-330NC) ´10
21 Curl Adjustment Roller Curl Adjustment Roller ´10 250K (´10) AR-505KR AR-505KR= (AR-505JR) ´10
Note: Maintenance parts other than mentioned above must be ordered through the parts department using the proper part number.
3 – 10 7/13/2000
2. Copy paper B. Use conditions
The following conditions for copy quality and transportability of PPC (%)
paper must be satisfied. The values are at temperature of 20 ±1°C 30 C 85%
100
and 65 ±2% RH. 85%
Item Standard 80
35 C 60%
Weight 56 ~ 80g/m2
60
Humidity
Smoothness Face: 20 sec or above (BEKK method) Use envi-
Back: 20 sec or above (BEKK method) ronment
40 conditions
Rigidness Length 17cm or above, width 13cm or
above (CLARK method) 20 20%
Thickness 75 ~ 110m
Dimensions Standard dimensions ± 1mm (5/128") 0
B4 (257 ±1 ´ 364±1mm) -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
B5 (182 ±1 ´ 257±1mm) Temperature ( C)
B6 (128 ±1 ´ 182±1mm)
A3 (297 ±1 ´ 420±1mm) C. Life (packed conditions)
A4 (210 ±1 ´ 297±1mm)
Photoconductor drum (36 months from the production month)
A5 (148 ±1 ´ 210±1mm)
A6 (105 ±1 ´ 148±1mm) Developer, toner (24 months from the production month)
11" ±5/128 ´ 17" ±5/128 inch
8.5" ±5/128 ´ 14" ±5/128 inch 4. Production number identification
8.5" ±5/128 ´ 11" ±5/128 inch
5.5" ±5/128 ´ 8.5" ±5/128 inch A. Photoconductor drum
8.5" ±5/128 ´ 13" ±5/128 inch
3. Environment conditions
A. Transport conditions
1) Transport condition
(%) 40 90%
100
90%
80 45 60%
Humidity
60
<TYPE A>
40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
20
AR-250/281/286/287/
10% AR-280/285/335
336/337/405/407
0
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 Numeral
1
The sensitivity of the photo conductor.
Temperature
Alphabet Alphabet
2) Storage condition (packed conditions) 2 The model code, "C" for The model code, "D" for
this model. this model.
100
Numeral
90 40 90% 3
The last digit of the production year.
80 Numeral or X, Y, Z
70 4 The production month.
Humidity (%)
40 10% Numeral
10 8, 9
The packing day.
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 Alphabet
10
Temperature The division of the production factory.
7/13/2000 3 – 11
<TYPE B> (AR-280/285/335/501/505/507) AR-250/281/286/287/336/337
<Developer>
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Alphabet
Numeral 1
1 The manufacturing factory.
This function: "2"
Numeral
Alphabet 2
The last digit of the production year.
2, 3 The applicable model. PC (AR-280/285, 335),
PH (AR-505) for this model. Numeral
3, 4
The production month.
Numeral
4 Numeral
The last digit of the production year.
5, 6, 7 The last 3 digits of 4-digit production lot number of
Numeral or X, Y, Z developer.
5 The production month.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December. Numeral
8
Distincts the production lot every 100 cases.
Numeral
6
The production lot. <Toner>
Numeral
7 None
The distinction of sub lot.
<Example>
Numeral or X, Y, Z
8 The packing month. C9112102 C The manufacturing factory
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December. 9 The year is 1999.
Numeral 11 The production month is November.
9, 10
The packing day. 210 The production lot number is 1210.
Numeral or alphabet 2 This lot is between 101th case and 200th case
11
The product name of the drum. (except AR-501/505) production this month.
B. Developer/Toner
AR-280/285/335
1 2 3 4 5 6 — 7
Numeral
1, 2, 3
The production lot.
Numeral
4
The distinction of sub lot.
AR-405/407/501/505/507
<Developer>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Alphabet
1
The manufacturing factory.
Figure
2
The end digit of the production year.
Figures
3, 4
The production month.
Figures
5, 6, 7, 8
The manufacturing factory management number
<Toner>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Numeral
1
The last digit of the production year.
Numeral or alphabet
2
The first digit of the serial No.
Numeral
3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Serial No. of one month production
Numeral or alphabet
8
The production month.
3 – 12 7/13/2000
[4] INSTALLATION AND SETUP
(Copier installation)
1. Unpacking procedures
1 Packing case
2 Top pad
3 Support
4 Copier body
5 Bottom case
6 PP band
7 Skid unit
3
In the case of RADF
7/13/2000 4–1
In the case of RSPF 2) Remove the protection material and protection sheet.
In the case of SPF
illust: AR-335
4–2 7/13/2000
2. Installing procedure C. Charger cleaning
Main charger unit electrode cleaning
(1) Copier body 1) Open the front cabinet
A. Optical system lock release 2) Press the hook section of the main charger unit to release lock.
Pull out and remove the main charger unit from the copier body.
1) Release the No. 2/3 mirror unit lock.
Remove the fixing screw (1 pc.) of the No. 2/3 mirror unit on the
left side.
4) Push the electrode cleaner onto the electrode tip so that the elec-
trode tip comes into the electrode cleaner to clean. (repeat two or
three times.)
Electromagnetic
cleaner
Electromagnetic
section
AR-250/281/286/287/336/337/405/501/505
Since the pressure lever is not installed, there is no need to check.
Note: Do not move the electrode cleaner with the electrode tip in it.
When cleaning, clean all the electrodes evenly.
7/13/2000 4–3
5) Install the electrode to the original position and fix with the fixing 3) Remove the separation charger guide from the charger case.
screw (1 pc.).
6) Insert the main charger unit completely into the copier along the
guide groove.
Transfer/separation charger unit wire cleaning
1) Slightly lift the transport section open/close lever and tilt it to the
right.
5) Install the separation charger to the charger case, and insert the
transfer/separation charger unit along the guide groove com-
pletely to the bottom.
Then, tighten the transfer/separation charger fixing screw, return
the transport section open/close lever to the left, and close the
front cabinet.
D. Accessory installation
1) Tray installation
illust: AR-335
4–4 7/13/2000
E. Upper and lower trays setting 4) Change the display of the paper size display.
1) Remove the tray packing fixing screw.
Lift the tray holder, and pull out the tray from the copier body until it Paper size
stops. display
R
A5
Remove the packing fixing screw (1 pc.) of the tray paper pressing
B5
SPECIAL
plate.
B5
B4
A3
A4
A4 R
Paper size
display
This section is folded
inside.
Partitioning plate A
Partitioning plate B
7/13/2000 4–5
3) Slide the developing unit lock lever in the arrow direction to re- 2) Supply developer from the developer supply port of the develop-
lease lock. Hold the toner cartridge holder and slowly pull out the ing unit.
developing unit until it stops.
3) Fix the toner hopper to the developing unit with the fixing screws
(4 pcs.) and connect the 5P connector between the toner hopper
and the developing unit. At that time, put the 5P connector har-
4) Hold the developing unit strap, slide the developing unit lock lever ness in the harness clamp attached to the toner hopper, and
in the arrow direction again to release lock, and remove the devel- process the harness.
oping unit.
(2) Supply developer.
1) Disconnect the 5P connector which connects the toner hopper
and the developing unit. Then remove the toner hopper fixing
screws (4 pcs.) of the developing unit.
illust.: AR-280
illust.: AR-280
4–6 7/13/2000
(3) Install the developing unit to the copier body. I. Toner supply
Install the developing unit to the copier body and push it into the body (1) Supply toner.
completely. Close the developing unit lever and the front cabinet. 1) Open the front cover.
2) Tilt the toner box lever toward you, and pull out the toner box.
P C 2 5 2
Program Interruption Clear Interruption 3) Tap the top of the toner cartridge several times, and shake the
key key key key
Start key Start key toner cartridge vertically about 20 times.
Turn the toner cartridge upside down, and vigorously shake it
vertically about 20 times again.
2) The touch panel shows the following display.
5X 20X 20X
Touch the EXECUTE on the touch panel and execute SIM 25-2.
3) Adjustment is automatically made with the toner density sensor 4) Attach the toner cartridge to the toner box.
output value displayed. After 3 min from starting stirring, the toner
density sensor is sampled 16 times and the average value is In the case of AR-501/505/507
stored as the toner density adjustment value.
Note: When the simulation is canceled before completion, automatic
reading cannot be made. Be careful not to cancel before com-
pletion.
4) Press the [CA] key to cancel SIM 25.
Note: SIM 25-2 must be executed only when developer is replaced.
For checking of the developer adjustment value in servicing,
use SIM 25-1. (Use of SIM 25-2 to check the developer adjust-
ment value in servicing may cause abnormality in the toner
density transition.)
Be careful that this simulation is different from the conven-
tional simulations.
7/13/2000 4–7
In the case of other models In the case of other models
Take off the seal end and slowly remove it.
Insert two projections of the toner cartridge into the notches of the
toner supply port.
When removing the seal, hold and fix the toner cartridge.
5) Move the toner cartridge in the arrow direction until it stops.
7) Tap the top of the toner cartridge several times.
In the case of AR-501/505/507
This is to shake off toner attached to the side surface of the toner
cartridge.
8) Move the empty toner cartridge in the arrow direction and remove
it.
Sealing tape
4–8 7/13/2000
10)CLose the front cabinet. L. Others
(1) Touch panel contrast adjustment
1) Press the CUSTOM SETTINGS key.
J. Connect the tray connector for RADF 2) Press the "DISPLAY CONTRAST" key on the touch panel.
* Temporarily fix tray fixing screw (M4 x 8), and connect the RADF
connector with the tray connector.
Tray
fixing
screw
ADF side connector 3) Press the "LIGHTER" or "DARKER" key to adjust the contrast.
Tray
fixing
screw
Tray
7/13/2000 4–9
[5] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
1. Common section
A. Exterior
20
6 7 8 19
18
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5 illust: AR-285/286/287/335/336/337
20
illust: AR-280/281
18 6 7 19
illust: AR-405/407
14
15
16 14
5 15
17
4
5 20 7 8
illust: AR-501/505/507
illust: AR-501/505/507 6
14
15
9 10 11 12 13
B. Interior
1 2 3 4 5 1 Fusing unit
2 Transport lever
3 Photoconductive drum
4 Corona unit
5 Toner hopper
6 Roller rotating knobs
7 Paper guide
illust: AR-280
6 7
5–1 7/13/2000
C. Operation Panel
(1) Key position
12 3 45 6 7 8
INFORMATION
SPECIAL
MODES
1 2 3 INTERRUPT CLEAR ALL
CUSTOM
DATA ON LINE DATA ON LINE SETTINGS CA
2-SIDED
COPY 4 5 6
START
PRINT PRI NT REVIEW
OUTPUT 7 8 9 CLEAR
1 2 3 4
illust: AR-280
5 6 7 8 9 10
7/13/2000 5–2
2. Copier body
A. Major parts
41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
40 12
13
39
38 14
37 15
36
35 16
34 17
18
33
19
20
32
21
22
5–3 7/13/2000
B. PWB location
1 2 3
1 2 3
4 4
6
7 6 7
5 8 5 8
9
26 10 26 10
11 11
25 12 25 12
14
24 24
13
14
23
23
22 15
22 15
21 16
21 16 20
20 17
17 illust: AR-280 19 illust: AR-505
19 18
18
7/13/2000 5–4
C. Sensor location
31 32 33 34,35 36 1 2 3
30
5
29 6 7
28
8 9
27
10
26
25 11
24 12
23
22 21 20 19 18 16,17 14,15 13
This illustration is strictly for the purpose of showing the location of the components.
It is not an actual model.
No. Signal name Function, operation No. Signal name Function, operation
1 OCSW Document cover open/close detection 22 DPPD1 ADU tray paper in detection 1
Operation 23 DSWLL Left lower door open/close detection
Operation PWB peripheral temperature
2 PWB 24 DH SW Dehumidifier heater switch
detection
thermistor
25 MEM SW Memory switch
3 PSD Separation detection
26 POD3 Paper exit detection (Second paper exit)
4 PPD2 PS paper detection
27 DSBD ADU reverse section detection
5 MPED Manual paper feed paper empty detection
28 POD2 Paper exit detection (ADU)
6 MPLD1 Manual paper feed paper length detection 1
29 DSWL Left upper door open/close detection
7 MPLD2 Manual paper feed paper length detection 2
30 POD1 Paper exit detection (after fusing)
8 MPLS1 Manual paper fed tray pull-out detection 1
31 MAIN SW Power switch
9 MPLS2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out detection 2
32 MHPS No. 1 mirror home position detection
10 PPD1 Paper transport detection 1
33 DSWF Front cover open/close detection
11 DSWR Right door open/close detection
Fusing
12 PFD Paper transport detection 1 section
34 Heat roller temperature detection
13 TFD Waste toner full warning detection thermistor
14 LUD1 Upper cassette upper limit detection (Center)
5–5 7/13/2000
D. Motor location
14 16
15 20 17
13 16 18
14
12 13 19
1
11 12 15
11 1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
10 10
6 6
21
7 7
9 9
22
8 illust: AR-280 8
E. Clutch solenoid
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
5 5
17 17
6 6
16
15 7
7
8 8
9 9
7/13/2000 5–6
F. 2-tray paper exit unit
5
4
3
6
2
1 7
6
10
9 7
8
5–7 7/13/2000
H. RADF (AR-285/286/287/335/336/337/405/407 only)
1) Main parts 3) Motors, solenoids, and clutches
No. Code Name Type
1 1 DFM Paper feed motor DC motor
2 2 DTM Transport motor Stepping motor
12 3 4
3 DRM Reverse motor Stepping motor
5 4 DRSOL Reverse solenoid DC solenoid
5 DFSOL Paper feed solenoid DC solenoid
9 8 2
6
11
10 7
2) PWB distribution 10 3
9
1
2
8
7
6 4
5
No. Code Functions and operations
Original length detection on the tray (Inch
5 1 DLS2
series only)
3 2 TGOD Reverse cover open/close detection
4
RDD Turns HIGH when the original lead edge is
3
transported to the reverse/paper exit path.
4 DWVR Original width detection on the tray
DTD Turns HIGH when the original lead edge is
No. Name Function, operation 5 transported from the paper feed section to the
RADF unit control, PCU vicinity of the transport belt.
1 Control PWB
communication DFD Turns HIGH when the original lead edge is fed
6
2 Reverse sensor PWB Document reverse detection just in front of the resist roller.
Document feed, document 7 DWS Original width detection
3 LED PWB
remaining display 8 FGOD Paper feed cover open/close detection
Original timing sensor 9 DFMRS Paper feed motor rotation detection
4 Document timing detection
PWB
10 AUOD ADF unit open/close detection
Original reverse
5 Document feed detection 11 DSS Original detection on the tray
sensor PWB
12 DLS1 Original length detection on the tray
7/13/2000 5–8
I. RSPF (AR-501/505/507 only)
A. Roller
4
3 5 No. Name
2 1 Paper exit roller
1 2 Read roller
6
3 Resist roller
4 Paper feed roller
5 Separation pad
6 Pickup roller
7 SB roller
15
14
13
12
11 7
10 8
9
No. Code Name Type Function and operation
1 FMOT Transport motor Stepping motor Transport and document read motor
2 DCFAN Fan motor — Transport motor cooling fan
3 ACL Paper feed clutch — Document feed clutch
4 MCLKS DCMCLK Photo transmission DC motor encoder sensor
5 AMOT Paper feed motor DC motor Document feed motor
6 PBA-CONTROL Control PWB — RSPF control PWB
7 TRS-L Tray sensor L Photo transmission Document tray longitudinal direction sensor
8 TRS-S Tray sensor S Photo transmission Document tray traverse direction sensor
9 TRVR Size volume — Document tray width direction detection volume
10 EMPS Empty sensor Photo transmission Document sensor set on the document tray
11 JAMOPEN Jam open switch — RSPF jam cover open/close detection
12 SBSOL Pressure solenoid — Reversing path document pressure solenoid
13 FLPSOL2 Flapper solenoid 2 — Read roller and document exit select solenoid
14 FLPSOL1 Flapper solenoid 1 — Reversing path and read roller select solenoid
15 DFOPEN DFOPENF Photo transmission RSPF open sensor
16 RDS Read sensor Reflection Document read timing sensor
17 REJI Resist sensor Photo transmission Paper feed resist timing sensor
18 EXITS Paper exit sensor Photo transmission Document exit sensor
19 SBS SB sensor Reflection Reversing path document sensor
20 SPS Post-separation sensor Reflection Feeding document size sensor
5–9 7/13/2000
J. ADU (AR-285/335/505/507 only)
1
18 2
3
17 4
16
5
15
6
14
13
7
12
11
10
9
8
7/13/2000 5 – 10
[6] SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS
6–1 7/13/2000
2. Copier adjustment
A. Process section
(1) Developing doctor gap adjustment
1) Remove the screw and the connector which connect the toner
hopper and the developing unit, and separate them.
2) Loosen the DV doctor fixing screw A.
3) Insert a 0.53mm (0.6mm for AR-280/285/335) thickness gauge
into the clearance of 40mm ~ 70mm from the DV doctor edge.
40mm P
30mm
17.0mm
A
2~3mm
30mm
40mm
2~3mm
4) Press the DV doctor in the arrow direction and tighten the DV 17.0mm
doctor fixing screw. (Perform the same procedure for the front and
the rear frame.)
5) Check that the clearance (2 positions) at 40mm ~ 70mm from the
both ends is 0.53 ± 0.03mm (0.6 ± 0.03mm for AR-280/285/335).
* When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the (3) Developing bias voltage adjustment
DV doctor and the MG roller.
1) Set the digital multi-meter range to the DCV range.
2) Put the test probes between the DV bias output check pin (CN2-1
pin) of the high voltage unit and the chassis (GND).
7/13/2000 6–2
3) Execute SIM 8-1. 4) When the output voltage is within the adjustment range, change
the displayed value and adjust. (1 step: about 1 V)
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/336/405)
Adjustment range
AR-501/
Others
505/507
Developing negative bias voltage (Auto) –500 ±5V –425 ±5V
Developing negative bias voltage
–500 ±5V –500 ±5V
(Character)
Developing negative bias voltage
–500 ±5V –500 ±5V
(Character, Photo)
Developing negative bias voltage
–500 ±5V –500 ±5V
(Photo)
Developing negative bias voltage
–450 ±5V –500 ±5V
(Toner save)
Developing bias (Printer) –500 ±5V –500 ±5V
Developing positive bias voltage +150 ±5V +150 ±5V
(The value and the output voltage may not coincide.)
(AR-287/337/407) 2) Turn on the main switch, and execute SIM 8-2 to check the grid
voltage set value.
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/335/336/405)
(AR-501/505/507)
(AR-287/337/407)
6–3 7/13/2000
(AR-501/505/507) (5) Transfer charger current adjustment
a. Special measurement tool
Electrode sheet (UKOG-0110FCZZ)
UK0G-0110FCZZ
UKOG-0110FCZZ
(Measurement at the high voltage PWB check point) Orange A Green (QCLIZ0005FCZZ)
Blue (QCLIZ0006FCZZ)
Black Blue
3) Remove the rear cabinet. White Black (QCLIZ0010FCZZ)
(Microswitch) Yellow (QCLIZ0004FCZZ)
4) Connect the digital multi-meter to the grid voltage output check pin White
(QSW-M0118FCZZ) Red (QCLIZ0002FCZZ)
PHOG-0007FCZZ Red
(CN2-5 pin).
QTIPH0017FCZZ
5) Set the digital multi-meter range to the DCV range.
(Use a digital multi-meter which allows measurement up to (Parts arrangement)
Orange Blue
DC1000 V.) 300KΩ X 2
White Black
6) Manually turn on the door switch. (VRN-RT2EK304F)
7) Turn on the main switch, and execute SIM 8-2 to check. b. Adjustment procedure
1) Remove the developing unit, the transfer/separation charger unit,
and the main charger unit from the copier.
2) Remove the process unit from the copier.
3) Remove the OPC drum from the process unit, and install the
electrode sheet by using a rubber band, tape, etc.
4) Install the OPC drum with the electrode sheet installed to the
process unit, and install the process unit to the copier.
5) Install the drum holder unit to the copier so that the electrode
sheet lead wire can be taken out from the developing unit side.
AR-280/285/335
7/13/2000 6–4
AR-250/281/286/287/336/337/405/407/501/505/507 9) Adjust THVG output current.
· Turn on the main switch and execute SIM 8-6.
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/335/336/405)
(AR-287/337)
(AR-407)
6) Clean the transfer charger wire separation lamp and install the
transfer/separation charger unit to the copier.
If necessary, wipe the lamp which can be seen from the square
hole of the TC guide rail with waste cloth.
(Do not install the main charger unit.)
7) Connect the electrode sheet and the digital multi-meter (or an
ampmeter). Manually turn on the door switch.
8) Check the drum current on the front frame side and the rear frame
side. (AR-501/505/507)
The current on the front and the rear frame sides: within 6.0uA
· Turn on the main switch, and execute SIM 8-6.
(THVG will be turned ON for about 30 sec.)
· Measure the drum current on the front frame side and the rear
frame side.
· When the microswitch is OFF, the drum current on the front
frame side is displayed.
· When the microswitch is ON, the drum current on the rear (THVG will be turned on for about 30 sec.)
frame side is displayed.
· If the output current is not in the specified range, change the
(OFF) (ON) displayed value and adjust. (1 step: about 0.1 mA)
N/C N/C Adjustment spec
N/O COM N/O COM
Transfer charger current AR-250/280/281/
AR-501/
285/286/287/ AR-405/407
505/507
335/336/337
· Check that the current on the front and the rear frame side is TC drum current +13.5 to +15.0 to +18.0 to
6.0mA or less. (Front surface mode) +15.0mA +16.5mA +19.5mA
TC drum current +13.5 to +15.0 to +18.0 to
If the current is greater than 6.0mA, replace the charger unit (Back surface mode) +15.0mA +16.5mA +19.5mA
with new one.
6–5 7/13/2000
(AR-407)
F Green grip
Orange Orange
R
White
Yellow grip
Microswitch
Black grip White
Body chassis
(no coating)
Black
Blue Red
(AR-501/505/507)
2
20 (DCmA)
200
Blue grip
(AR-405/407/501/505/507)
(AR-287/337)
7/13/2000 6–6
(8) Toner density adjustment (AR-501/505/507)
(Auto developer adjustment)
This adjustment must be performed in the following case:
· When new developer is supplied.
1) Execute SIM 25-2.
* When new developer is supplied, clear the developer counter E: Cassette selection
with SIM 24-5. 1 Manual feed 5 Desk middle cassette
2 Upper cassette 6 Desk lower cassette
B. Laser scanner section 3 Lower cassette 7 LCC
(1) Horizontal image distortion adjustment 4 Desk upper cassette
1) Execute SIM 64-1, and print the pattern of SQUARE from the F: Duplex print selection
manual feed tray.
1 Simplex 2 Duplex
(A: 22 E: 1)
2) Obtain value a of the printed sheet.
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337)
AR-280/285/335
AR-250/281/286/287/336/
(AR-405/407)
337/405/407/501/505/507
6–7 7/13/2000
Adjustment handle: 1 scale = 0.5mm (dimension a) (3) Laser power setting
q<90 degress: Right direction * Normally the laser power is automatically corrected by process
control. Use the image density adjustment described later unless
q>90 degrees: Left direction
there is a special request from the user.
Adjustment specification: a = 0 mm, q = 90 degrees
(AR-230/280/285/335)
(2) Print off-center adjustment All must be set to "16".
1) Execute SIM 64-1. print one sheet from each paper feed port.
Measure the void amount both sides.
When making duplex copy with OC, press the [CLOSE] key to
enter the copy menu and read two pages of documents.
Then press the [READ CORRECT] key.
* Select the self print pattern which allows easy measurement of
the void amount.
2) Execute SIM 50-10.
(AR-250/281/286/336)
All must be set to "7".
(AR-287/337)
All must be set to "8".
a
a (AR-405)
Set all to "5" except for PH256.
b
b
(AR-407)
4) Press the CA key to terminate the simulation.
All must be set to "6".
7/13/2000 6–8
(AR-501/505/507) (AR-250/281/286/287/336/337/405/407/501/505/507)
All must be set to "5".
C. Scanner section
(1) Vertical image distortion balance adjustment
(Copy lamp unit installing position adjustment)
1) Insert the front/rear mirror base drive wire into the frame groove
and press and fix it with the wire fixing plate. At that time, do not
tighten the wire fixing screw.
Change the direction of the lamp positioning plate. (F and R)
2) Push the copy lamp unit onto the positioning plate, and tighten the
wire fixing screw.
(AR-280/285/335)
24±2mm
6–9 7/13/2000
(AR-250/281/286/287/336/337/405/407/501/505/507) (3) Vertical (sub scanning direction) distortion
adjustment [Winding pulley position adjustment]
This adjustment is executed in the following cases:
· When the mirror base drive wire is replaced.
· When the lamp unit, or No. 2/3 mirror holder is replaced.
25~30mm · When a copy shown below is made.
La Lb
Paper exit
direction
Original Copy
Illust: AR-280
7/13/2000 6 – 10
4) Loosen the fixing screw of the front or the rear frame mirror base 2) Make a copy of the adjustment original on an A3 white paper at
drive pulley. the normal magnification ratio.
· If La < Lb, turn the rear frame mirror base drive pulley in (Fit the paper edge and the glass holding plate edge.)
direction B. (Do not move the mirror base drive pulley shaft.) 3) Measure the distances between the lines and the corners (4 posi-
· If La > Lb, turn the rear frame mirror base drive pulley in tions of La, Lb, Lc, Ld).
direction A. (Do not move the mirror base drive pulley shaft.) La Lc
Rear side
A
B
Paper exit
direction
Front side
Lb Ld
When La = Lb and Lc = Ld, no need to adjust.
When La = Lb = Lc = Ld, there is no need for adjustment.
4) Move the mirror base B rail position up and down (in the arrow
5) Tighten the fixing screw of the mirror base drive pulley.
direction) to adjust.
6) Perform procedures 1) through 3).
· When La > Lb, move the mirror base B rail on the paper
7) If La is not equal to Lb, perform procedures 4) and 5). exit side upward by the half of the difference of La – Lb.
If La = Lb, the adjustment is completed. · When La < Lb, move the mirror base B rail on the paper
Repeat procedures 1) through 6) until La = Lb. exit side downward by the half of the difference of Lb - La.
Example: When La = 12mm and Lb = 9mm, move the
(4) Horizontal (main scanning direction) distorion
mirror base B rail on the paper exit side 1.5mm
adjustment [Lower rail height adjustment]
upward.
When there is no distortion in the direction of mirror base scanning
· When Lc > Ld, move the mirror base B on the paper feed
and there is sub scanning direction distortion, it can be adjusted by
side downward.
changing the No. 2/3 mirror base unit rail height.
· When Lc < Ld, move the mirror base B on the paper feed
· Before this adjustment, perform the horizontal image distortion ad- side upward.
justment in the laser scanner section. * When moving the mirror base rail, hold the mirror base rail
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: handle.
· When the mirror base wire is replaced. 5) Adjust so that La = Lb and Lc = Ld.
· When the copy lamp unit and no. 2/3 mirror unit are replaced. 6) After completion of the adjustment, manually turn the mirror base
· When the mirror unit rail is replaced and moved. drive pulley to make full scanning of mirror base A and mirror base
B and check that they do not make contact.
· When a copy shown below is made.
* If the mirror base rail is moved extremely, the mirror base may
be brought into contact. Be careful of that.
Original Copy
10mm 10mm
10mm 10mm
White paper
illust: AR-280
illust: AR-280
6 – 11 7/13/2000
(5) Main scanning direction magnification ratio 10) Insert the slide pin as shown below and make positioning in the
adjustment (CCD unit installing position adjustment) vertical direction.
1) Execute SIM 48-1.
2) Set each value to 50 (initial value).
3) As shown in the figure below, put a scale on the original table.
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 50 100110120130140
A4
illust: AR-280
100mm scale
(Original) 10 20 90 100 110
1mm 1mm
Copy image
(2mm (2%)
shorter than the 10 20 90 100 110
original) B
7) Remove the original guide L and R, and remove the table glass.
8) Remove the dark box cover.
9) Remove the slide pin of the front cover unit.
* Never loosen the screws which are not indicated in the figure.
If loosened, the adjustment cannot be made and the unit must be
replaced.
12) Make a sample copy in the initial position and measure the
magnification ratio again.
13) Change the installing position in the horizontal direction to adjust
the magnification ratio.
7/13/2000 6 – 12
· When the copy image is longer than the original, move in 4) Execute SIM 48-1.
the direction of B. (AR-501/505/507)
· When the copy image is shorter than the original, move in
the direction of A.
· One scale of scribe line corresponds to 0.2%.
· For fine errors which cannot be adjusted with this adjust-
ment, use the next simulation SIM 48-1.
Scale a
5) Change value A so that the magnification ratio in the sub scanning
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 50 100 110 120 130 140
direction is within the specified range.
6) Change value B so that the magnification ratio in the main scan-
ning direction is within the specified range.
Scale b
· Adjustment specification: Within ±0.8%
· When the copy dimension is smaller than the original
¯
illust: AR-280 Make the value greater.
· When the copy dimension is greater than the original
3) Make a normal copy and obtain the main/sub scanning direction
¯
magnification ratios.
Make the value smaller.
Copy magnification ratio (MRCP)
When the value is changed by one step, the ratio is changed
(Original dimension– Copy dimension) by about 0.1%.
= ´ 100%
Original dimension
(Example 1)
Copy A
(Shorter than 10 20 90 100 110 Paper exit direction
the original)
[AR-280/281 only]
Scale
(Original) 10 20 90 100 110 7) Make a copy of A3 original with SPF, and measure the magnifica-
tion ratio in the sub scanning direction.
8) Change value C so that the magnification ratio in the sub scanning
direction is within the specified range.
9) Press the CA key to cancel the simulation.
(Example 2)
Copy B
(Longer than 10 20 90 100 110
the original)
6 – 13 7/13/2000
(7) Copy image position, image loss, void area
adjustment
Before performing this adjustment, check that SIM 50-5 is set to 50. If
not, set it to 50.
This adjustment uses SIM 50-2 and SIM 50-1.
The above two simulations are used in the following manner.
Sim 50-2: Rough adjustment
SIM 50-1: Fine adjustment
If the desired value is obtained by SIM 50-2, there is no need to
perform SIM 50-1.
(Adjustment items)
SIM 50-2 set SIM 50-1 set Adjustment
No. Adjustment item Operation mode Note
item item value
1 Lead edge image loss Document SPF mode IMAGE LOSS IMAGE LOSS 1.5 to 3.0 mm
table mode
2 Lead edge void area Document SPF mode DEN-A DEN-A 1.5 to 3.0 mm
table mode
3 Rear edge image loss SPF mode REAR LOSS REAR LOSS 1.5 to 3.0 mm AR-4XX
(SPF) (SPF) series only
4 Rear edge void area Document SPF mode DEN-B DEN-B
table mode
5 Image reference position Document RRC-A
table mode
6 Paper timing Document SPF mode RRC-B
table mode
7 Image reference position SPF mode SPF
8 Distance between image lead edge Document RSPF mode L1(L6), L4
position and scale of 10mm ´ 10 table mode
(Distance between image lead edge
position of back surface and scale of
10mm ´ 10)
9 Distance between paper lead edge Document RSPF mode L2, L5
and image lead edge ´ 10 table mode
10 Distance between image lead edge SPF mode L3
position x scale of 10mm ´ 10
Adjustment items 1 ~ 4 can be adjusted either with SIM 50-1 or SIM 50-2.
The adjustment values of items 8 ~ 10 will affect the adjustment items 5 ~ 7 automatically.
Therefore, adjusting the items 8 ~ 10 will lead to the same result as adjusting the items 5 ~ 7.
* L6 is the same as L1 for the back surface
* Refer to "K. RSPF" for the adjustment of RSPF.
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown below, and 2) Process the copied paper as shown below.
make a normal (100%) copy.
Cut the copied paper along the line at the edge of the scale
Note that the scale must be placed in parallel to the scanning image. The cut line and the scale image must form a right angle
direction and that the scale lead edge must be clearly copied. (90 degrees).
Paper
illust: AR-280
7/13/2000 6 – 14
3) Place the scale on the document table as shown below. 11) Enter L1, L2, and L3 as follows:
Note that the scale must be placed in parallel to the scanning L1 = X ´ 10
direction and that the scale lead edge is in close contact with the
L2 = Y ´ 10
document guide plate.
L3 = Z ´ 10
12) Cancel the simulation mode, make a copy in the document table
mode and in the SPF mode, and check that the lead edge image
loss and the void area are in the specified range as shown
Scale
below:
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 50 100 110 120 130 140 Lead edge image loss: 1.5 ~ 3.0mm
Lead edge void area: 1.5 ~ 3.0mm
If the above condition is not satisfied.
13) Enter the SIM 50-1 mode.
14) Set the scale on the document table in the same manner as in
procedure 3). Make a copy at 50% and at 400% in the document
Paper (White paper) table mode.
illust: AR-280 15) Measure the distance between the paper lead edge and the
copy image lead edge of 50% copy and 400% copy.
4) Enter the SIM 50-2 mode.
16) Check that there is no difference between the measured dis-
5) Set the image loss and DEN-A set values to "0." tance of 50% copy and that of 400% copy.
6) Set all the values of L1, L2, and L3 to "0." If the difference is more than 1.5mm, change and adjust the
7) Make a copy at 400%. (Document table mode) RRC-A value.
8) Measure dimensions X and Y of the copied scale image. Repeat procedures 12) to 16) until the above condition is satisfied.
X: Distance between the copy image lead edge and the scale 17) Use the document made in procedures 1) and 2) and make a
of 10mm copy at 50% and at 400% in the SPF mode.
Y: Distance between the paper lead edge and the copy image 18) Measure the distance between the paper lead edge and the
lead edge copy image lead edge of 50% copy and that of 400% copy.
X 19) Check that there is no difference between the above measured
distance of 50% copy and that of 400% copy.
If the difference between the distances is more than 1.5mm,
change and adjust the SPF value.
Paper lead
edge Repeat procedures 17) and 18) until the above condition is satisfied.
20) If the lead edge void area is outside the specified range, change
10 20 30 40 50 the DEN-A value.
21) If the lead edge image loss is outside the specified range,
change the IMAGE LOSS value.
22) If the rear edge void area is outside the specified range, change
the DEN-B value.
23) If the rear edge void area is outside the specified range, change
the REAR LOSS (SPF) value.
400% enlargement copy
Y
9) Set the document as in procedure 1) and 2) on the SPF, and
make a copy at 200% in the SPF mode.
Image loss
10) Measure the dimension L3 of the copied scale image.
Z: Distance between the copy image lead edge and the scale
of 10mm
Z
6 – 15 7/13/2000
(8) Original off-center adjustment D. Image density adjustment
1) Place the reference original for the off-center adjustment on the The image density adjustment is required for the following copy qual-
original table. ity mode by using the simulation.
2) Execute SIM 50-12. There are two methods; the collective adjustment and the individual
(AR-501/505/507) adjustment of the copy quality mode.
Copy mode (AR-280/285/335)
Collective Individual
Copy quality mode
adjustment adjustment
Binary Auto mode SIM46-2
value mode
Character mode SIM46-9
Character/Photo mode SIM46-10
Photo mode SIM46-11
Collective Individual
Copy quality mode
adjustment adjustment
Binary Auto mode SIM46-2
3) Press the PRINT button after lighting the RPL, and a copy will be value
Character mode SIM46-9
made. If the arrow image on the copy paper is shifted from the mode
center line as shown below, change the set value and adjust. Character/Photo mode SIM46-10
Photo (error diffusion) SIM46-11
mode
Paper exit
direction Copy mode (AR-287/337/407/501/505/507)
Paper center Collective Individual
Copy quality mode
adjustment adjustment
Binary Auto mode SIM46-2
value mode
Character mode SIM46-9
A B
Character/Photo mode SIM46-10
In the case of A decrease the set value. Photo (error diffusion) SIM46-11
In the case of B increase the set value. mode
Adjustment specification: Within ± 1.7mm
(1) Test chart setting
(One point of the set value corresponds to the change of
1) Place a test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) on the original table.
about 0.1mm.)
2) Place several sheets of A3 (11 ´ 17) white paper (Sharp’s speci-
[In the case of the AR-280] fied paper) on the test chart at the center reference.
4) Make a copy of A4 (8 1/2 ´ 11)original with the SPF, and measure
the off-center.
5) Change value C so that the off-center is within the specified
range.
[In the case of the AR-285/335]
4) Make a copy of A4 (8 1/2 ´ 11) original with the RADF, and
measure the off-center.
5) Change value B so that the off-center is within the specified range.
6) Press the CA key to cancel the simulation. UKOG-0162FCZZ
illust: AR-280
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
7/13/2000 6 – 16
Test chart comparison b. Individual adjustment of each copy quality mode
This adjustment is used when a different density level for different
UKOG-0162FCZZ
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W copy quality mode is required. SIM 46-5 to -7 and SIM 46-9 to -11 are
DENSITY No.
used.
UKOG-0089CSZZ
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.9 0 1) Execute the simulation corresponding to the copy quality mode to
DENSITY No.
be adjusted.
KODAK GRAY
1 2 3 4 19 A
SCALE
SHARP
CORPORATION
MADE IN JAPAN
Quality mode Linked simulation data Compare the above two copies to check that the difference is within
0.5 scale. If the difference is more than 0.5 scale, adjust with SIM
AE3.0 (AE) 46-20.
CH3.0 (Character) Sim46-9 (SPF)
MIX3.0 (Character/Photo) Sim46-10
PH3.0 (2) Sim46-11 (Photo error diffusion)
(AR-501/505/507)
(Binary value mode)
Quality mode Linked simulation data
AE3.0 (AE)
CH3.0 (Character) Sim46-9
MIX3.0 (Character/Photo) Sim46-10 (RSPF)
PH3.0 (Photo) Sim46-11
· Adjustment spec
Chart Adjustment Chart Adjustment
Mode EXP
No. level No. level
Character 3 3 Copied. 2 Not copied.
Character Copied. Not copied. When the SPF/RSPF is darker, increase the value.
3 3 2 When the SPF/ RSPF is lighter, decrease the value.
/Photo
Photo 3 3 Copied. 2 Not copied.
Auto 3 Copied. 2 Not copied.
If the copy density is too light, increase the adjustment value.
If the copy density is too dark, decrease the adjustment value.
Adjustment range: 30 ~ 170
6 – 17 7/13/2000
E. Paper feed 2) Shift the front cabinet and adjust.
Direction A
(AR-501/505/507)
Direction B
(Reference view)
Section a
2) Change value A and adjust the separation pawl operating timing.
Section b Initial value: 310 ms (283 ms for AR-501/505/507)
1 step: 1ms
Adjustment range: 1 ~ 999ms
If the adjustment value is improper, a paper jam may resulted.
7/13/2000 6 – 18
(2) Resist amount adjustment G. Others
This adjustment is to adjust the timing (paper contact pressure) for (1) Original size sensor detection level adjustment
the resist roller in each paper feed mode.
1) Execute SIM 41-2.
By changing the time difference (timing) between the transport roller
ON and the resist roller ON, the paper contact pressure on the resist (Fig. 1)
roller is changed.
The adjustment value must be changed according to the copy paper
quality.
1) Execute SIM 51-2.
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337)
(Fig. 3)
(AR-501/505/507)
* When the set value is too great, a paper jam may occur.
6 – 19 7/13/2000
(In the case of NORMAL) (3) Waste toner full detection level adjustment
The screen of Fig. 2 is displayed for 1 sec, then the screen of Fig. 1) Fill water to the empty waste toner bottles to make dummy bottle
3 is displayed to terminate the adjustment of the original sensor. A and B.
* In this case, the display item of "2. A3 ORIGINAL" is shown Dummy bottle A: 480g (including the bottle weight)
instead of "1. NO ORIGINAL" at the left top. Dummy bottle B: 560g (including the bottle weight)
(In the case of ABNORMAL) 2) Turn on the power switch of the copier.
The screen of Fig. 4 is displayed for 1 sec, and the sensor of 3) Install dummy bottle A (480g) to the waste toner bottle detecting
abnormality is highlighted. In this case, check that there is no A3 unit and check that the weight detection is OFF.
original on the original glass, and press the [EXECUTE] key to
perform the sensor adjustment operation again. 4) Install dummy bottle B (500g) instead and check that the weight
detection is ON.
* In this case, the display item of "2. A3 ORIGINAL" is shown
instead of "1. NO ORIGINAL" at the left top. "Weight detection ON" means that the display of "REPLACE
TONER BOTTLE" on the panel display is ON. "Weight detection
(2) Original size sensor position adjustment OFF" means that it is OFF.
1) Execute SIM 41-1.
(AB series)
(Inch series)
Adjustment
plate
· Slowly tilt the original detecting arm unit, and loosen the original
cover switch actuator adjustment screw, and slide and adjust
the actuator so that the highlighted display of OCSW is The weight detection level
for OFF becomes smaller.
changed to the normal display when the height of the arm unit
top from the table glass is 32 ± 0.5 mm.
(When the original cover switch ON timing is shifted, the origi- Initial value: 2 scales down from the center
nal detection function may not work properly.)
[When ON/OFF display is improper]
Loosen the fixing screw of the positioning plate. Move the positioning
Original detecting arm unit
plate up and down to adjust so that the weight detection is made as
specified.
32 ± 0.5 mm
Table glass
7/13/2000 6 – 20
(4) Touch panel adjustment H. SPF
1) Execute SIM 65-1.
(1) Hinge height check and adjustment (Image distortion
adjustment)
(Adjustment 1)
Hinge ass’y R hinge space dimension adjustment
(1) Loosen the two fixing screws of SPF.
(2) Loosen the nuts, turn the distortion adjustment screw and adjust
dimension T to 3.0 mm.
(3) Tighten two fixing screws of SPF and fix the hinge base.
(4) Fix the distortion adjustment screw with the nut.
When the distortion adjustment screw is turned in the direction of X
(clockwise), the dimension T is increased.
(Turn the distortion adjustment screw in the direction of X (clockwise),
and shift the SPF in the direction of arrow as shown above to adjust
the dimension T.)
When the distortion adjustment screw is turned in the direction Y
2) When the "+" section is pressed, it turns to gray. When all the four (counterclockwise), the dimension T is decreased.
points are pressed, the touch panel adjustment is completed and
the machine goes into the simulation sub number entry state.
In case of abnormality, the mode returns to the input mode. Hinge base
* Do not use a sharp pin or needle to press the "+" points. adjustment scale
(1 scale: 1mm)
(5) Key touch sound volume adjustment
SPF fixing screw
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
· When the key touch sound volume is too small.
· When the key touch sound volume is too great. Hinge ass'y R
· When the operation control PWB is replaced. Distortion
adjustment
1) Remove the operation control PWB. screw
2) Turn the VR1 slider counterclockwise to set at about 135 degrees.
T=3.0mm
Z
Slider rotating direction Nut
Hinge base
Hinge ass'y R
After adjustment (Slide the SPF by
adjustment 1.)
Adjust so that the cross of of the slider comes SPF
on this terminal side. B
A
Hinge ass'y L
PPC body
3) Use an actual machine and check the key input operations.
After this adjustment:
When the key touch sound volume is too small, turn VR1 clock- SPF fixing
wise. screw
When the key touch sound volume is too great, turn VR1 counter-
clockwise.
6 – 21 7/13/2000
(Image distortion specification)
The right angle distortion of the short side for the long side must be
(SPF adjustment direction by turning adjusted to less than 1.0 mm.
the distortion adjustment screw)
Print image 1.0mm or less
Y X
220
Copy
Paper
(Adjustment 2)
(Distortion pattern and adjustment)
Hinge ass’y L SPF height a adjustment
1) Check which one of the copy image patterns 1 ~ 8 shown below is
(1) Loosen the nut and turn the height adjustment screw to adjust like the copy image distortion.
dimension a to 10 ± 0.5mm.
2) Follow the adjustment procedure according to the copy image
(2) After adjusting the height, fix the height adjustment screw with pattern.
the nut.
(Refer to adjustment 1, 2.)
Turn the distortion adjustment screw in the direction of C (clockwise)
to increase dimension a. Note
Turn the distortion adjustment screw in the direction of D (counter- 1) When the hinge ass’y R height adjustment is performed, be sure
clockwise) to decrease the dimension a. to perform adjustment (2) (Open/close sensor adjustment) again.
Distortion adjustment procedure
Height adjustment (Copy image pattern 1)
screw
1 Document feed direction
D (Counterclockwise) C (Clockwise)
Y X
Hinge ass'y L
10±0.5mm
a
Nut
Copy surface
D (Counterclockwise) C (Clockwise) 2
Hinge ass'y R Y X
10±0.5mm
b
Nut
Copy surface
7/13/2000 6 – 22
(Adjustment procedure) (Adjustment procedure)
1) Perform adjustment 1 to adjust the distortion in the X section. 1) Perform adjustment 1 to adjust the distortion in the X section.
Adjustment reference Adjustment reference
When the hinge base T section dimension is changed by 1mm, the X When the hinge base T section dimension is changed by 1mm, the X
dimension is changed by 0.5 ~ 0.7mm. dimension is changed by 0.5 ~ 0.7mm.
2) If the distortion in the Y section cannot be adjusted with adjust- 2) If the distortion in the Y section cannot be adjusted with adjust-
ment 1, perform adjustment 2. ment 1, perform adjustment 2.
Adjustment reference Adjustment reference
When the hinge a section dimension is changed by 1mm, the Y When the hinge section a dimension is changed by 1mm, the Y
dimension is changed by 0.2 ~ 0.4mm. dimension is changed by 0.2 ~ 0.4mm,
(Copy image pattern 3) (Copy image pattern 6)
3 6
Y Y X
7
Copy surface
Y X
(Adjustment procedure)
1) Perform adjustment 2 to adjust the distortion in the Y section. Copy surface
Adjustment reference
When the hinge section a dimension is changed by 1mm, the Y
dimension is changed by 0.2 ~ 0.4mm.
(Adjustment procedure)
(Copy image pattern 5)
1) Perform adjustment 1 to adjust the distortion in the X section.
5 Document feed direction
Adjustment reference
Y X When the hinge base T section dimension is changed by 1mm, the X
dimension is changed by 0.5 ~ 0.7mm.
2) If the distortion in the Y section cannot be adjusted with adjust-
ment 1, perform adjustment 2.
Adjustment reference
Copy surface
When the hinge base T dimension is changed by 1mm, the Y dimen-
sion is changed by 0.2 ~ 0.4mm,
6 – 23 7/13/2000
(Copy image pattern 8) I. RADF
8 (1) Document lead edge stop position adjustment
Y X · The ADF document lead edge stop position is adjusted by using
SIM 53.
· When shipping, the lead edge is set to (8). An adjustment may be
required depending on documents.
The adjustment range is 8mm (8 steps) in the stopper side and
7mm (7 steps) in the glass side. (1mm: 1 step) For each mode of
Copy surface single, and duplex, the adjustment value can be set independently.
(8)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
If the distance is shifted, adjust as follows. (2) Resist/timing/paper exit sensor adjustment
3) Loosen the fixing screw (2) of the open plate (1) at the rear of the 1) Execute SIM 53-2 on the copier
hinge on the right side of the automatic document feeder, and (AR-501/505/507)
move the open plate up and down to adjust.
(1)
(2)
7/13/2000 6 – 24
(Other models)
2) Select each sensor and press the EXECUTE key, and the adjust-
ment will be performed automatically.
RESIST (DFD): Resist sensor
TIMING (DTD): Timing sensor
Short connector (0CW4074K526//)
REVERSE (RDD): Reverse sensor *1
3) Remove the ADF/RADF top cover, and set the DIP switch on the
*1: Only when the AR-RF1 is installed.
control PWB to the desired test mode. While pressing the push
(3) Test mode with DIP switch switch ON, turn on the power of the machine.
The RADF (ADF) single unit operation can be checked with the DIP (With the above operation, the machine enters the test mode.)
switch on the control PWB shown below. Control PWB (Back)
(Control PWB view)
G/A
CPU EEP ROM
6 – 25 7/13/2000
a. Single paper pass mode (with paper) <AR-AF1>
When documents are set on the paper feed tray, the document feed Every time when the push switch is pressed, the operation is per-
LED lights up. When the push switch is pressed, all documents on the formed in the sequence of 1) - 24).
paper feed tray are fed.
1) Ready LED ON/Document LED ON, wait shutter solenoid ON
b. Duplex paper pass mode (with paper) ¼ AR-RF1 only
2) Ready LED OFF/Document remain LED OFF, wait shutter sole-
When documents are set on the paper feed tray, the document feed noid OFF
LED lights up. When the push switch is pressed, all documents on the
3) Ready LED ON/Document LED ON, wait shutter solenoid ON +
paper feed tray are fed. paper feed motor normal drive 250mm/s (preliminary paper feed
c. Single aging mode (without paper) operation)
When the push switch is pressed, aging is started. The operation 4) Ready LED OFF/Document remain LED OFF, wait shutter sole-
timing is made by detection of each document size on the tray. noid OFF + paper feed motor OFF
d. Duplex aging mode (without paper) ¼ AR-RF1 only 5) Ready LED ON/Document LED ON, paper feed motor reverse
When the push switch is pressed, aging is started. The operation drive 250mm/s
timing is made by detection of each document size on the tray. 6) Ready LED OFF/Document remain LED OFF, paper feed motor
e. Load check mode OFF
7) Ready LED ON/Document LED ON, paper feed motor reverse
<AR-RF1>
drive 831mm/s
Every time when the push switch is pressed, the operation is per-
formed in the sequence of 1) ~ 21) 8) Ready LED OFF/Document remain LED OFF, paper feed motor
OFF
1) Ready LED OFF/Document remain LED OFF
9) Ready LED ON/Document LED ON, paper feed motor reverse
2) Flapper solenoid ON, wait shutter solenoid OFF drive 831mm/s
3) Flapper solenoid OFF 10) Paper feed motor reverse rotation speed change 831 ®
4) Ready LED ON/Document remain LED OFF 300mm/s
5) Ready LED ON/Document remain LED ON, wait shutter sole- 11) Ready LED OFF/Document remain LED OFF, paper feed motor
noid ON + Paper feed motor normal rotation 250mm/s (prelimi- OFF
nary paper feed operation) 12) Ready LED ON/Document LED ON, transport motor normal
6) Ready LED OFF/Document remain OFF, paper feed motor OFF drive 831mm/s
7) Ready LED ON/Document LED ON, paper feed motor reverse 13) Ready LED OFF/Document remain LED OFF, transport motor
drive 250mm/s (two-step extending operation) OFF
8) Ready LED OFF/Document remain LED OFF, paper feed motor 14) Ready LED ON/Document LED ON, transport motor normal
OFF drive 831mm/s
9) Ready LED ON/Document LED ON, paper feed motor reverse 15) Transport motor normal rotation speed change 831 ® 300mm/s
drive 800mm/s (paper feed operation) 16) Ready LED OFF/Document remain LED OFF, transport motor
10) Ready LED OFF/Document remain LED OFF, paper feed motor OFF
OFF 17) Ready LED ON/Document LED ON, transport motor normal
11) Ready LED ON/Document LED ON, transport motor normal drive 831mm/s
drive 800mm/s 18) Transport motor normal rotation speed change 831 ® 300mm/s
12) Ready LED OFF/Document remain LED OFF, transport motor 19) Transport motor normal rotation speed change 300 ® 831mm/s
OFF
20) Ready LED OFF/Document remain LED OFF, transport motor
13) Ready LED ON/Document LED ON, transport motor reverse OFF
drive 800mm/s
21) Ready LED ON/Document LED ON, transport motor reverse
14) Ready LED OFF/Document remain LED OFF, transport motor drive 208mm/s (switchback operation)
OFF
22) Ready LED OFF/Document remain LED OFF, transport motor
15) Ready LED ON/Document LED ON, reverse motor normal drive OFF
800mm/s (reverse operation)
23) Ready LED ON/Document LED ON, paper exit motor normal
16) Ready LED OFF/Document remain LED OFF, reverse motor drive 300mm/s
OFF
24) Ready LED OFF/Document remain LED OFF, paper exit motor
17) Ready LED ON/Document LED ON, reverse motor normal drive OFF
800mm/s (paper exit operation)
Return to 1).
18) Reverse motor normal rotation speed change 800 ® 300mm/s
(paper exit speed reduction)
19) Ready LED OFF/Document remain LED OFF, reverse motor
OFF
20) Ready LED ON/Document LED ON, reverse motor normal drive
300mm/s (paper exit speed reduction)
21) Ready LED OFF/Document remain LED OFF, reverse motor
OFF
Return to 1).
7/13/2000 6 – 26
f. EEPROM initializing + all sensors adjustment mode (4) Kinds of error (RADF single mode only)
When the push switch is pressed, the EEPROM is initialized. At that Kinds of JAM, error LED display
time, the LED blinks at the cycle of 100msec.
Not-reaching/remaining JAM in Document remain LED blinks
After completion of EEPROM initializing, the LED turns ON. In case of
the paper feed section at the cycle of 1000msec.
an error in the EEPROM initializing, the LED blinks at the cycle of
2000msec. Not-reaching/remaining JAM in Ready LED blinks at the cycle
Then all sensors adjustment is started. At that time, the document the paper exit section of 1000msec.
remain LED blinks at the cycle of 100msec. After completion of all Paper feed motor lock error Document remain LED blinks
sensors adjustment, the document remain LED turns ON. In case of at the cycle of 2000msec.
an. Error in the all sensors adjustment, the document remain LED Resist/timing sensor Document remain LED blinks
blinks at the cycle of 2000msec. adjustment error (when power at the cycle of 100msec.
* Only when the EEPROM is successfully completed, the all sensors is supplied)
adjustment is performed. Paper exit sensor adjustment Ready LED blinks at the cycle
Kinds of JAM, error LED display error (when power is supplied) of 100msec.
EEPROM initializing Ready LED blinks at the cycle of A JAM/motor lock error can be canceled by opening/closing the ADF
error 2000msec. after jam recovery process or by applying the power again.
All sensors adjustment Document remain LED blinks at the
error cycle of 2000msec J. RADF (AR-RF2)
g. Resist sensor adjustment mode
(1) Document lead edge stop position adjustment
Set the DIP switch (4, 5 to ON, 1, 2, 3 to OFF) and press the push · The ADF document lead edge stop position is adjusted by using
switch. Each sensor adjustment is performed. At that time, the LED SIM 53.
blinks at the cycle of 100msec.
· When shipping, the lead edge is set to (8). An adjustment may be
After completion of the sensor adjustment, the LED turns ON. In case required depending on documents.
of an error in the sensor adjustment, the LED blinks at the cycle of The adjustment range is 8mm (8 steps) in the stopper side and
100msec. 7mm (7 steps) in the glass side. (1mm: 1 step) For each mode of
Kinds of JAM, error LED display single, and duplex, the adjustment value can be set independently.
Sensor adjustment Document remain LED turns OFF. (8)
upper limit error Ready LED blinks at the cycle of 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
100msec.
Sensor adjustment Document remain LED blinks at the 8mm 7mm
lower limit error cycle of 100msec.
Ready LED turns OFF
* This mode can be adjusted with SIM 53-2.
Stopper
h. Timing sensor adjustment mode Glass
Set the DIP switch (1, 4, 5 to ON, 2, 3 to OFF) and press the push
switch. Each sensor adjustment is performed. At that time, the LED
blinks at the cycle of 100msec. Viewed from the operator
After completion of the sensor adjustment, the LED turns ON. In case
of an error in the sensor adjustment, the LED blinks at the cycle of 1) Execute SIM 53-1 on the copier.
100msec.
Kinds of JAM, error LED display
Sensor adjustment Document remain LED turns OFF.
upper limit error Ready LED blinks at the cycle of
100msec.
Sensor adjustment Document remain LED blinks at the
lower limit error cycle of 100msec.
Ready LED turns OFF
* This mode can be adjusted with SIM 53-2. 2) Enter the stop position adjustment value in each mode.
i. Paper exit sensor adjustment mode [Explanation of abbreviation]
Set the DIP switch (3, 4, 5 to ON, 1, 2 to OFF) and press the push NORMAL (S): Single, normal paper stop position adjustment
switch. Each sensor adjustment is performed. At that time, the LED
NORMAL (D): Duplex, normal paper stop position adjustment
blinks at the cycle of 100msec.
After completion of the sensor adjustment, the LED turns ON. In case 08: ±0.0000mm 00: –8.000mm 09: +1.000mm
of an error in the sensor adjustment, the LED blinks at the cycle of (Initial value) 01: –7.000mm 10: +2.000mm
100msec. 02: –6.000mm 11: +3.000mm
03: –5.000mm 12: +4.000mm
Kinds of JAM, error LED display 04: –8.000mm 13: +5.000mm
Sensor adjustment Document remain LED turns OFF. 05: –8.000mm 14: +6.000mm
upper limit error Ready LED blinks at the cycle of 06: –8.000mm 15: +7.000mm
100msec. 07: –8.000mm
Sensor adjustment Document remain LED blinks at the
lower limit error cycle of 100msec.
Ready LED turns OFF
* This mode can be adjusted with SIM 53-2.
6 – 27 7/13/2000
(2) Resist/timing/paper exit sensor adjustment 2) Disconnect the connector from the CN9 on the control PWB, and
1) Execute SIM 53-2 on the copier connect the short connector (OCW4074K526//) instead.
1)
2) Select each sensor and press the EXECUTE key, and the adjust-
ment will be performed automatically.
RESIST (DFD): Resist sensor
TIMING (DTD): Timing sensor
REVERSE (RDD): Reverse sensor 2)
(3) Test mode with DIP switch
The RADF (ADF) single unit operation can be checked with the DIP
switch on the control PWB shown below.
(Control PWB)
G/A
CPU EEP ROM
3) Remove the ADF/RADF top cover, and set the DIP switch on the
control PWB to the desired test mode. While pressing the push
switch ON, turn on the power of the machine.
(With the above operation, the machine enters the test mode.)
(DIP switch) 4) Turn on the push switch on the control PWB.
(Test operation is started.)
ON
(To switch to another test mode, set the DIP switch on the control
PWB to the desired test mode, and open/close the ADF/RADF paper
feed section cover (microswitch FGOD is turned OFF and ON).
OFF
· DIP switch 3 meaning
SW No.1 2 3 4 5 ON OFF
(Operating procedure) DIP switch 3 For AB series For inch series
1) Remove the control PWB cover. · Kinds of test modes and setting of DIP switch
No. Test mode name DIP switch
a Single paper pass mode All OFF
Duplex paper pass mode 1 ON,
b
the others OFF
Single aging mode 1, 3 ON,
c
2, 4, 5 OFF
Duplex aging mode 4 ON,
d
the others OFF
Load check mode 1, 5 ON,
e
2, 3, 4, OFF
EEPROM initializing mode + all 3, 5 ON,
f
sensors adjustment mode 1, 2, 4, OFF
Resist sensor adjustment mode 4, 5 ON,
g
1, 2, 3, OFF
Timing sensor adjustment mode 1, 4, 5, ON,
h
2, 3, OFF
Paper exit sensor adjustment mode 3, 4, 5, ON,
i
(AR-RF1 only) 1, 2, OFF
2)
1)
1)
7/13/2000 6 – 28
a. Single paper pass mode (with paper) 19) Document feed LED ON, Document remain LED ON, Reverse
When documents are set on the paper feed tray, the document feed motor forward rotation 867mm/s (Paper exit operation)
LED lights up. When the push switch is pressed, all documents on the 20) Reverse motor speed reduction 867 ® 297mm/s (Paper exit
paper feed tray are fed. speed reduction)
b. Duplex paper pass mode (with paper) 21) Document feed LED OFF, Document remain LED OFF, Reverse
When documents are set on the paper feed tray, the document feed motor OFF
LED lights up. When the push switch is pressed, all documents on the Kind of JAM, error LED display
paper feed tray are fed. Paper feed motor lock error REMOVE ORIGINAL LED blinks at
c. Single aging mode (without paper) the cycle of 2000msec.
When the push switch is pressed, aging is started. The operation Return to 1).
timing is made by detection of each document size on the tray.
f. EEPROM initializing + all sensors adjustment mode
d. Duplex aging mode (without paper)
When the DIP switch is set (3, 5 to ON, 1, 2, 4 to OFF) the push
When the push switch is pressed, aging is started. The operation switch is pressed, the EEPROM is initialized. At that time, the LED
timing is made by detection of each document size on the tray. blinks at the cycle of 100msec.
e. Load check mode After completion of EEPROM initializing, the LED turns ON. In case of
Set the DIP switch on the contro PWB as shown below, and open and an error in the EEPROM initializing, the LED blinks at the cycle of
close the ADF/ RADF paper feed section cover to enter the load 2000msec.
check mode. Then all sensors adjustment is started. At that time, the document
(DIP switch) remain LED blinks at the cycle of 100msec. After completion of all
sensors adjustment, the document remain LED turns ON. In case of
ON an. Error in the all sensors adjustment, the document remain LED
blinks at the cycle of 2000msec.
* Only when the EEPROM is successfully completed, the all sensors
OFF adjustment is performed.
SW No.1 2 3 4 5 Kinds of JAM, error LED display
EEPROM initializing error Ready LED blinks at the cycle of
Every time when the push switch is pressed, the operation is per- 2000msec.
formed in the sequence of 1) ~ 21) All sensors adjustment error Document remain LED blinks at the
1) Document feed LED ON, Document remain LED ON, Paper cycle of 2000msec
feed solenoid ON
g. Resist sensor adjustment mode
2) Reverse solenoid ON, Paper feed solenoid OFF
Set the DIP switch (4, 5 to ON, 1, 2, 3 to OFF) and press the push
3) Document feed LED OFF, Document remain LED OFF, Reverse
switch. Each sensor adjustment is performed. At that time, the LED
solenoid OFF
blinks at the cycle of 100msec.
4) Document feed LED ON, Document remain LED OFF, Paper
After completion of the sensor adjustment, the LED turns ON. In case
feed solenoid ON, Paper feed motor forward rotation 450mm/s
of an error in the sensor adjustment, the LED blinks at the cycle of
(Preliminary paper feed operation)
100msec.
5) Document feed LED OFF, Document remain LED OFF, Paper
feed solenoid OFF, Paper feed motor OFF Kinds of JAM, error LED display
Sensor adjustment Document remain LED turns OFF.
6) Document feed LED ON, Document remain LED ON, Paper
upper limit error Ready LED blinks at the cycle of 100msec.
feed motor reverse rotation 450mm/2 (2-step advanced feed)
Sensor adjustment Document remain LED blinks at the cycle of
7) Document feed LED OFF, Document remain LED OFF, Paper lower limit error 100msec.
feed motor OFF Ready LED turns OFF
8) Document feed LED ON, Document remain LED ON, Paper
* This mode can be adjusted with SIM 53-2.
feed motor reverse rotation 850mm/s (Paper feed operation)
h. Timing sensor adjustment mode
9) Document feed LED OFF, Document remain LED OFF, Paper
feed motor OFF Set the DIP switch (1, 4, 5 to ON, 2, 3 to OFF) and press the push
switch. Each sensor adjustment is performed. At that time, the LED
10) Document feed LED ON, Document remain LED ON, Transport
blinks at the cycle of 100msec.
motor forward rotation 867mm/s
After completion of the sensor adjustment, the LED turns ON. In case
11) Document feed LED OFF, Document remain LED OFF, Trans-
of an error in the sensor adjustment, the LED blinks at the cycle of
port motor OFF
100msec.
12) Document feed LED ON, Document remain LED ON, Transport
Kinds of JAM, error LED display
motor reverse rotation 867mm/s
Sensor adjustment Document remain LED turns OFF.
13) Document feed LED OFF, Document remain LED OFF, Trans- upper limit error Ready LED blinks at the cycle of 100msec.
port motor OFF
Sensor adjustment Document remain LED blinks at the cycle of
14) Document feed LED ON, Document remain LED ON, Reverse lower limit error 100msec.
motor forward rotation 867mm/s (reverse operatoin) Ready LED turns OFF
15) Document feed LED OFF, Document remain LED OFF, Reverse * This mode can be adjusted with SIM 53-2.
motor OFF
i. Paper exit sensor adjustment mode
16) Document feed LED ON, Document remain LED ON, Reverse
Set the DIP switch (3, 4, 5 to ON, 1, 2 to OFF) and press the push
motor forward rotation 867mm/s (Pulling/paper exit operation)
switch. Each sensor adjustment is performed. At that time, the LED
17) Reverse motor speed reduction 867 ® 297mm/s (Paper exit blinks at the cycle of 100msec.
speed reduction)
After completion of the sensor adjustment, the LED turns ON. In case
18) Document feed LED OFF, Document remain LED OFF, Reverse of an error in the sensor adjustment, the LED blinks at the cycle of
motor OFF 100msec.
6 – 29 7/13/2000
Kinds of JAM, error LED display Slide the RSPF according to the adjustment.
Sensor adjustment Document remain LED turns OFF.
upper limit error Ready LED blinks at the cycle of 100msec.
Sensor adjustment Document remain LED blinks at the cycle of Hinge ass'y
lower limit error 100msec.
Ready LED turns OFF R-SPF
* This mode can be adjusted with SIM 53-2.
Hinge ass'y L
(4) Kinds of error (RADF single mode only) PPC body
Kinds of JAM, error LED display
Not-reaching/remaining JAM in Document remain LED blinks at
the paper feed section the cycle of 1000msec. RSPF fixing screw
Not-reaching/remaining JAM in Ready LED blinks at the cycle
the paper exit section of 1000msec.
Paper feed motor lock error Document remain LED blinks at
Image distortion adjustment procedure
the cycle of 2000msec.
Resist/timing sensor Document remain LED blinks at Adjustment of hinge base dimension T of hinge ass’y R
adjustment error (when power the cycle of 100msec. (1) Loosen the RSPF fixing screw.
is supplied) (2) Loosen the nut and turn the distortion adjustment screw to adjust
Paper exit sensor adjustment Ready LED blinks at the cycle dimension T.
error (when power is supplied) of 100msec. (3) Tighten two SPF fixing screws to fix the hinge base.
(4) Tighten the nut with the distortion adjustment screw fixed.
A JAM/motor lock error can be canceled by opening/closing the ADF
(Adjustment 1) Turn the distortion adjustment screw in direction of A.
after jam recovery process or by applying the power again.
— Dimension T is increased.
K. RSPF (Adjustment 2) Turn the distortion adjustment screw in direction of B.
— Dimension T is decreased.
There are following items of adjustments by the simulations of the
machine.
SPF adjustment direction by rotation
Adjustment T Hinge base of the distortion adjustment screw
adjustment scale line B A
value
Name Adjustment items (Key Note RSPF fixing screw
operation on
the machine) Hinge ass'y R
Lead edge The lead edge and the SIM 50-1/2 Arrow view Z
position image lead edge are SIM 50-6/7 Distortion
adjustment screw
adjustment adjusted in the range of Default: 50
0 ~ 100
+5mm to +5mm.
Z
(Front and back surface Nut
of a document) Hinge base
Magnification The magnification ration SIM 48-1
ratio is corrected. (–4.9% to Default: 50
1 ~ 99
adjustment +4.9%)(Front and back (Adjustment procedure)
surface of a document) 1) Perform Adjustment 1 to adjust the distortion in X section.
Resist No. 1 resist (front surface SIM 51-2
quantity of document) loop Default: 50 Document feed direction
1 ~ 99 1
adjustment quantity adjustment
(0.1mm ~ 9.9mm) X X
No. 2 resist (front surface SIM 51-2
of document) loop Default: 50
31 ~ 99
quantity adjustment
(0.1mm ~ 6.9mm)
Image loss The output timing of data SIM 50-1/2
adjustment enable signal (DEN) is SIM 50-6/7
adjusted and data write Default: 50 Front surface of copy
0 ~ 100
from the image lead edge
to the set quantity is cut.
(0 ~ 10mm)
Center shift SIM 50-12
adjustment 1) Perform Adjustment 1 to adjust the distortion in Y section.
Reflection Automatic initialization of SIM 53-2
type sensor the post-separation
adjustment sensor, the read sensor,
2 Y Y
and the SB sensor is
performed.
7/13/2000 6 – 30
Back surface resist adjustment Skew adjustment
Back surface resist adjustment by the SB resist adjustment plate Skew adjustment by the upper guide and the lower guide
(1) Loosen the fixing scrw. (1) Loosen four fixing screws.
(2) If the copied image is as shown in 1, shift and adjust the adjust- (2) If the copied image is as shown in 1, shift and adjust the adjust-
ment plate in the direction of A. ment plate in the direction of A. If the copied image is as shown in
If the copied image is as shown in 2, shift and adjust the adjust- 2, shift and adjust the adjustment plate in the direction of B.
ment plate in the direction of B.
A
B
Fixing screws
Fixing screw
SB resist
adjustment plate
B (Set document)
Front surface
of document
(Copy)
Copy 1
A
(Copy)
Copy 1
B
A
Copy 2
Copy 2
B
A
6 – 31 7/13/2000
[7] SIMULATION
SIM 46-12, 13, 14, 15, 16, SIM66 and SIM68 are provided only for Japan
models (FAX mode/ASK/IrDA).
7/13/2000 7–1
START (Normal mode)
NO Do you YES
Operation is made according want to end the Press the clear all key.
to the selected mode and item. simulation ?
YES
Operating conditions Press the START button.
check ?
NO
The display is made according to
the selected mode and the item.
YES
Data clear ? Press the START button.
NO
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.
7–2 7/13/2000
[Descriptive Conventions]
For the sake of keeping the use of information common among several models, this manual uses the following conventions:
AR-5XX: Refers to model AR-501/505,
AR-4XX: Refers to model AR-405,
AR-2X1/3X1/4XX/250/XX6: AR-281/286/405/250/336,
AR-2XX, 3XX: Refers to model AR-280/285/335 for this issue.
* The "X" stands for any numeral 0 to 9.
B. List
Code Code
Function (Purpose) Function (Purpose)
Main Sub Main Sub
1 1 Used to check the operation of the scanner unit and its 10 0 Used to check the operation of the toner motor and its control
control circuit. circuit.
2 Used to check the operation of sensors and detectors in the (Note)
scanner section and the related circuit. Do not execute this simulation with toner in the toner hopper.
2 1 Used to check the operation of the automatic document If executed, excessive toner may enter the developing
feeder unit and its control circuit. section, causing an overtoner trouble. Be sure to remove the
toner motor from the toner hopper before executing this
2 Used to check the operation of sensors and detectors in the
simulation.
automatic document feeder units and the related circuit.
14 0 Used to cancel the self diag U1/LOC/U2/PF troubles.
3 Used to check the operation of the loads in the automatic
document feeder units and the control circuits. 15 0 Used to cancel the self diag U4 - 09/20/21/22 (large capacity
tray) trouble.
3 2 Used to check the operation of sensors and detectors in the
and the related circuit. 16 0 Used to cancel the self diag U2 trouble.
3 Used to check the operation of the loads in the finisher and 17 0 Used to cancel copy inhibition by the host computer during
the control circuit. the self diag PF.
6 Used to adjust the finisher stacking capability. (Used to adjust 21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle.
the stop position of the finisher paper width direction 22 1 Used to check the print out count of each section in each
alignment plate (jogger). This adjustment is made by operation mode.
changing the width direction alignment plate home position by (Used to check the maintenance timing.)
the software.) 2 Used to check the total numbers of misfeed and troubles.
4 2 Used to check the operation of sensors and detectors in the (When the number of misfeed is considerably great, it is
paper feed section (desk feed, large capacity tray) and the judged as necessary for repair. The misfeed rate is obtained
related circuit. by dividing this count value with the total counter value.)
3 Used to check the operation of the loads in the paper feed 3 Used to check the misfeed positions and the number of
section (desk paper feed, large capacity tray) and the control misfeed in each position. (If the number of misfeed is
circuits. considerably great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the (Sections other than ADF/RADF/SPF sections)
operation panel, and control circuit. 4 Used to check the total trouble (self diag) history.
2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the 5 Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section).
control circuit. 6 Used to output the list of the setting and adjustment data
3 Used to check the oepration of the copy lamp and the control (simulations, FAX soft switch, counters).
circuit. 7 Used to display the key operator code. (This simulation is
4 Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the used when the customer forgets the key operator code.)
control circuit. 8 Used to check the number of use of the staple, the ADF,
6 Used to check the operation of the separation lamp and its RADF, SPF, and scanning.
control circuit. (AR-501/505/507 only) 9 Used to check the number of use of each paper feed section.
6 1 Used to check the operation of the loads (clutches and (the number of prints)
solenoids) in the paper transport system and the control 10 Used to check the system configuration (option, internal
circuit. hardware).
2 Used to check the operation of each fan motor and its control 11 Used to check the use frequency of FAX (send/receive).
circuit. (FAX model only)
7 1 Used to set the aging operation conditions. 12 Used to check the misfeed positions and the number of
6 Used to set the cycle of intermittent aging. misfeed at each position. (When the number of misfeed is
8 Used to set YES/NO of display of the warmup time. considerably great, is can be judged as necessary for repair.)
8 1 Used to check the operation of the developing bias voltage in 19 Used to display the scanner mode counter.
each print mode and its control circuit. (For OPC drum type B) 24 1 Used to clear the misfeed counter, the misfeed history, the
2 Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger trouble counter, and the trouble history. (The counters are
grid voltage in each print mode and the control circuit. (for cleared after completion of maintenance.)
OPC drum type B) 2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of
6 Used to check and adjust the transfer charger current and the each paper feed section.
control circuit. 3 Used to clear the data of the number of use of the staple, the
7 Used to check and adjust the operation of the separation SPF, ADF, RSPF, RADF and scanning.
charger voltage and its control circuit. 4 Used to reset the maintenance counter.
9 1 Used to check the operation of the loads (clutches and 5 Used to reset the developer quantity counter. (The developer
solenoids) in the duplex section and the control circuit. counter of the installed developing unit is reset.)
2 Used to check the operation of sensors and detectors in the 6 Used to reset the copy counter.
duplex section and the control circuit. 7 Used to clear the OPC drum (membrane decrease)
4 Used to check the operation of the duplex unit alignment plate correction counter.
and its control circuit. (This simulation is executed when the OPC drum is replaced.)
9 Used to clear the printer print counter. (The counter is cleared
after completion of maintenance.)
7/13/2000 7–3
Code Code
Function (Purpose) Function (Purpose)
Main Sub Main Sub
24 11 Used to reset the developer rotation time counter. (The 26 52 Used to set whether white paper discharge count up is
developer counter of the installed developing unit is reset.) performed or not.
(AR-501/505/507 only) ("White paper" means insertion paper in the OHP insertion
15 Used to clear the scanner mode counter. paper mode (without copy), cover paper in the cover paper
25 1 Used to check the operation of the main drive (excluding the insertion mode (without copy)/back cover, and white paper in
scanner section) and to check the operation of the toner the duplex exit mode (CA etc.).)
concentration sensor. (The toner concentration sensor output 58 Used to setup the scanner mode counter.
can be monitored.) 27 1 Used to set the operation specifications when a
2 Used to make the initial setting of toner concentration when communication trouble occurs between the host computer
replacing developer. and MODEM (on the copier). (When a communication trouble
8 Used to set the timing of toner concentration control occurs between the host computer and MODEM (copier), the
correction B and the correction quantity. The timing is self diag display (U7-00) is printed and setting is made to
determined according to the acuumulated use time of select inhibit/allow of printing.)
developer. (AR-501/505/507 only) 2 Used to set and change the host computer/MODEM
26 1 Used to set options. (This simulation is used to make option numbers. (This setting is required when a communication is
setting when an option is installed.) made between the copier and a computer through MODEM.)
2 1) Used to set the paper size of the large quantity paper 3 Used to set and change the ID numbers of the copier and the
tray. (When the paper size is changed, the lift paper host computer/MODEM numbers. (This setting is required
size must be also changed with this simulation.) when a communication is made between the copier and a
2) Used to detect the paper or document size of 8.5" x computer through MODEM.)
13" (Inch series) and set the display mode. (All paper 4 Used to enter the start time and the end time of servicing for
feed modes) management of service work. (The data can be checked by
3 Used to set the specifications of the auditor. Setting must be the host computer.)
made depending on the use condition of the auditor. 5 Used to enter the TAG No. of the copier. (This simulation
5 Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the allows to check the machine TAG No. with the host
maintenance counter. computer.)
6 Used to set the specifications depending on the destination. 30 1 Used to check the operation of sensors and detectors in the
paper feed section, the paper transport section, and the
10 Used to allow entry of the software key input for the network
paper exit section, and the related circuit.
scanner. (AR-287/337/407/ 507)
2 Used to check the operation of sensors and detectors in the
12 Used to enter the Diagnosis function key input.
paper feed section and the related circuits.
(AR-287/337/407/507)
(The operations of sensors and detectors in the paper feed
13 After completion of copier job in copier interruption during a section can be monitored with the LCD.)
printer job, the print job is resumed in synchronization with
40 1 Used to check the operation of the manual paper feed tray
the auto clear timer (key operation) setup time [10-240]. By
paper size detector and the related circuit. (The operation of
making the setup below, the print job is resumed in 0 sec.
the manual paper feed tray paper size detector can be
(However, the auto clear function is enabled with the setup
monitored with the LCD.)
time of key operation. Also, this simulation and auto clear are
not synchronized.) (AR-287/337/407/507) 2 Used to adjust the manual paper feed tray paper width
detector detection level.
15 Used to set the fusing operation mode (paper curl
corresponding mode). 41 1 Used to check the operation of the document size sensor and
the related circuit. (The operation of the document size
18 Used to set VALID/INVALID of toner save operation. (This
sensor can be monitored with the LCD.)
simulation is valid only in the Japan and UK versions. (It
depends on SIM 26-6 (Destination setting). For the other 2 Used to adjsut the document size sensor detection level.
destinations, the same setting can be executed with the user 3 Used to check the operation of the document size sensor and
program.) the related circuit. (The document size sensor output level
22 Used to set the specification (language display) for the can be monitored with the LCD.)
destination. (Excluding the Japan models.) 43 1 Used to set the fusing temperature in each operation mode.
30 Used to set the CE mark conforming operation mode. 3 Used to adjust the fusing motor speed. (AR-501/505/507)
(For flickers when driving the fusing heater lamp.) 8 Used to set the time to rotate the fusing motor after reaching
32 When the variable speed fan motor is in the ready state and the set temperature in warming up. (AR-501/505/507)
the process temperature is in the range of 36° – 45°, the 44 1 Used to set whether the correction functions of the image
PWM duty is set in percentage. (AR-287/337/407/507) forming (process) section are valid or not.
35 Used to set whether the trouble history display of SIM 22-4 is 2 Used to adjust the sensitivity (gain) of the OPC drum mark
displayed as one trouble or as the number of continuous sensor and the image density sensor.
troubles when two or more troubles of a same kind occured. 4 Used to set the target image (reference) density level in the
36 Used to set the ICU fan operating temperature. (Operation in developing bias voltage correction.
the pre-heat mode.) (Excluding Japan models.) 5 Used to set various parameters (main charger grid voltage,
40 Polygon motor stop mode setup (AR-501/505/507) laser beam power, correction start developing bias voltage) in
Used to set the stop time of the polygon motor after leaving in developing bias correction.
ready state and to set Enable/Disable of the setting. (Other 9 Used to check the data on the result of the image forming
models) section correction (process correction) (the corrected main
41 Used to enable/disable the auto magnification ratio select charger grid voltage in each print mode, developing bias
(AMS) function in the pamphlet copy mode. voltage, the laser power, etc.)
44 Used to set the model of the unit which is connected to the (This simulation allows to check whether the correction is
SCSI I/F of ICU PWB. executed properly or not.)
46 Used to set the image direction or not regardless of modes 12 Used to check the toner image patch density date in
when the finisher/sorter is installed. correction operation of the image forming section. (This
50 Used to set YES/NO of black/white reversion is allowed. simulation allows to check whether the correction is executed
properly or not. )
7–4 7/13/2000
Code Code
Function (Purpose) Function (Purpose)
Main Sub Main Sub
44 15 Used to set the correction values of various parameters 53 1 Used to adjust the document stop position in each operation
(maincharger grid voltage, laser beam power, developing bias mode of ADF/RADF. (Target model:
voltage) in the image forming operation and image forming AR-250/280/285/335/405/407)
section correction for OPC drum type A. 2 Used to adjust the optical sensor sensitivity in the
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337/405/407) ADF/RADF/RSPF.
46 2 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode 6 Used to adjust the RSPF width detection level.
(binary/multi-value - auto, character and photo, photo mode). (AR-501/505/507 only)
(The overall print density in each mode (all of the specified 60 1 Used to check the operation (read/write) of ICU (DRAM).
density set for each density level (display value)) can be (SIMM MEMORY/ONBOARD MEMORY)
adjusted in each mode.)
61 1 Used to test the operation of the scanner (exposure) unit.
9 Used to adjust the print density for each density level (display
61 2 Used to adjust the scanner (exposure) laser power (absolute
value) in the copy mode (binary - character mode).
value) in the copy mode.
10 Used to adjust the print density for each density level (display
4 Used to adjust the scanner (exposure) laser power (absolute
value) in the copy mode (binary - character, photo mode).
value) in the printer mode. (For Photoconductor type B)
An arbitrary print density can be set for each density level
(display value). 62 1 Used to format the hard disk. (Models with the hard disk
installed only)
11 Used to adjust the print density for each density level (display
value) in the copy mode (binary - photo mode). 2 Used to check the operation (read/write) of the hard disk.
An arbitrary print density can be set for each density level (Models with the hard disk installed only.) (Partial check)
(display value). 3 Used to check the operation (read/write) of the hard disk.
17 Used to execute shading correction and display the correction (Only the models with a hard disk) (All area check)
value. 63 1 Used to check the result of shading correction. (The shading
18 Used to adjust g (density gradient) in each copy mode. correction data are displayed.)
(AR-2X1/287/3X1/337/4XX/250/XX6/5XX series) 7 Used to adjust the white plate scanning start position in the
19 Used to adjust g (density gradient) and set the density shading white correction. (AR-501/505/507 only)
detection area in the auto copy mode and to set the image 64 1 Used to check the operation of the printer function (auto print
process mode in the photo copy mode. operation). (Print pattern, paper feed mode, print mode, the
(AR-2X1/287/3X1/337/4XX/250/XX6/5XX series) number of sheets, and the density can be set to an arbitrary
20 Used to adjust the copy density correction in the SPF copy value.)
mode for the document table copy mode. Adjustment is made 65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display) detecting
so that the copy density is the same as that in the document position.
table copy mode. (AR-250/281/286/405/501/505/507 series) 2 Used to check the result of the touch panel (LCD display)
48 1 Used to adjust the copy magnification ratio (main scanning detecting position adjustment. (The coordinates are
direction, sub scanning direction). displayed.)
50 1 Used to adjust the copy image position and the void area 67 1 Used to check the printer PWB memory operation
(image loss) on the print paper in the copy mode. (The same (read/write). (When replacing the PWB with a new one, this
adjustment can be made with SIM 50-2 (simple method).) check must be performed.)
2 Used to adjust the copy image position and the void area 2 Used to check the printer parallel I/F operation. (This
(image loss) on the print paper in the copy mode. (Simple simulation is used only for production, and a special tool is
adjustment) required. Not available in the market.)
(This simulation allows the same simulation with SIM 50-1 3 Used to adjust the printer parallel I/F ACk signal width.
more simply. ) 11 Used to set YES/NO of the printer parallel I/F SELECT IN
5 Used to adjust the print image position (top margin) on the signal.
print paper in the print mode. 12 Used to write data into the printer flash memory.
6 Used to adjust the copy lead edge. (RSPF) (AR-501/505/507) 13 Used to check the printer flash memory data.
7 Used to adjust the copy lead edge (simple method). (RSPF) 14 Used to check the printer flash memory data writing and its
(AR-501/505/507) result.
10 Used to adjust the print image center position. (Adjustment 15 Used to check the sum of the printer flash memory.
can be made for each paper feed section.) 16 Used to check the operation of the network card.
12 Used to adjust the print image center position. (Adjustment 17 Used to clear data in the NVRAM of the printer PWB (set to
can be made for each document mode.) the default). (Printer set data)
26 Used to set the folding margin of center binding. 18 Used to clear the application data area of the Network
51 1 Used to adjust the OPC drum separation pawl ON timing. Scanner of the Flash ROM. (AR-287/337/407/507)
2 Used to adjust the contact pressure of paper onto the resist 69 1 Used to check the input/output by connecting channels A and
roller in each section (copier paper feed section, duplex paper B of SCSI with the SCSI cable.
feed section, SPF paper feed section).
(When the print image position varies greatly for the paper or
when a lot of paper jam troubles occur, the adjustment is
required.)
3 Used to set the clutch OFF time. (AR-507 Europe and U.K.
only)
8 Used to set Enable/Disable of the drum separation pawl drive
solenoid (PSPS) operation for each paper feed section
(Manual paper feed, cassette 1, cassette 2, duplex module,
desk cassette 1, desk cassette 2, desk cassette 3, LCC)
(AR-501/505/507)
52 1 Used to adjust the duplex print mode stacking capability.
(Used to adjust the stop position of the paper tray width
direction alignment plate in the duplex unit. The adjustment
is executed by changing the width direction alignment plate
home position in the software.)
7/13/2000 7–5
C. Details of simulations
1 -1
Purpose Operation test/check
Function Used to check the operation of the scanner unit and its
(Purpose) control circuit.
Section Optical (Image scanning)
2
Item Operation
Operation/ 1. Select the copy (scanning) magnification ratio with 2 -1
Procedure the zoom key.
The magnification ratio can be increased or Purpose Operation test/check
decreased with the [ZOOM] key by the increment of Function Used to check the operation of the automatic document
1%. (Purpose) feeder unit and its control circuit.
The selected magnification ratio is displayed on the
magnification ratio display. Section Automatic document feeder
2. Press the [EXECUTE] key. Item Operation
Scanning is performed at the magnification ratio set in procedure Operation/ 1. Select the aging mode with the key.
1 is executed. During scanning, the [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Procedure When selection is made, the selected item is
If the [EXECUTE] key is pressed under this state, the operation is highlighted.
interrupted. After completion of scanning, the [EXECUTE] key re- [1:SIDE]: Single copy aging mode
turns to the normal display. [2:SIDE]: Duplex copy aging mode
To resume scanning, start with procedure 2. (Note) [2:SIDE] is displayed only when the unit
To change the magnification ratio, start with procedure 1. which allows duplex copy is installed.
Scanning is performed at the max. scanning length (432mm). If, how-
2. Select the copy magnification ratio with the key.
ever, the magnification ratio is set to greater than 100%, the scanning
(The magnification ratio can be increased or decreased in the in-
length is changed accordingly.
crement of 1% with the [ZOOM] key.)
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337)
The selected magnification ratio is displayed on the magnification
ratio display on the screen.
The magnification ratio can be set only when SPF/DF is installed.
3. Press the [EXECUTE] key.
Aging of the document feeder is executed under the conditions
specified with procedures 1 and 2.
During aging, the [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. If the [EXECUTE]
key is pressed while it is highlighted, the operation is interrupted.
When two or more operations are selected in procedure 1,
"1:SIDE" (single copy aging mode) is unconditionally performed
(AR-405/407/501/505/507) and the other highlighted displays return to the normal display.
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/335/336)
To resume aging, execute with procedure 3.
To change the conditions for aging, execute with procedure 1.
* When the SPF/ADF is installed , the magnification ratio can be
adjusted in the range of 64% - 200%.
(AR-287/337)
To change the conditions for aging, execute with procedure 1.
1 -2
Purpose Operation test/check
Function Used to check the operation of sensors and detectors
(Purpose) in the scanner section and the related circuit.
Section Optical (Image scanning)
Item Operation
Operation/ The operations of sensors and detectors in the scanner
Procedure section are displayed.
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
7–6 7/13/2000
(AR-405/407) DLS2 Tray length Normal display: Highlighted display:
To resume aging, execute with procedure 3. sensor (300mm) Document empty Document exist
To change the conditions for aging, execute with procedure 1. DLS3 Tray vertical Normal display: Highlighted display:
sensor (for Document empty Document exist
identification of
8.5" x 13")
DWS Document Normal display: Highlighted display:
width sensor Document empty Document exist
(AR-501/505/507)
To resume aging, execute with procedure 3.
To change the conditions for aging, execute with procedure 1.
* When the RSPF is installed , the magnification ratio can be
adjusted in the range of 25% - 400%.
[SPF installed]
DSS Empty sensor Normal display: Highlighted display:
Document empty Document exist
DFD Resist sensor Normal display: Highlighted display:
Document empty Document exist
RDD Paper exit sensor Normal display: Highlighted display:
Document empty Document exist
AUOD DF open/close Normal display: Highlighted display:
sensor Close Open
TSS1 Tray feed size Normal display: Highlighted display:
2 -2 sensor (large size) Document empty Document exist
TSS2 Tray feed size Normal display: Highlighted display:
Purpose Operation test/check sensor (small size) Document empty Document exist
Function Used to check the operation of sensors and detectors DWS1 Tray width sensor Normal display: Highlighted display:
(Purpose) in the automatic document feeder units and the related (182mm) OFF ON
circuit. DWS2 Tray width sensor Normal display: Highlighted display:
Section Automatic document feeder (210mm/8.5") OFF ON
DWS3 Tray width sensor Normal display: Highlighted display:
Item Operation (257mm) OFF ON
Operation/ The operations of sensors and detectors in the auto- DWS4 Tray width sensor Normal display: Highlighted display:
Procedure matic document feeder section are displayed. (17"mm) OFF ON
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted. DWS5 Tray width sensor Normal display: Highlighted display:
[ADF/RADF installed] (297mm) OFF ON
DSS Empty sensor Normal display: Highlighted display:
Document empty Document exist
DFD Resist sensor Normal display: Highlighted display:
Document empty Document exist
DTD Paper timing Normal display: Highlighted display:
sensor Document empty Document exist
RDD Paper exit Normal display: Highlighted display:
sensor Close Document exist
AUOD DF open/close Normal display: Highlighted display:
sensor Close Document exist
[RSPF installed] (AR-501/505/507)
FGOD Paper feed
sensor EMPS Empty sensor Normal display: Highlighted display:
Document empty Document exist
TGOD Reverse Normal display: Highlighted display:
section cover Document empty ON BUNRIS Post-separation Normal display: Highlighted display:
sensor sensor Document empty Document exist
DWS1 Tray width Normal display: Highlighted display: ON RDS Read sensor Normal display: Highlighted display:
sensor (297mm) OFF Document empty Document exist
DWS2 Tray width Normal display: Highlighted display: ON RDD Paper exit Normal display: Highlighted display:
sensor (210mm/ OFF sensor Document empty Document exist
8.5"mm) SBS Switch-back Normal display: Highlighted display:
DWS3 Tray width Normal display: Highlighted display: ON sensor Document empty Document exist
sensor OFF REGS Resist sensor Normal display: Highlighted display:
(210mm/8.5mm) Document empty Document exist
DWS4 Tray width Normal display: Highlighted display: ON AUOD DF open/close Normal display: Highlighted display:
sensor (182mm) OFF sensor Close Open
DLS1 Tray length Normal display: Highlighted display: FGOD Paper feed Normal display: Highlighted display:
sensor (240mm) Document empty Document exist cover sensor Close Open
7/13/2000 7–7
TSS1 Tray feed size Normal display: Highlighted display:
sensor (large Document empty Document exist
size)
TSS2 Tray feed size Normal display: Highlighted display:
sensor (small Document empty Document exist
size)
DWS1 Tray width Normal display: Highlighted display:
sensor (182mm) OFF ON
DWS2 Tray width Normal display: Highlighted display:
sensor OFF ON [When RSPF is installed]
(210mm/8.5")
DWS3 Tray width Normal display: Highlighted display: DFM FORWARD Paper feed motor forward rotation
sensor (257mm) OFF ON (L) (230mm/sec)
DWS4 Tray width Normal display: Highlighted display: DFM REVERSE (L) Paper feed motor reverse rotation
sensor (17") OFF ON (360mm/sec)
DWS5 Tray width Normal display: Highlighted display: DFM FORWARD Paper feed motor forward rotation
sensor (297mm) OFF ON (H) (450mm/sec)
DFM REVERSE (H) Paper feed motor reverse rotation
(450mm/sec)
DTM Transport pulse motor
DFC Paper feed clutch
FSOL1 Flapper solenoid 1
FSOL2 Flapper solenoid 2
SBSOL Switchback pressure solenoid
FAN Transport motor cooling fan
2 -3
Purpose Operation test/check
Function Used to check the operation of the loads in the auto-
(Purpose) matic document feeder units and the control circuits.
Section Automatic document feeder
Item Operation
Operation/ 1. The names of the loads which can be operated are
Procedure displayed. Select the load to be checked with the
key, and the selected load is highlighted.
2. Press the [EXECUTE] key.
The load selected in procedure 1 starts the operation. During the
operation of the load, the [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. If the
EXECUTE key is pressed while it is highlighted, the operation is
stopped.
When two or more operations are selected in procedure 1, the op-
eration is performed in the sequence of display order.
[When ADF/RADF is installed]
3
DFM FORWARD Paper feed motor forward rotation
DFM REVERSE Paper feed motor reverse rotation
3 -2
DTM FORWARD Transport motor forward rotation
DTM REVERSE Transport motor reverse rotation Purpose Operation test/check
DRM Paper expulsion motor Function Used to check the operation of sensors and detectors
DFSOL Paper feed solenoid (Purpose) in the and the related circuit.
Section Finisher
Item Operation
Operation/ The display differs depending on the unit (finisher) in-
Procedure stalled.
The operations of the sensors and detectors in the
sorter and the finisher section are displayed.The active
sensors and detectors are highlighted.
7–8 7/13/2000
In the case of AR-FN1
JGHP Jogger motor home sensor
READY Stapler self priming sensor
PSHP Pusher motor home sensor
STUHP Staple unit home sensor
T2PF Tray 2 paper full sensor
STND Stapler replacement sensor
EVRE Elevator motor encoder
OFHP Offset home sensor
STHP Staple home sensor In the case of AR-FN3
INPD Paper entry sensor JGHP Jogger motor home sensor
RVPD Reverse paper exit sensor READY Stapler self priming sensor
PFD1 Transport sensor 1 PSHP Pusher motor home sensor
PFD2 Transport sensor 2
STORHP ST paper exit roller pressure release clutch home sensor
PFD3 Transport sensor 3
STUHP Staple unit home sensor
PFD4 Transport sensor 4
T2PF Tray 2 paper full sensor
T3OD Tray 3 paper exit sensor
STND Stapler replacement sensor
STID Staple tray paper entry sensor
STPD Staple paper sensor EVRE Elevator motor encoder
T1PF Tray 1 paper full sensor OFHP Offset home sensor
T3UP Tray 3 upper limit sensor STHP Staple home sensor
T3DN Tray 3 lower limit sensor INPD Paper entry sensor
LSTS Stapler sensor T3PDHP Tray 3 paper exit roller paddler home sensor
NCTS Staple cartridge sensor PFD2 Transport sensor 2
PWD Power off detection PFD3 Transport sensor 3
DSW1 Copier connection detection PFD4 Transport sensor 4
DSW2 Top door open/close detection T3OD Tray 3 paper exit sensor
DSW3 Front door open/close detection STID Staple tray paper entry sensor
STID2 Staple tray paper entry sensor 2 STPD Staple paper sensor
T1PF Tray 1 paper full sensor
STID2 Staple tray paper-in sensor
T3UP Tray 3 upper limit sensor
T3DN Tray 3 lower limit sensor
LSTS Stapler sensor
NCTS Staple cartridge sensor
PWD Power off detection
DSW1 Copier connection detection
DSW2 Top door open/close detection
DSW3 Front door open/close detection
7/13/2000 7–9
3 -3 In the case of AR-FN2
DTM Transport motor
Purpose Operation test/check
DRM FW Reverse motor forward rotation
Function Used to check the operation of the loads in the finisher DRM RV Reverse motor reverse rotation
(Purpose) and the control circuit. DSM Alignment motor
Section Finisher SAM Stapler drive motor
Item Operation TMM Bin shift motor
Operation/ The display differs depending on the unit (finisher) PRSL Reverse solenoid
Procedure which is installed. PDS Paddle solenoid
BS Boomerang solenoid
1. The names of the loads which can be operated are displayed. The
selected load is highlighted.
2. Press the [EXECUTE] key, and the selected load is operated.
During the operation of the load, the [EXECUTE] key is high-
lighted. If the [EXECUTE] key is pressed when it is highlighted, the
operation is interrupted.
In the case of AR-FN1
PSM Pusher motor
JGM Jogger motor
STUM Staple unit shift motor
FM LOW Main drive motor low transport speed In the case of AR-FN3
FM HIGH Main drive motor high transport speed PSM Pusher motor
RVM Reverse motor JGM Jogger motor
EVM Elevator motor STUM Staple unit shift motor
OFM Offset motor FM Main drive motor
INGSL Paper entry gate solenoid T3OM Tray 3 paper exit drive motor
T3UPSL Tray 3 upper limit solenoid EVM Elevator motor
OG1SL Paper exit gate 1 solenoid OFM Offset motor
OG2SL Paper exit gate 2 solenoid T3PDSL Tray 3 paper exit paddler solenoid
OG3SL Paper exit gate 3 solenoid STPDSL ST paddler solenoid
RRSL Reverse roller pressure release solenoid OG1SL Paper exit gate 1 solenoid
SPSL Short path select solenoid OG2SL Paper exit gate 2 solenoid
T3ORCL Tray 3 uniform speed clutch OG3SL Paper exit gate 3 solenoid
T12CL Tray 1 and tray 2 speed reduction clutch STSL ST paper holding solenoid
PDCL Paddler clutch T12CL Tray 1 and tray 2 speed reduction clutch
STOPCL ST paper exit roller pressure clutch PDCL Paddler clutch
T3SLCL Tray 3 speed reduction clutch STOPCL ST paper exit roller pressure clutch
STM Staple motor STM Staple motor
PPSL Paper holding solenoid PPSL Paper holding solenoid
7 – 10 7/13/2000
3 -6 DCSS12 1cs size detection 1
DCSS13 1cs size detection 2
Purpose Adjustment
DCSS14 1cs size detection 3
Function Used to adjust the finisher stacking capability. (Used to DCSS21 2cs size detection 0
(Purpose) adjust the stop position of the finisher paper width di- DCSS22 2cs size detection 1
rection alignment plate (jogger). This adjustment is
DCSS23 2cs size detection 2
made by changing the width direction alignment plate
home position by the software.) DCSS24 2cs size detection 3
Section Finisher DCSS31 3cs size detection 0
DCSS32 3cs size detection 1
Item Operation
DCSS33 3cs size detection 2
Operation/ 1. Select B mode with [] and [¯] keys. DCSS34 3cs size detection 3
Procedure 2. Select the paper size by entering the numbers
LCC Unit Sensor
(0 or 1) with the 10-key pad.
3. Select A mode with [] and [¯] keys. LRE Remaining quantity sensor
LUD Upper limit sensor
4. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key pad.
LDD Lower limit sensor
5. Press the [EXECUTE] key.
LPED Paper empty sensor
The value entered in procedure 4 is set.
LPFD Paper exit sensor
The finisher’s jogger starts operation. During operation, the [EXE-
LDSW Door open SW
CUTE] key is highlighted.
LTOD Body connection sensor
If the [EXECUTE] key is pressed while it is highlighted, the load
operation is interrupted. LCD Cassette detection line
4 -2
Purpose Operation test/check
Function Used to check the operation of sensors and detectors
(Purpose) in the paper feed section (desk feed, large capacity
tray) and the related circuit.
Section Paper transport
4 -3
Item Operation
Operation/ The operting conditions of the sensors and detectors in Purpose Operation test/check
Procedure the paper feed section are displayed. Function Used to check the operation of the loads in the paper
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted. (Purpose) feed section (desk paper feed, large capacity tray) and
Desk Unit Sensor the control circuits.
DDOPSW Door open sensor Section Paper transport
DPOD1 Paper exit transport sensor 1cs Item Operation
DPOD2 Paper exit transport sensor 2 cs Operation/ 1. The names of the loads which can be operated are
DPOD3 Paper transport sensor 3cs Procedure displayed.
DLUD1 1cs Lift upper limit sensor Select the load to be checked with the key, and the
DPED1 1cs Paper empty sensor selected load is highlighted.
DCSPD1 1cs remaining quantity detection 1 2. Press the [EXECUTE] key.
The load selected in procedure 1 starts the operation.
DLUD2 2xs lift upper limit sensor
DPED2 2cs paper empty sensor During the operation of the load, the [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. If
the [EXECUTE] key is pressed while it is highlighted, the operation is
DCSPD2 2cs remaining quantity detection 1
stopped.
DLUD3 3cs lift upper limit sensor
DPED3 3cs paper empty sensor
DCSPD3 3cs remaining quantity detection 1
FOUND1 1cs lift unit detection (Installation detection)
FOUND2 2cs lift unit detection (Installation detection)
FOUND3 3cs lift unit detection (Installation detection)
DCSS11 1cs size detection 0
7/13/2000 7 – 11
Desk Unit Output
DM Transport motor
DLUM1 Lift up motor 1
DLUM2 Lift up motor 2
DLUM3 Lift up motor 3
DPFS1 Paper feed solenoid 1
DPFS2 Paper feed solenoid 2
DPFS3 Paper feed solenoid 3
DPFC1 Paper feed clutch 1
DPFC2 Paper feed clutch 2
DPFC3 Paper feed clutch 3
DTRC Transport clutch
Lcc Unit Output
¯
LLED Dorr open LED
LPFC Paper feed clutch
LPFS Paper feed solenoid
LPFM Transport motor
LLM Lift motor
The LCC unit lit motor continues lifting up and falling down
5 -2
Purpose Operation test/check
Function Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the
(Purpose) control circuit.
Section Fixing (Fusing)
Item Operation
Operation/ 1. Select the lamp to be checked with the key.
Procedure 2. Press the [EXECUTE] key.
The selected heater lamp repeats ON/OFF in the
frequency of 500msec 5 times.
5 Then the [EXECUTE] key returns to the original dis-
play.
5 -1 When the [EXECUTE] key is pressed during
ON/OFF operation of the heater lamp, the heater
Purpose Operation test/check lamp is turned OFF and the [EXECUTE] key returns
Function Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the to the original display.
(Purpose) operation panel, and control circuit. HL1 (LEFT): This lamp is on the left when viewed from the front and
Section Operation it heats the center of the lamp.
(Display/Operation key) HL2 (RIGHT): This lamp is on the right when viewed from the front
Item Operation and it heats both ends of the lamp.
Operation/ The LCD shows the following message.
Procedure (The contrast changes in the sequence of Current level
® Dark ® Light ® Current level ® Dark ® Light)
During that period, each LED is lighted.
7 – 12 7/13/2000
5 -3
Purpose Operation test/check
Function Used to check the operation of the copy lamp and the
(Purpose) control circuit.
Section Optical (Image scanning)
Item Operation
Operation/ When the [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the copy lamp is
Procedure lighted for 10 sec.
While the copy lamp is lighted, the [EXECUTE] key is
highlighted. If the [EXECUTE] key is pressed under this 6
state, the lamp is turned OFF.
After 10 sec, the copy lamp is turned OFF. At that time, the [EXE-
CUTE] key returns to the normal display.
6 -1
Purpose Operation test/check
Function Used to check the operation of the loads (clutches and
(Purpose) solenoids) in the paper transport system and the control
circuit.
Section Paper transport (Discharge/Switchback/Transport)
Item Operation
Operation/ 1. The names of the loads which can be operated are
Procedure displayed.
Select the load to be checked with the key, and the
selected load is highlighted.
5 -4
2. Press the [EXECUTE] key.
Purpose Operation test/check The selected load starts the operation.
During the operation of the load, the [EXECUTE] key is high-
Function Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and lighted.
(Purpose) the control circuit. If the [EXECUTE] key is pressed while it is highlighted, the opera-
Section Image process Others tion is stopped.
(Photoconductor/ PSPS Separation pawl operation solenoid
Developing/Transfer/
OGS Paper exit gate solenoid
Cleaning)
DSBS Duplex unit paper entry switchback gate solenoid
Item Operation
MSWPR Shut off
Operation/ When the [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the key is high-
CPFC2 Lower cassette paper feed clutch
Procedure lighted and the discharge lamp is lighted.
CPFS2 Lower cassette paper feed solenoid
When the [EXECUTE] key is pressed during the lamp is lighted, the MPFC Manual paper feed clutch
lamp is turned off and the [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal dis-
MPFS Manual paper feed solenoid
play.
MSS Manual paper entry gate solenoid
SBM FW Switchback motor forward rotation
SBM RV Switchback motor reverse rotation
MTRC Transport clutch low speed
TRC2 Transport clutch 2 high speed
RRC Resist roller clutch
CPFC1 Upper cassette paper feed clutch
CPFS1 Upper cassette paper feed solenoid
LUM1 Upper cassette lift up motor
TRC1H Transport clutch 1 high speed
5 -6 TRC1L Transport clutch 1 low speed
LUM2 Lower cassette lift up motor
Purpose Operation test/check FUM Fusing motor (AR-501/505/507 only)
Function Used to check the operation of the separation lamp and POM Paper exit motor (AR-501/505/507 only)
(Purpose) its control circuit. (AR-501/505/507 only)
Section Process (OPC drum, developing unit, transfer,
cleaning) section
Item Operation
Operation/ When the [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted
Procedure and the separation lamp is lighted.
After 30sec of lighting, the lamp turns off and the [EXECUTE] key re-
turns to the normal display.
When the [EXECUTE] key is pressed during the lamp is lighted, the
lamp is turned off and the [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal dis-
play.
7/13/2000 7 – 13
* When this simulation is executed, the machine resumes operation
regardless of setting (changing) of aging.
6 -2
Purpose Operation test/check
Function Used to check the operation of each fan motor and its
(Purpose) control circuit.
Section Others
Item Operation
Operation/ 1. The names of the loads which can be operated are
Procedure displayed.
Select the load to be checked with the key, and the
selected load is highlighted.
7 -6
2. Press the [EXECUTE] key.
The key is highlighted and the selected fan motor is rotated. Purpose Setting/Operation test/check
If the [EXECUTE] key is pressed while the fan motor is rotating, Function Used to set the cycle of intermittent aging.
the [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display and the fan mo- (Purpose)
tor is stopped. To operate or stop each fan motor, press the key of
Item Operation
the fan motor.
However, [CFM Low] key and [CFM High] key cannot be pressed Operation/ 1. Enter the interval aging cycle time (sec) with the 10-
ON simultaneously. Procedure key pad.
2. Press [OK] key to set the entered cycle time.
7
7 -8
7 -1 Purpose Setting/Operation test/check
Purpose Setting/Operation test/check Function Used to set YES/NO of display of the warmup time.
(Purpose)
Function Used to set the aging operation conditions.
(Purpose) Item Operation
Item Operation Operation/ Press the [EXECUTE] key to set the warmup time dis-
Procedure play.
Operation/ 1. Press each corresponding key to set for the aging When the [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the warmup time
Procedure operation. display setting is executed and the display returns to
(Set items of each key) the simulation main code entry display.
[AGING] Aging setting * When this simulation is canceled after completion of it, the machine
[MISFEED DISABLE] Jam detection enable/disable setting resumes operation regardless of setting (changing) of warmup time
[FUSING DISABLE] Fusing operation enable/disable setting display.
[WARMUP DISABLE] Warm-up save setting
[INTERVAL] Intermittent setting (Valid only in [AGING]
setting)
[DV CHECK DISABLE] Developing unit detection enable/disable
setting
[SHADING DISABLE] Shading enable/disable setting
The selected key is highlighted.
2. Press the [EXECUTE] key.
Aging is set and the display returns to the simulation main code
entry display.
7 – 14 7/13/2000
After completion of warming up, the warm-up time is displayed. (AR-287/337/407)
AUTO : Auto mode * (500) (–500V ±5V)
CHARA : Character mode * (500) (–500V ±5V)
CHARA PHOTO : Character/Photo mode * (500) (–500V ±5V)
PHOTO : Photo mode * (500) (–500V ±5V)
PRINTER : Printer mode * (500) (–500V ±5V)
PLUS : Cleaning mode * (150) (+150V ±5V)
Developing bias voltage
*( ): Default
8 -1
Purpose Adjustment/Operation test/check
Function Used to check the operation of the developing bias volt-
(Purpose) age in each print mode and its control circuit. (For OPC
drum type B)
Section Process (OPC drum, developing unit, transfer,
cleaning) section
Operation/ (The developing bias output voltage of each print mode
Procedure can be adjusted and checked.)
1. Select the print mode with [] key and [¯] key.
2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key pad.
3. Press the [EXECUTE] key.
The [EXECUTE] key is highlighted, the adjustment value entered in (AR-501/505)
procedure 2 is set, and the voltage corresponding to the set value is
AUTO : Auto mode * (415) (–425V ±5V)
supplied.
CHARA : Character mode * (490) (–500V ±5V)
After supplying the voltage for 30 sec, the [EXECUTE] key returns to
the normal display. CHARA PHOTO : Character/Photo mode * (490) (–500V ±5V)
If the [EXECUTE] key is pressed while the voltage is supplied, the PHOTO : Photo mode * (490) (–500V ±5V)
voltage output is stopped and the [EXECUTE] key returns to the nor- TONER SAVE : Toner save mode * (490) (–500V ±5V)
mal display. PRINTER : Printer mode * (490) (–500V ±5V)
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/335/336/405) PLUS : Cleaning mode * (165) (+150V ±5V)
AUTO : Auto mode * (500) (–500V ±5V) Developing bias voltage
CHARA : Character mode * (500) (–500V ±5V) (AR-507)
CHARA PHOTO : Character/Photo mode * (500) (–500V ±5V) AUTO : Auto mode * (415) (–425V ±5V)
PHOTO : Photo mode * (500) (–500V ±5V) CHARA : Character mode * (490) (–500V ±5V)
TONER SAVE : Toner save mode * (500) (–500V ±5V) CHARA PHOTO : Character/Photo mode * (490) (–500V ±5V)
PRINTER : Printer mode * (500) (–500V ±5V) PHOTO : Photo mode * (490) (–500V ±5V)
PLUS : Cleaning mode * (150) (+150V ±5V) PRINTER : Printer mode * (490) (–500V ±5V)
Developing bias voltage PLUS : Cleaning mode * (165) (+150V ±5V)
*( ): Default Developing bias voltage
*( ): Default
7/13/2000 7 – 15
8 -2
Purpose Adjustment/Operation test/check
Function Used to check and adjust the operation of the main
(Purpose) charger grid voltage in each print mode and the control
circuit. (for OPC drum type B)
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)
Operation/ (The charging/grid output voltage in each print mode
Procedure can be adjusted and checked.) (AR-501/505/507)
1. Select the print mode with [] key and [¯]key. AUTO : Auto mode * (560) (–570 ±5V)
2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key pad. CHARA : Character mode * (635) (–645 ±5V)
3. Press the [EXECUTE] key. CHARA PHOTO : Character/Photo mode * (635) (–645 ±5V)
The [EXECUTE] key is highlighted, the adjustment value entered in PHOTO : Photo mode * (635) (–645 ±5V)
procedure 2 is set, and the voltage corresponding to the set value is PRINTER : Printer mode * (635) (–645 ±5V)
supplied. *( ): Default
After supplying the voltage for 30 sec, the [EXECUTE] key returns to
the normal display.
If the [EXECUTE] key is pressed while the voltage is supplied, the
voltage output is stopped and the [EXECUTE] key returns to the nor-
mal display.
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/335/336/405)
AUTO : Auto mode * (641) (–642 ±5V)
CHARA : Character mode * (641) (–642 ±5V)
CHARA PHOTO : Character/Photo mode * (641) (–642 ±5V)
PHOTO : Photo mode * (641) (–642 ±5V)
PRINTER : Printer mode * (641) (–642 ±5V)
*( ): Default
8 -6
Purpose Adjustment/Operation test/check
Function Used to check and adjust the transfer charger current
(Purpose) and the control circuit.
Section Image process Copy
(Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)
Operation/ The transfer charger output voltage in printing the front
Procedure and the back of paper can be adjusted and checked.
(AR-287/337/407) 1. Select the print mode with [] key and [¯] key.
AUTO : Auto mode * (602) (–603 ±5V) 2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key pad.
CHARA : Character mode * (602) (–603 ±5V) 3. Press the [EXECUTE] key.
CHARA PHOTO : Character/Photo mode * (602) (–603 ±5V) The [EXECUTE] key is highlighted, the adjustment value entered in
PHOTO : Photo mode * (602) (–603 ±5V) procedure 2 is set, and the voltage corresponding to the set value is
PRINTER : Printer mode * (602) (–603 ±5V) supplied.
After supplying the voltage for 30 sec, the [EXECUTE] key returns to
*( ): Default
the normal display.
If the [EXECUTE] key is pressed while the voltage is supplied, the
voltage output is stopped and the [EXECUTE] key returns to the nor-
mal display.
FROMT MODE: Front surface print (with the paper feed tray and
manual paper feed tray)
BACK MODE: Back surface print (with duplex paper feed)
7 – 16 7/13/2000
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/335/336/405) After supplying the voltage for 30 sec, the [EXECUTE] key returns to
Default: 140 (13.5 + 1.5mA) the normal display.
If the [EXECUTE] key is pressed while the voltage is supplied, the
voltage output is stopped and the [EXECUTE] key returns to the nor-
mal display.
FROMT MODE: Front surface print (with the paper feed tray and
manual paper feed tray)
BACK MODE: Back surface print (with duplex paper feed)
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/335/336)
Default: 90 (DC –140 ±10V)
(AR-405)
(AR-287/337) Default: 90 (DC –150 ±10V)
Default: 190 (+13.5 to +15.0mA)
(AR-287/337)
(AR-407) Default: 135 (DC –140 ±10V)
Default: 200 (+15.0 to +16.5mA)
(AR-407)
(AR-501/505) Default: 145 (DC –150 ±10V)
Default: 255 (18.0+1.5mA)
(AR-507)
Default: 255 (18.0 to +19.5mA)
(AR-501/505/507)
Default: 177 (DC –200 ±10V)
8 -7
Purpose Adjustment/Operation test/check
Function Used to check and adjust the operation of the separa-
(Purpose) tion charger voltage and its control circuit.
Section Image process Others
(Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)
Operation/ The separation charger output voltage in printing the
Procedure front and the back of paper can be adjusted and
checked.
1. Select the print mode with [] key and [¯] key.
2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key pad.
3. Press the [EXECUTE] key.
The [EXECUTE] key is highlighted, the adjustment value entered in
procedure 2 is set, and the voltage corresponding to the set value is
supplied.
7/13/2000 7 – 17
9 9 -4
Purpose Operation test/check
9 -1
Function Used to check the operation of the duplex unit align-
Purpose Operation test/check (Purpose) ment plate and its control circuit.
Function Used to check the operation of the loads (clutches and Section Duplex
(Purpose) solenoids) in the duplex section and the control circuit. Item Operation
Section Duplex Operation/ 1. Select the paper size.
Item Operation Procedure The selected paper size is highlighted.
Operation/ 1. Select the load to be checked with the key. 2. Press the [EXECUTE] key.
Procedure The selected key is highlighted. Alignment operation is continuously operated.
2. Press the [EXECUTE] key. During the operation, the [EXECUTE] key is highlighted.
The load selected in procedure 1 is operated. If the [EXECUTE] key is pressed under this state, the operation is in-
terrupted.
While the load is operated, the [EXECUTE] key is highlighted.
If the [EXECUTE] key is pressed under this state, the load operation
is interrupted.
DTC1 Duplex unit paper entry transport clutch 1
DTC2 Duplex unit paper entry transport clutch 2
DSCS Duplex unit roller contact solenoid
10
10 - 0
Purpose Operation test/check
Function Used to check the operation of the toner motor and its
9 -2 (Purpose) control circuit.
Purpose Operation test/check (Note) Do not execute this simulation with toner in the
toner hopper. If executed, excessive toner may
Function Used to check the operation of sensors and detectors enter the developing section, causing an
(Purpose) in the duplex section and the control circuit. overtoner trouble. Be sure to remove the toner
Section Duplex motor from the toner hopper before executing
Item Operation this simulation.
Section Image process Developer/Toner Hopper
Operation/ The operations of sensors and detectors in the duplex (Photoconductor/Develop
Procedure section are displayed. ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted. Item Operation
DSBD Duplex unit paper entry switchback section sensor Operation/ When the [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted
DPPD1 Duplex unit paper transport switch 1 Procedure and the toner motor rotates for 10 sec.
DPPD2 Duplex unit paper transport switch 2 After 10sec of rotation, the toner motor stops and the [EXECUTE] key
DPPD3 Duplex unit paper transport switch 3 returns to the normal display.
DAPD Duplex unit alignment plate home sensor If the [EXECUTE] key is pressed during rotation, the toner motor is
stopped and the [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal state.
7 – 18 7/13/2000
14
14 - 0
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function Used to cancel the self diag U1/LOC/U2/PF troubles.
(Purpose)
Item Trouble Error
Operation/ When the [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the troubles ex-
Procedure cluding U1/LCC/U2/PF are canceled and the display re-
turns to the simulation main code entry screen. 17
After this simulation is canceled, the machine resumes operation.
17 - 0
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function Used to cancel copy inhibition by the host computer
(Purpose) during the self diag PF.
Section Communication unit (TEL/LIU/MODEM etc.)
Item Trouble Error
Operation/ When the [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the PF trouble is
Procedure canceled and the display returns to the simulation main
code entry screen. After this simulation is canceled, the
15 machine resumes operation.
15 - 0
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function Used to cancel the self diag U4 - 09/20/21/22 (large ca-
(Purpose) pacity tray) trouble.
Section Paper transport
Item Trouble
Operation/ When the [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the U6
Procedure (09/20/21/22) (LCC) trouble is canceled and the display
returns to the simulation main code entry screen. 21
After canceling this simulation, the machine resumes
operation. 21 - 1
Purpose Setting
Function Used to set the maintenance cycle.
(Purpose)
Item Specifications Counter
Operation/ When the maintenance cycle is selected with the key,
Procedure the selected key is highlighted. The maintenance mes-
sage is displayed in every selected cycle. When FREE
is selected, the maintenance display is not shown.
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337)
16 Default: 80K
16 - 0
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function Used to cancel the self diag U2 trouble.
(Purpose)
Item Trouble Error
Operation/ When the [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the U2 trouble is
Procedure canceled and the display returns to the simulation main
code entry screen.
After this simulation is canceled, the machine resumes
operation.
7/13/2000 7 – 19
(AR-405/407) DF JAM: The number of paper jam troubles
Default: 90K occurred in the document feeders
(SPF/ADF/RADF).
TROUBLE: Total number of troubles
(AR-501/505/507)
Default: 125K
nnnnnnnn : Counter value
22 - 3
Purpose Operation data output/Check (Display/Print)
Function Used to check the misfeed positions and the number of
(Purpose) misfeed in each position. (If the number of misfeed is
considerably great, it can be judged as necessary for
repair.) (Sections other than ADF/RADF/SPF sections)
Item Mis-feed
Operation/ The misfeed history sections indicated by the sensors
22 Procedure and detectors are displayed sequentially from the latest
one. Max. 40 items of information can be stored, and
22 - 1 the oldest one is deleted sequentially.
The trouble position may be presumed with this data.
Purpose Operation data output/Check (Display/Print)
Function Used to check the print out count of each section in
(Purpose) each operation mode.
(Used to check the maintenance timing.)
Item Counter
Operation/
Procedure
22 - 4
Purpose Operation data output/Check (Display/Print)
Function Used to check the total trouble (self diag) history.
(Purpose)
Item Mis-feed
Operation/ The trouble history error codes are displayed sequen-
Procedure tially from the latest one. Max. 40 items of information
can be stored, and the oldest one is deleted sequen-
tially. The machine condition can be presumed accord-
ing to this data.
22 - 2
Purpose Operation data output/Check (Display/Print)
Function Used to check the total numbers of misfeed and trou-
(Purpose) bles. (When the number of misfeed is considerably
great, it is judged as necessary for repair.
The misfeed rate is obtained by dividing this count
value with the total counter value.)
Item Mis-feed
Operation/ MACHINE JAM:The number of paper jam troubles
Procedure occurred in the sections other than the
document feeders (SPF/ADF/RADF).
7 – 20 7/13/2000
22 - 5 (AR-287/337/407/507)
A: Paper feed mode
Purpose Others 1: Manual paper feed
Function Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section). 2: Upper paper feed tray
(Purpose) 3: Lower paper feed tray
4: Desk upper paper feed tray
Item Software 5: Desk middle paper feed tray
Operation/ The ROM version of each section can be checked. 6: Desk lower paper feed tray
Procedure If there is any problem in the software, check the ROM 7: Large capacity paper feed tray
version of each section with this simulation and replace
with a new version if necessary.
22 - 7
Purpose User data output/Check (Display/Print)
22 - 6
Function Used to display the key operator code. (This simulation
Purpose Operation data output/Check (Display/Print) (Purpose) is used when the customer forgets the key operator
Function Used to output the list of the setting and adjustment code.)
(Purpose) data (simulations, FAX soft switch, counters). Item Data User data
Item Data Adjust/Setting data Operation/
Procedure
Operation/ When installing or servicing, execute this simulation to
Procedure print and store the adjustment values and setting data
for use in the next servicing. (Memory trouble, PWB re-
placement, etc.)
In this case, the print conditions can be set optionally.
1. Select the setup item.
(The selected item is highlighted.)
2. Set the item and conditions with the 10-key pad. nnnnn : Key operator code
3. Press the [EXECUTE] key to print various data.
(AR-250/280/281/285/286//335/336/405/501/505) 22 - 8
A: Print out items (Contents)
1: All adjustment values and setup data Purpose Operation data output/Check (Display/Print)
2: All counter data Function Used to check the number of use of the staple, the
3: FAX soft switch setup data (Japan only) (Purpose) ADF, RADF, SPF, and scanning.
4: Print density adjustment data
5: Adjustment and setup data of the other simulations Item Counter
B: Paper feed mode Operation/ This data is used to check the use frequency of each
1: Manual paper feed Procedure section. According to this data, maintenance is exe-
2: Upper paper feed tray cuted.
3: Lower paper feed tray
4: Desk upper paper feed tray
5: Desk middle paper feed tray
6: Desk lower paper feed tray
7: Large capacity paper feed tray
22 - 9
Purpose Operation data output/Check (Display/Print)
Function Used to check the number of use of each paper feed
(Purpose) section. (the number of prints)
Section Paper transport
Item Counter
7/13/2000 7 – 21
Operation/ This data is used to check the use frequency of each 22 - 12
Procedure paper feed section, According to this data, mainte-
nance is performed. Purpose Operation data output/Check (Display/Print)
Function Used to check the misfeed positions and the number of
(Purpose) misfeed at each position. (When the number of misfeed
is considerably great, is can be judged as necessary for
repair.)
Section SPF/ADF/RSPF/RADF
Item Mis-feed
Operation/
Procedure
22 - 10
Purpose Operation data output/Check (Display/Print)
Function Used to check the system configuration (option, internal
(Purpose) hardware).
Item Specifications Options 22 - 19
Operation/ This simulation allows to check the system configura-
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check
Procedure tion.
(Display/Print)
The devices and the option units which are installed are
displayed with the model names or size, etc. Function Used to display the scanner mode counter.
(Purpose)
(AR-230/280/285 series)
Item Counter
Operation/
Procedure
(AR-330/335 series)
nnnnnnnn : Counter value
24
24 - 1
Purpose Data clear
Function Used to clear the misfeed counter, the misfeed history,
(AR-250/281/286/287/336/337/405) (Purpose) the trouble counter, and the trouble history. (The count-
ers are cleared after completion of maintenance.)
Item Counter
Operation/ 1. Select the counter to be cleared.
Procedure MACHINE: Machine JAM counter
DF: SPF/RADF/ADF JAM counter
TROUBLE: Trouble counter
(When selected, it is highlighted.)
2. Press the [EXECUTE] key.
The display for reconfirmation to clear is shown.
(AR-501/505/507 series)
3. Select YES or NO to clear the counter.
YES: Clear
NO: Not clear
After completion of maintenance, the above counter is cleared
7 – 22 7/13/2000
24 - 2 24 - 4
Purpose Data clear Purpose Data clear
Function Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) Function Used to reset the maintenance counter.
(Purpose) of each paper feed section. (Purpose)
Section Paper transport Item Counter
Item Counter Operation/ 1. Press the [EXECUTE] key.
Operation/ 1. Select the counter to be cleared. Procedure The display for reconfirmation to clear is shown.
Procedure BYPASS: Manual paper feed tray counter 2. Select YES or NO to clear the counter
TRAY1: Tray 1 counter YES: Clear
TRAY2: Tray 2 counter NO: Not clear
DESK1: Desk 1 counter The above counter is cleared after completion of maintenance.
DESK2: Desk 2 counter
DESK3: Desk 3 counter
ADU: Duplex unit counter
LCC: Large capacity tray counter
(When selected, it is highlighted.)
2. Press the [EXECUTE] key.
The display for reconfirmation to clear is shown.
3. Select YES or NO to clear the counter.
YES: Clear
NO: Not clear 24 - 5
After completion of maintenance, the above counter is cleared.
Purpose Data clear
Function Used to reset the developer quantity counter. (The de-
(Purpose) veloper counter of the installed developing unit is re-
set.)
Section Image process Developer/Toner Hopper
(Photoconductor/Develop
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Item Counter Developer
Operation/ 1. Press the [EXECUTE] key.
Procedure The display for reconfirmation to clear is shown.
24 - 3 2. Select YES or NO to clear the counter.
YES: Clear
Purpose Data clear
NO: Not clear
Function Used to clear the data of the number of use of the sta- The above counter is cleared after replacement of developer.
(Purpose) ple, the SPF, ADF, RSPF, RADF and scanning.
Item Counter
Operation/ 1. Select the counter to be cleared.
Procedure DF: ADF/SPF/RADF/RSPF counter
SCAN: Scan counter
STAPLER: Stapler counter
(When selected, it is highlighted.)
2. Press the [EXECUTE] key.
The display for reconfirmation to clear is shown.
3. Select YES or NO to clear the counter.
YES: Clear
NO: Not clear
After completion of maintenance, the above counter is cleared.
7/13/2000 7 – 23
24 - 6 3. Select YES (Clear) or NO (Not clear).
YES: Clear
Purpose Data clear NO: Not clear
Function Used to reset the copy counter. The above counter is cleared after completion of maintenance.
(Purpose)
Item Counter Copier
Operation/ 1. Press the [EXECUTE] key.
Procedure The display for reconfirmation to clear is shown.
2. Select YES or NO to clear the counter.
YES: Clear
NO: Not clear
Generally, the counter is not cleared.
24 - 11
Purpose Data clear
Function Used to reset the developer rotation time counter. (The
(Purpose) developer counter of the installed developing unit is re-
set.) (AR-501/505/507 only)
Section Image process Developer/Toner Hopper
(Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/
24 - 7 Cleaning)
Item Counter Developer
Purpose Data clear Operation/ 1. Press the [EXECUTE] key.
Function Used to clear the OPC drum (membrane decrease) cor- Procedure The display for reconfirmation to clear is shown.
(Purpose) rection counter.
2. Select YES or NO to clear the counter.
(This simulation is executed when the OPC drum is re-
placed.) YES: Clear
Section Image process Photo conductor NO: Not clear
(Photoconductor/ The counter is automatically cleared after completion of SIM 25-2.
Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)
Item Counter Photo conductor
Operation/ 1. Press the [EXECUTE] key.
Procedure The display for reconfirmation to clear is shown.
2. Select YES or NO to clear the counter.
YES: Clear
NO: Not clear
The above counter is cleared after replacement of the OPC drum.
24 - 15
24 - 9
Purpose Data clear
Purpose Data clear
Function Used to clear the scanner mode counter.
Function Used to clear the printer print counter. (The counter is (Purpose)
(Purpose) cleared after completion of maintenance.)
Item Counter
Section Printer
Operation/ 1. Press the [EXECUTE] key.
Item Counter Printer Procedure 2. Select YES or NO to clear the counter
Operation/ 1. Select the counter to be cleared. YES: Clear
Procedure PRINTER: Printer counter NO: Not clear
OTHER: The other counters
(When selected, it is highlighted.)
2. Press the [EXECUTE] key.
The display for reconfirmation to clear is shown.
7 – 24 7/13/2000
After stirring for 3 minutes, the toner concentration detection level av-
erage value is set (stored) as the reference toner concentration con-
trol value.
If the [EXECUTE] key is pressed during rotation, the operation stops
and the [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
If [EE-EU] or [EE-EL] is displayed, it means the reference toner con-
centration control value is not set normally.
Default: 0
(Note) Do not set to 0.
¯ [EXECUTE] key on
25 - 8
25 Function Used to set the timing of toner concentration control
(Purpose) correction B and the correction quantity. The timing is
determined according to the acuumulated use time of
25 - 1 developer. (AR-501/505/507 only)
Purpose Operation test/check Operation/ When this simulation is executed, the current set value
Procedure is displayed. Under this state, the set value can be
Function Used to check the operation of the main drive (exclud- changed by pressing the 10-key.
(Purpose) ing the scanner section) and to check the operation of
When [OK] key is pressed, the set value is stored in the EEPROM.
the toner concentration sensor. (The toner concentra-
tion sensor output can be monitored.) Content Set range Default
Section DRIVE A The first correction time [min] 0 – 500 200
Item Operation B Second and later correction time [min] 0 – 500 50
Operation/ The main motor rotates for 3 minutes, and the drive C Number of times of correction 0 – 10 3
Procedure system can be checked. D Correction quantity 0 – 30 0
The toner concentration sensor output value is displayed.
When the [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the main
motor rotates and the toner concentration sensor output value is dis-
played.
After 3 minutes, the main motor stops and the [EXECUTE] key re-
turns to the normal display.
If the [EXECUTE] key is pressed during rotation, the operation is
stopped and the [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
26
26 - 1
Purpose Setting
Function Used to set options. (This simulation is used to make
(Purpose) option setting when an option is installed.)
25 - 2
Item Specifications Options
Purpose Setting Operation/ Enter the code number corresponding to the option in-
Function Used to make the initial setting of toner concentration Procedure stallation with the 10-key pad and press the [OK] key.
(Purpose) when replacing developer. When an option is installed or removed, this setting must be changed
Section Image process Developer/Toner Hopper accordingly. If this setting is improper, an error message is displayed.
(Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)
Operation/ When the [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted
Procedure and the main motor rotates, and the toner concentra-
tion sensor detects the toner concentration and the out-
put value is displayed.
7/13/2000 7 – 25
(AR-230/280/285/330/335 series) * Detection size when 8.5" x 13" document/paper is used
Set value Connection option Set value
0 No connection (Default) Unit Destination 0
1 AR-TR1 (Default) 1 (Valid)
2 AR-TR1 + AR-DU1 (Invalid)
Document AR-SP1 All 8.5" x 14" 8.5" x 13" *1
(AR-250/286/281/336/337/405/407 series)
destinations
Set value Connection option AR-AF1 Japan A4R A4R *5
0 No connection (Default) AR-RF1 EX AB A4R A4R *5
1 AR-TR1 series
2 AR-TR1 + AR-DU1 (SLK/SEEG)
3 AR-DU1 only EX AB A4R 8.5" x 13" *3
series
(SCA/
Others)
Inch series 8.5" x 14" 8.5" x 14" *5
(SEC/SECL)
Inch series 8.5" x 14" 8.5" x 13" *1
(Others)
Document Japan/EX B4 8.5" x 13" *2
table AB series
Inch series 8.5" x 14" 8.5" x 13" *1
(AR-501/505/507 series) Paper Main Manual All 8.5" x 14" 8.5" x 13" *4
Set value Connection option body feed destinations
0 No connection tray
3 AR-DU1 Paper All
feed destinations
cassette — *6
AR-DE1/DE2 All
destinations
AR-LC1 All
—
destinations
*1: A document of 8.5" x 14" is detected as 8.5" x 13".
*2: A document of B4 is detected as 8.5" x 13".
*3: A document of A4R is detected as 8.5" x 13".
*4: A document of 8.5" x 14" is detected as 8.5" x 13".
*5: Applicable by replacing the document set tray of the AR-AF1/RF1.
26 - 2
*6: Setting is available with the key operator program (P40).
Purpose Setting Value Display Paper
Function 1) Used to set the paper size of the large quantity pa- 1 Characters HEAVY PAPER PLAIN PAPER
(Purpose) per tray. (When the paper size is changed, the lift 2 Weight in g. 106 - 200 g/m2 56 - 105 g/m2
paper size must be also changed with this simula- 3 Weight in lbs. 28+ - 55 lbs 15 - 28 lbs
tion.)
2) Used to detect the paper or document size of 8.5" x 13" (Inch se- SIM26-6 Default (C)
ries) and set the display mode. (All paper feed modes) U.S.A 3
Section Paper transport Canada 3
Item Specifications Inch 3
Japan 1
Operation/ 1. Select the item to be set with [] key and [¯] key.
AB_B 2
Procedure A: Large capacity paper tray paper size setting
Europe 2
B: 8.5" x 13" (330mm/13") paper size detection
U.K. 2
mode setting
Aus. 2
C: Manual feed paper size setting
AB_B 2
2. Enter the code number corresponding to the paper size of the
large capacity paper feed tray with the 10-key and press the [OK]
key.
Set value Setting size
1 8.5✕11
2 A4 (Default)
3 B5
3. Used to set the size detection mode when 8.5" x 13" paper or
document is used.
Enter the code number with the 10-key pad and press the [OK]
key.
7 – 26 7/13/2000
26 - 6
Purpose Setting
Function Used to set the specifications depending on the desti-
(Purpose) nation.
Item Specifications the Destination
destination
Operation/ Select the destination referring to the table below.
Procedure
26 - 10
Purpose Setting
Function Used to allow entry of the software key input for the
(Purpose) network scanner. (AR-287/337/407/507)
26 - 5
Item Operation
Purpose Setting
Operation/ 1. After entering the sub code of the simulation, enter
Function Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the Procedure the software key in the obtained frame of "NEW."
(Purpose) maintenance counter.
2. When the obtained number is entered with the 10-key (max. 9 dig-
Item Specifications Counter its), the entered number is displayed in the frame of "NEW." After
Operation/ Used to set the single count-up or double count-up for entering the number, press the [OK] key, and the entered number
Procedure the total counter, the maintenance counter, and the de- is stored.
veloper counter when printing is performed with A3, 11 3. Reset with the CA key, and the scanner function is enabled.
x 17" paper, * Only when SCSI (20 channels/NS1) setup is completed.
1. Select the kind of the counter with [] and [¯] key. If the scanner key input is made without setup, it is rejected.
A Total 4. Special note
B Maintenance When the SCSI channel is set to "20," if a software key which
does not correspond to the setup is entered, the setup of "20" is
C Developer
changed to "1."
2. Enter "1" or "2" with the 10-key pad and press the [OK] key.
1: Single count
2: Double count
Default: 2
7/13/2000 7 – 27
26 - 12 Set value Remedy mode Fusing condition
0 Normal operation (Default)
Purpose Setting 1 Remedy mode 1 a. Racing until the specified
Function Used to enter the Diagnosis function key input. fusing temperature is
(Purpose) (AR-287/337/407/507) reached.
2 Remedy mode 1 a. Racing is performed until
Item Operation
the specified fusing
Operation/ 1. After entering the sub code of the simulation, enter temperature is reached.
Procedure the software key in the obtained frame of "NEW." b. Copy mode is duplex mode
2. When the obtained number is entered with the 10-key (max. 9 dig- or sort.
its), the entered number is displayed in the frame of "NEW." After Group mode
entering the number, press the [OK] key, and the entered number · Previous rotation is made
is stored. for 5 sec before starting
copying.
3. The Alert/Status E-Mail send function with attached data of the
Remote E-Mail Diagnosis System is enabled.
26 - 18
26 - 13
Purpose Setting
Purpose Setting
Function Used to set VALID/INVALID of toner save operation.
Function After completion of copier job in copier interruption dur- (Purpose) (This simulation is valid only in the Japan and UK ver-
(Purpose) ing a printer job, the print job is resumed in synchroni- sions. (It depends on SIM 26-6 (Destination setting).
zation with the auto clear timer (key operation) setup For the other destinations, the same setting can be
time [10-240]. By making the setup below, the print job executed with the user program.)
is resumed in 0 sec. (However, the auto clear function Item Specifications Operation mode
is enabled with the setup time of key operation. Also, (Common)
this simulation and auto clear are not synchronized.) Operation/ Enter the code number corresponding to the condition
(AR-287/337/407/507) Procedure (the toner save YES/NO) with the 10-key and press the
Item Operation [OK] key.
Operation/ When this simulation is executed, the current set value Set value Toner save
Procedure is displayed. At that time, the set value can be changed 0 YES
with the 10-key. 1 NO (Default)
When the [OK] key is pressed, the current set value is
stored in the EEPROM.
26 - 22
26 - 15 Purpose Setting
Purpose Setting Function Used to set the specification (language display) for the
(Purpose) destination. (Excluding the Japan models.)
Function Used to set the fusing operation mode (paper curl cor-
(Purpose) responding mode). Item Specifications
Section Fixing (Fusing) Operation/ Select the language to be used according to the table
Procedure below.
Item Operation
(AR-280/281/285/286/335/336/405/501/505)
Operation/ Due to the paper type (paper property), paper may be
Procedure curled in the fusing section and cause a paper jam. To Display Language
prevent against this, the fusing condition is changed. ENG.(US) English(US)
Enter the code number corresponding to the fusing condition and ENG.(UK) English(UK)
press the [OK] key. FRENCH French
SPANISH Spanish
GERMAN German
7 – 28 7/13/2000
Operation/ When this simulation is executed, the current set value
Procedure is displayed. At that time, select the fan motor with []
key and [¯] key. Then the set value can be changed
with the 10-key.
When [] key or [¯] key is pressed, the current set value is stored in
the EEPROM.
VFM1&2&4 Adjustment range of 50 – 100% in 1% increment
PCFM VFM5&6 Adjustment range of 50 – 100% in 1% increment
(AR-287/337/407/507)
Display Language
ENG.(US) English(US)
ENG.(UK) English(UK)
FRENCH French
SPANISH Spanish
GERMAN German
ITALIAN Italian
SWEDISH Swedish
DUTCH Dutch 26 - 35
Purpose Setting
Function Used to set whether the trouble history display of SIM
(Purpose) 22-4 is displayed as one trouble or as the number of
continuous troubles when two or more troubles of a
same kind occured.
Item Specifications
Operation/ Used to set whether the trouble history display by SIM
Procedure 22-4 is displayed as one trouble or as the accumulated
number of continuous troubles when two or more trou-
bles of same kind occur continuously.
26 - 30 Select the number corresponding to the display mode with the 10-key
and press the [OK] key.
Purpose Setting
1: The trouble history display by SIM 22-4 is displayed as it is when
Function Used to set the CE mark conforming operation mode. two or more troubles occur continuously.
(Purpose) (For flickers when driving the fusing heater lamp.)
0: The trouble history display by SIM 22-4 is displayed as one trouble
Item Specifications Operation mode when two or more troubles occur continuously.
(Common) Default: 0
Operation/ Enter the number corresponding to the operation mode
Procedure with the 10-key and press the [OK] key.
26 - 36
Purpose Setting
Function Used to set the ICU fan operating temperature. (Opera-
(Purpose) tion in pre-heat mode.) (Excluding Japan models.)
Section ICU
Item Operation
Operation/ Used to set the threshold value of the ambient tem-
26 - 32 Procedure perature for turning ON the ICU fan motor in the pre-
heat mode.
Purpose Setting
Set range : 0~33[°C]
Function When the variable speed fan motor is in the ready state Default : 30[°C] (30)
(Purpose) and the process temperature is in the range of 36° –
Enter the operating temperature with the 10-key pad
45°, the PWM duty is set in percentage.
and press the [OK] key.
(AR-287/337/407/507)
Item Operation
7/13/2000 7 – 29
26 - 41
Purpose Setting
Function Used to enable/disable the auto magnification ratio se-
(Purpose) lect (AMS) function in the pamphlet copy mode.
Item Specifications Operation mode
(Common)
Operation/ This simulation is used to enable or disable the auto-
Procedure matic magnification ratio selection (AMS) in the pam-
phlet mode.
26 - 40 Set value Set content
Automatic magnification ratio selection (AMS) is
Purpose Setting 0
enabled.
Function Polygon motor stop mode setup (AR-501/505/507) Automatic magnification ratio selection (AMS) is
(Purpose) Used to set the stop time of the polygon motor after 1
disabled.
leaving in ready state and to set Enable/Disable of the
setting. (Other models)
Item Specifications
Operation/ (AR-501/505/507)
Procedure When this simulation is executed, the current set value
is displayed.
At that time, the set value can be changed with the 10-key.
When the OK key is pressed, the currently set value is stored in the
EEPROM.
Default: 0
Normal mode Control according to the setup in the
0 26 - 44
silent mode by the user setup.
Silent mode After completion of a job, the polygon
Purpose Setting
1 motor is stopped in the time set in the
silent mode of the user setup. Function Used to set the model of the unit which is connected to
(Purpose) the SCSI I/F of ICU PWB.
Section ICU
Item Specifications Interface/Communication
Operation/ (AR-250/280/281/285/286/335/336/405/501/505)
Procedure A is at the left of B when viewed from the rear side.
0: No connection
1: Printer controller
3: External printer controller (Not used)
(Other models) 4: Scanner controller (Not used)
A: 8: Tandem connection (Initiator)
1. Used to set the time (minute) to stop the polygon motor with the 10: Tandem connection (Target)
10-key. Two SCSI channels available
(Regardless of setting in B, the time can be freely set.) (AR-501/505)
2. Press the OK key to store the set time.
3. Press the CA key to reset. Only when B is set to "1: YES", the
polygon motor is stopped in the set time.
Set range: 1-30 min
Default: 30 min
B Used to set YES/NO of the setup of A.
Default: 0 (NO)
Set value Content
NO (The currently set operation is performed.) ®
0 SP/FP does not stop. (Other models)
40 NEW Stops in the default time (30 min).
1 Stops in the set value of A.
7 – 30 7/13/2000
(AR-287/337/407/507)
0: No connection
1: Printer controller
3: External printer controller
4: AXIS controller
8: Tandem connection (Initiator)
10: Tandem connection (Target)
20: Network scanner controller (NS1)
Either of the above values is set.
* AR-287 is not provided with the tandem setting.
However, the display is not changed. When tandem setup is tried, it
is rejected. 26 - 52
Function Used to set whether white paper discharge count up is
(Purpose) performed or not.
("White paper" means insertion paper in the OHP inser-
tion paper mode (without copy), cover paper in the
cover paper insertion mode (without copy)/back cover,
and white paper in the duplex exit mode (CA etc.).)
Operation/ When this simulation is executed, the current set value
Procedure is displayed.
Under this state, the set value can be changed with the
10-key.
26 - 46 When the OK key is pressed, the currently set value is stored in the
EEPROM.
Purpose Setting Set value Content
Function Used to set the image direction or not regardless of 0 White paper count up is not performed.
(Purpose) modes when the finisher/sorter is installed. A
1 White paper count up is performed.
Item Specifications Operation mode (AR-250/280/281/285/286/335/336/405/501/505)
(Common)
Destination Default
Operation/ This simulation is used to set the image direction or not
U.K./Europe/Aus. 0 (Count up is not performed.)
Procedure regardless of modes when the finisher/sorter is in-
stalled. (Other models than AR-405/407/501/505/507) Others 1 (Count up is performed.)
26 - 50
Purpose Setting
Function Used to set YES/NO of black/white reversion is al-
(Purpose) lowed.
Item Specifications
Operation/ When this simulation is executed, the current set value
Procedure is displayed.
At that time, the set value can be changed with the 10-
key.
When the OK key is pressed, the currently set value is stored in the
EEPROM.
Default: 1 (YES) (Black/white reversion is allowed.)
0 NO: Black/white reversion is inhibited.
1 YES: Black/white reversion is allowd.
7/13/2000 7 – 31
26 - 58 27 - 2
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check Purpose Setting
(Display/Print) Function Used to set and change the host computer/MODEM
Function Used to setup the scanner mode counter. (Purpose) numbers. (This setting is required when a communica-
(Purpose) tion is made between the copier and a computer
Item Counter through MODEM.)
Operation/ Set the counter. Section Communication unit (TEL/LIU/MODEM etc.)
Procedure 0: Display the counter only in simulation mode Item Data User data
1: Display the counter both in simulation and key Operation/ 1. Select the PC/MODEM(HOST#/TEL#)to be set or
operator program modes Procedure changed. ’The selected key is highlighted.)
[Default] 2. Press the [OK] key.
1: When the destination is U.K. The key is highlighted and inquiring of the present set number of
0: When the destination is other than U.K. the selected PC/MODEM is made to the host computer.
(When the number is supplied from the host normally.)
The present set number is displayed in the column of PRESENT
(or no display is made if not registered) and the [OK] key at the
upper right returns from the gray display to the normal display.
(In case of a trouble)
"Failed (U7-00)" is displayed in the column of PRESENT and the
OK key at the lower right returns from the highlight display to the
normal display.
3. When changing the number, enter the new number (max. 24 dig-
its) with the 10-key and the following keys.
# : [P]((program) key
27 * : [AUDIT CLEAR] ((Dept. count end) key
, : [ i ]((Information) key
27 - 1 4. When the [OK] key at the upper right is pressed, the newly set
Purpose Setting number for the selected PC/MODEM is registered.
(When registered normally)
Function Used to set the operation specifications when a com- The number displayed in the column of NEW disappears and the
(Purpose) munication trouble occurs between the host computer newly set number appears in the column of PRESENT
and MODEM (on the copier). (When a communication (In case of a trouble)
trouble occurs between the host computer and MO- "Failed (U7-00)" is displayed in the column of NEW.
DEM (copier), the self diag display (U7-00) is printed
and setting is made to select inhibit/allow of printing.)
Section Communication unit (TEL/LIU/MODEM etc.)
Item Specifications Operation mode
(Common)
Operation/ Enter the code number corresponding to the operation
Procedure mode with the 10-key and press the [OK] key.
Used to set Enable/Disable of U7-00 trouble detection.
Set value Content
0 U7-00 trouble detection is disabled. Note For this setting, the copier and the host computer must
(Default) be connected with a communication line (MODEM).
1 U7-00 trouble detection is enabled.
0: Though a communication trouble occurs between the host com- 27 - 3
puter and the MODEM (machine side), the operation of the ma-
chine is not affected. Purpose Setting
1: When a communication trouble occurs between the host computer Function Used to set and change the ID numbers of the copier
and the MODEM (copier side), the self diag display (U7-00) is (Purpose) and the host computer/MODEM numbers. (This setting
shown and printing is inhibited. is required when a communication is made between
the copier and a computer through MODEM.)
Section Communication unit (TEL/LIU/MODEM etc.)
Item Data User data
Operation/ 1. Select between PPC(copier) and PC/MODEM(host).
Procedure The key is highlighted.
2. Press the [OK] key at the lower right. (The key is highlighted and
an inquiry of the selected ID No, to the host.)
(When the number is supplied from the host normally)
The present set number is displayed in the column of PRESENT
(or no display is made if not registered) and the [OK] key at the
upper right returns from the gray display to the normal display.
7 – 32 7/13/2000
(In case of a trouble) Item Data
"U7 TROUBLE" is displayed in the column of PRESENT and the
Operation/ 1. When entering the tag No. newly or changing the tag
OK key at the lower right returns from the highlight display to the
Procedure No. enter the value (max. 8 digits) with the 10-key.
normal display.
The entered number is displayed in the column of
3. When changing the number, enter the new number (max. 24 dig- "NEW"
its) with the 10-key and the following keys.
2. Press the [OK] key.
X: [AUDIT CLEAR](dept. count end) key The new tag No. entered in procedure 1 is set.
The entered number is displayed in the column of "NEW" It is advisable to enter the machine’s SER No. for machine man-
Y: [P](program) key agement and servicing.
4. When the [OK] key at the upper right is pressed, the newly set ID
number of the selected PC/MODEM is registered on the host side.
(When registered normally)
The number in the column of NEW disappears and the newly set
and registered number appears in the column of PRESENT.
(In case of a trouble)
"U7 TROUBLE" is displayed in the column of NEW
Note For this setting, the copier and the host computer must
be connected with a communication line (MODEM).
30
30 - 1
Purpose Operation test/check
27 - 4
Function Used to check the operation of sensors and detectors
Purpose Setting (Purpose) in the paper feed section, the paper transport section,
Function Used to enter the start time and the end time of servic- and the paper exit section, and the related circuit.
(Purpose) ing for management of service work. (The data can be Section Others
checked by the host computer.) Item Operation
Section Communication unit (TEL/LIU/MODEM etc.)
Operation/ The operations of the sensors and detectors in the sec-
Item Data Procedure tions other than the paper feed section of the copier are
Operation/ 1. Press the[SERVICE START]key when starting serv- displayed.
Procedure icing. The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
The key is highlighted. DSWF Copier front door open/close
2. Press the [EXECUTE]key. DSWL Copier left door
The key is highlighted and the data on service start time is sent. DSWLL Copier left lower door
3. Press the [SERVICE END]Key after completion of servicing. DSWR Copier right door
The key is highlighted. DVCH1 Developing unit installation detection
4. Press the [EXECUTE]key . DVCH2 Developing unit installation detection
The key is highlighted and the data on service end time is sent.
DVCH3 Developing unit installation detection
When the host receives the data normally,"Complete"is high-
DVCH4 Developing unit installation detection
lighted.
In case of a trouble, "Failed"is highlighted. PFD Paper vertical transport sensor
PPD1 Paper transport sensor 1
PPD2 Paper transport sensor 2
PSD Paper transport sensor
POD1 Paper exit sensor 1
POD2 Paper exit sensor 2
POD3 Paper exit sensor 3
TFD Waste toner bottle full detection
TMS Toner motor missing detection
(AR-501/505/507)
Note For this setting, the copier and the host computer must
be connected with a communication line (MODEM).
27 - 5
Purpose Setting
Function Used to enter the TAG No. of the copier. (This simula-
(Purpose) tion allows to check the machine TAG No. with the host
computer.)
Section Communication unit (TEL/LIU/MODEM etc.)
7/13/2000 7 – 33
(Other models)
30 - 2 40
Purpose Operation test/check 40 - 1
Function Used to check the operation of sensors and detectors
(Purpose) in the paper feed section and the related circuits. Purpose Operation test/check
(The operations of sensors and detectors in the paper Function Used to check the operation of the manual paper feed
feed section can be monitored with the LCD.) (Purpose) tray paper size detector and the related circuit. (The op-
Section Paper transport eration of the manual paper feed tray paper size detec-
tor can be monitored with the LCD.)
Item Operation
Section Paper transport
Operation/ The operations of the sensors and detectors in the pa-
Procedure per feed section of the copier are displayed. Item Operation
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted. Operation/ The operations of the sensors and detectors in the
UCSS1 Copier upper tray paper size detection 1 Procedure manual paper feed section are displayed.
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
UCSS2 Copier upper tray paper size detection 2
MPLS1 Manual tray length detection 1
UCSS3 Copier upper tray paper size detection 3
MPLS2 Manual tray length det3ction 2
UCSS4 Copier upper tray paper size detection 4
MPLD1 Manual feed paper length detection 1
LUD1 Copier upper tray upper limit detection
MPLD2 Manual feed paper length detection 2
PED1 Copier upper tray paper detection
UCSPD1 Copier upper tray paper size detection ì A4/A3 Manual tray (width only) detection size
ï 11x Manual tray (width only) detection size
LCSS1 Copier lower tray paper size detection 1 ï
ï B5/B4 Manual tray (width only) detection size
LCSS2 Copier lower tray paper size detection 2 ï
One of ï 8.5x Manual tray (width only) detection size
LCSS3 Copier lower tray paper size detection 3 í
these is ï A5/A4R Manual tray (width only) detection size
LCSS4 Copier lower tray paper size detection 4
displayed.ï B5R Manual tray (width only) detection size
LUD2 Copier lower tray paper detection ï
ï POSTCARD Manual tray (width only) detection size
PED2 Copier lower tray paper detection ï
î EXTRA Manual tray (width only) detection size
LCSPD1 Copier lower tray paper size detection
MPLS1 Manual tray length detection 1
MPLS2 Manual tray length detection 2
MPLD1 Manual feed paper length detection 1
MPLD2 Manual feed paper length detection 2
MPED Manual tray paper empty detection
ì A4/A3 Manual tray (width only) detection size
ï 11x Manual tray (width only) detection size
ï
ï B5/B4 Manual tray (width only) detection size
ï
One of ï 8.5x Manual tray (width only) detection size
í 40 - 2
theseis ï A5/A4R Manual tray (width only) detection size
displayed.ï B5R Manual tray (width only) detection size
ï Purpose Adjustment
ï POSTCARD Manual tray (width only) detection size
ï Function Used to adjust the manual paper feed tray paper width
î EXTRA Manual tray (width only) detection size (Purpose) detector detection level.
Section Paper transport
Item Operation
Operation/ 1. Open the manual paper feed guide at maximum.
Procedure 2. Press the [MAX POSITION] key.
3. Press the [EXECUTE] key.
The[EXECUTE] key is highlighted then it returns to the normal dis-
play.
The manual paper feed guide max. width position detection level
is recognized.
4. Open the manual paper feed guide at minimum.
7 – 34 7/13/2000
5. Press the [MIN POSITION] key. Item Operation
6. Press the [EXECUTE] key. Operation/ 1. Press [1 NO ORIGINAL] key, open the document
The key is highlighted then it returns to the normal display. Procedure cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without a docu-
The manual paper feed guide min. position detection level is rec- ment on the document table. The sensor level set-
ognized. ting with no original on the table is performed.
If the above operation is not performed properly, the ERROR display (Normal case) The COMPLETE display is highlighted (for 1 sec),
is highlighted. then it returns to the normal display.
If performed properly, the above data is stored and the COMPLETE is
(Abnormal case) The INCOMPLETE display and the abnormal
highlighted.
sensor name are highlighted.
2. Set an A3 paper (11" x 17") and press the [EXECUTE] key. The
sensor level setting with original is performed.
(Normal case)
The COMPLETE display is highlighted (for 1 sec), then it re-
turns to the normal display. The "A3 ORIGINAL" display turns
to "NO ORIGINAL" .
(Abnormal case)
The INCOMPLETE display and the abnormal sensor names
are highlighted.
41
41 - 1
Purpose Operation test/check/Operation data output/Check (Dis-
play/Print)
Function Used to check the operation of the document size sen-
(Purpose) sor and the related circuit. (The operation of the docu-
ment size sensor can be monitored with the LCD.)
Section Others
Item Operation
Operation/ The operations of the sensors and detectors in the
Procedure document size detection section are displayed.
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
OCSW Document Normal display: Highlighted display:
cover state Open Close
PD* Document Normal display: Highlighted display:
sensor Document empty Document exist
AB series
41 - 3
Purpose Operation test/check
Function Used to check the operation of the document size sen-
(Purpose) sor and the related circuit. (The document size sensor
output level can be monitored with the LCD.)
Section Others
Item Operation
Operation/ The detection output level of each sensor is displayed
Procedure in real time.
Inch series
OCSW Document cover state
PD* Document sensor
* The value in [ ] shown at the right of each sensor name is the
threshold value.
41 - 2
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjsut the document size sensor detection
(Purpose) level.
Section Others
7/13/2000 7 – 35
43 43 - 3
Function Used to adjust the fusing motor speed.
43 - 1 (Purpose) (AR-501/505/ 507)
Purpose Setting Operation/ When this simulation is executed, the current set value
Procedure is displayed. Under this state, the set value can be
Function Used to set the fusing temperature in each operation changed by pressing the 10-key. When [OK] key is
(Purpose) mode. pressed, the set value is stored in the EEPROM.
Section Fixing (Fusing) Adjustment value 70 100 130
Item Operation Speed 97% 100% 103%
Operation/ 1. Select the kind of lamps and the operation mode An increase in the adjustment value by 1 corresponds to an increase
Procedure with [], [¯] keys. in the speed by 0.1%
A decrease in the adjustment value by 1 corresponds to a decrease
2. Enter the set value with the 10-key.
in the speed by 0.1%
3. Press the [OK] key to set the fusing temperature set in procedure
2.
Used to set the fusing temperature in the normal mode and in the
power save mode.
A: INSIDE NORMAL;
The control temperature in the normal mode and when the
center lamp is heated. (190) (AR-501/505/507 (200))
B: OUTSIDE NORMAL;
The control temperature in the power save mode (pre-heat
mode) and the side lamps are heated. (190) (AR-501/505/507
(200))
43 - 8
C: INSIDE PREHEAT;
The control temperature in the manual copy mode when the Function Used to set the time to rotate the fusing motor after
center lamp is heated. (*1) (Purpose) reaching the set temperature in warming up.
D: OUTSIDE PREHEAT; (AR-501/505/507)
Operation/ When this simulation is executed, the current set value
The control temperature in the manual copy mode when the
Procedure is displayed. Under this state, the set value can be
side lamps are heated. (*2)
changed by pressing the 10-key. When [OK] key is
E: INSIDE MFT;
pressed, the set value is stored in the EEPROM.
The control temperature in the manual copy mode when the
Set range: 10 – 120 sec
center lamp is heated. (200)
Default: 30 sec
F: OUTSIDE MFT;
The control temperature in the manual copy mode when the
side lamps are heated. (200)
( ): Default
Pre-heat mode fusing temperature set value
MODEL
Destination AR-230/250/
AR-330/335/ AR-405/407/
280/281/285/
336/337 501/505/507
286/287
U.S.A. (Inch) 125 130 140
Canada (Inch) 125 130 140
Other (Inch) 125 130 140
44
Japan 130 130 140
Other (AB) 125 130 140 44 - 1
Europe (AB) 110 130 140 Purpose Setting
U.K. (AB) 110 130 140
Function Used to set whether the correction functions of the im-
Aus. (AB) 110 130 140 (Purpose) age forming (process) section are valid or not.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)
Item Operation
Operation/ Enter the code number corresponding to each correc-
Procedure tion operation with the 10-key and press the OK key.
To enable all the correction functions, set to 3.
(Note) The default setting must be 3.
Developing bias voltage OPC drum sensitivity
Set value
Note Be sure to set to the default value. If not, a trouble may correction limit correction
occur. 0 Disable Disable
1 Disable Enable
2 Enable Disable
3 Enable Enable
7 – 36 7/13/2000
44 - 4
Purpose Setting
Function Used to set the target image (reference) density level in
(Purpose) the developing bias voltage correction.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Developping/Transfer/
Cleaning)
Item Data Adjust/Setting data
Operation/ 1. Enter the set value (38) with the 10-key.
Note (Note) It must be set to the default 3. Procedure 2. Press the [OK] key. (The value entered in procedure
1 is set.)
44 - 2 Set value: 36 (AR-501/505/507), 38 (Other models)
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjust the sensitivity (gain) of the OPC drum
(Purpose) mark sensor and the image density sensor.
Section Image process Photo conductor
(Photoconductor/
Developping/Transfer/
Cleaning)
Item Operation
Operation/ When the [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted Note It must be set to 36 for AR-501/505 or 38 for other
Procedure and the main motor rotates to start the drum marking models.
sensor and the image density sensor gain adjustment.
(The adjustment is automatically performed.) 44 - 5
After completion of the adjustment, the [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display and the main motor stops. Purpose Setting
At that time, the gain level of each sensor is displayed. Function Used to set various parameters (main charger grid volt-
If the adjustment is not completed properly, the ERROR display is (Purpose) age, laser beam power, correction start developing bias
shown. voltage) in developing bias correction.
DMLED: Drum marking sensor gain adjustment value Section Image process (Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)
PCLED: Image density sensor gain adjustment value
Item Operation
DRUM: Kinds of drums
0: Others Operation/ 1. Select the parameter mode with [], [¯] keys.
1: AR330DR/AR336DR/AR336DM/ARdR23; 10mm Procedure 2. Enter the parameter with the 10-key.
2: AR330DM/ARDR17; 3 x 4 x 3mm 3. Press the [OK] key. (The value entered in procedure 2 is set.)
3: AR400DR/AR400DM; 15mm
GRID BIAS VOL: Reference charging voltage level in patch
5: AR500DR/AR500DM/ARDR25; 5mm
forming (AR-501/505/507; 360), other
As other models except AR-501/505/507 do not
models; 380) (Set value)
recognize 5mm marking, "0" is displayed at that
time. DEVE BIAS VOL : Reference developing bias voltage level in
patch forming (210) (Set value)
(AR-405/407/501/505/507)
LASER DUTY: Laser duty level in patch forming (255)
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337)
Note Be sure to set to the specified value. If not, the print im-
age density may be disturbed.
44 - 9
Purpose Operation data output/Check (Display/Print)
Function Used to check the data on the result of the image form-
(Purpose) ing section correction (process correction) (the cor-
rected main charger grid voltage in each print mode,
developing bias voltage, the laser power, etc.)
(This simulation allows to check whether the correction
is executed properly or not.)
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Developping/Transfer/
Cleaning)
7/13/2000 7 – 37
Item Data Operation data (AR-501/505/507)
(Machine condition) DRUM ROTATION: Drum rotating time (sec)
Operation/ Used to display the drum rotating time and the high DEVE MIXING TIME: Developer rotating time (sec)
Procedure voltage output in each copy mode and the laser power DEVE RFERENCE ADJUST A: Toner concentration correction
correction power. amount
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337/405/407) DEVE RFERENCE ADJUST B: Toner concentration correction
DRUM ROTATION: Drum rotating time (sec) amount
DEVE RFERENCE ADJUST: Toner concentration correction DRUM: Drum identification result
amount 0: Others
DRUM: Drum identification result 1: AR330DR/AR336DR/AR336DM/ARdR23; 10mm
0: Others 2: AR330DM/ARDR17; 3 x 4 x 3mm
1: AR330DR/AR336DR/AR336DM/ARdR23; 10mm 3: AR400DR/AR400DM; 15mm
2: AR330DM/ARDR17; 3 x 4 x 3mm 5: AR500DR/AR500DM/ARDR25; 5mm
3: AR400DR/AR400DM; 15mm As other models except AR-501/505 do not
5: AR500DR/AR500DM/ARDR25; 5mm recognize 5mm marking, "0" is displayed at that
As other models except AR-501/505 do not time.
recognize 5mm marking, "0" is displayed at that GR_BS: Main charger grid voltage level (*1)
time. DV_BS: Developing bias voltage level (*1)
GR_BS: Main charger grid voltage level (*1) (Display) *1 : Sim 8-1, 8-2 Set voltage/actual output
DV_BS: Developing bias voltage level (*1) voltage (including corrected amount)
(Display) *1 : Sim 8-1, 8-2 Set voltage/actual output LD_AD: Laser power correction power display (mW)
voltage (including corrected amount) AUTO: Auto mode
LD_AD: Laser power correction power display (mW) CHARA: Character mode
AUTO: Auto mode CHARA_P: Character/photo mode
CHARA: Character mode PHOTO: Photo mode
CHARA_P: Character/photo mode PRT: Printer mode
PHOTO: Photo mode
PRT: Printer mode
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337)
44 - 12
(AR-405/407) Purpose Operation data output/Check (Display/Print)
Function Used to check the toner image patch density date in
(Purpose) correction operation of the image forming section. (This
simulation allows to check whether the correction is
executed properly or not. )
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Developping/Transfer/
Cleaning)
Item Data Operation data
(Machine condition)
Operation/ The latest developing bias correction data is displayed.
Procedure The sensor detection level (density) in the toner image
patch section/OPC drum base during the developing
bias corection is displayed.
DMLED: Drum marking sensor gain adjustment level
PCLED: Image density sensor gain adjustment level
DV_BS: The developing bias voltage level when forming
PT2/BS2 of ID (1)
PT1/BS1: No. 1 toner image patch section/Drum base sensor
detection level
7 – 38 7/13/2000
PT2/BS2: No. 2 toner image patch section/Drum base sensor
detection level
PT3/BS3: No. 3 toner image patch section/Drum base sensor
detection level
ID (n) : Sequence number of correction operation
(AR-205/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337/501/505/507)
Note Be sure to set to the specified value. If not, the print im-
age density may be disturbed.
46
(AR-405/407) 46 - 2
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode (bi-
(Purpose) nary/multi-value - auto, character and photo, photo
mode). (The overall print density in each mode (all of
the specified density set for each density level (display
value))can be adjusted in each mode.)
Item Picture quality Density
Operation/ 1. Select the print mode with [], [¯] keys.
Procedure (The set value is highlighted.)
7/13/2000 7 – 39
(AR-250/281/286/287/336/337/405/407 series) (AR-405/407)
Set with SIM 46-2.
Linked simulation data
Parameter to be changed
A AE3.0 (AE)
B CH3.0 (Character) Sim 46-9
C MIX3.0 (Character/Photo) Sim 46-10
PH3.0 (2) Sim 46-11 (Photo error
D
diffusion)
E PH3.0 (256) Sim 46-7
* For EX, the above value E is disabled. (AR-501/505/507)
(AR-501/505/507)
Set with SIM 46-2.
Linked simulation data 46 - 10
Parameter to be changed
A AE3.0 (AE) Purpose Adjustment
B CH3.0 (Character) Sim 46-9 Function Used to adjust the print density for each density level
C MIX3.0 (Character/Photo) Sim 46-10 (Purpose) (display value) in the copy mode (binary - character,
PH3.0 (2) Sim 46-11 (Photo error photo mode).
D
diffusion) An arbitrary print density can be set for each density
level (display value).
Item Picture quality
Operation/ 1. Select the print mode with [], [¯] keys.
Procedure (The set value is highlighted.)
2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.
3. Press the [OK] key or the PRINT button. (The value entered in
procedure 2 is set.)
When the PRINT button is pressed, copying is performed.
To customize the print density in each mode according to the user’s
request, use this simulation to adjust the print density.
46 - 9 (AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337)
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjust the print density for each density level
(Purpose) (display value) in the copy mode (binary - character
mode).
Item Picture quality Density
Operation/ 1. Select the density level with the density adjustment
Procedure key.
(The selected value is highlighted.)
2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key. (AR-407)
3. Press the ENTER key or the PRINT button. (The value entered in
procedure 2 is set.)
When the PRINT button is pressed, copying is performed.
To customize the print density for the density level display value ac-
cording to the user’s request, use this simulation.
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337)
7 – 40 7/13/2000
(AR-501/505/507)
46 - 18
46 - 11
Purpose Adjustment
Purpose Adjustment Function Used to adjust g (density gradient) in each copy mode.
Function Used to adjust the print density for each density level (Purpose) (AR-2X1/287/3X1/337/4XX/250/XX6/5XX series)
(Purpose) (display value) in the copy mode (binary - photo Item Picture quality Density
mode).
An arbitrary print density can be set for each density Operation/ 1. Select the print mode with [] key or [¯] key. (The
level (display value). Procedure display of the set value is highlighted.)
Item Picture quality Density 2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.
Operation/ 1. Select the print mode with [], [¯] keys. 3. Press the [OK] key or the [PRINT] key.
Procedure (The set value is highlighted.) The value entered in procedure 2 is set.
If the [PRINT] key is pressed, copying is performed.
2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.
With the following setting, the density gradient (g) can be changed.
3. Press the [OK] key or the PRINT button. (The value entered in
procedure 2 is set.) A: Auto exposure mode (Center 64, 0 ~ 127)
When the PRINT button is pressed, copying is performed. B: Character mode (Center 64, 0 ~ 127)
To customize the print density in each mode according to the user’s C: Character, Photo mode (Center 64, 0 ~ 127)
request, use this simulation to adjust the print density. D: Photo mode (Error diffusion) (Center 64, 0 ~ 127)
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337) (Note) The greater the value is, the greater the inclination is.
Default: 64
(AR-405/407/501/505/507)
46 - 19
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjust g (density gradient) and set the density
(Purpose) detection area in the auto copy mode and to set the im-
age process mode in the photo copy mode.
(AR-2X1/287/3X1/337/4XX/250/XX6/5XX series)
Item Picture quality Density
Operation/ 1. Select the desired mode with [] key or [¯] key.
46 - 17 Procedure (The display of the set value is highlighted.)
Purpose Setting/Operation data output/Check (Display/Print) 2. Enter the value with the 10-key.
3. Press the [OK] key or the [PRINT] key.
Function Used to execute shading correction and display the cor-
The value entered in procedure 2 is set.
(Purpose) rection value.
A: Auto exposure mode setting
Item Operation 1: Picture quality priority mode
Operation/ 1. Select the set item with [], [¯] keys. 2: Toner consumption priority mode
Procedure (The selected item is highlighted.) (Default: Japan = 1, EX = 2)
2. Press the [EXECUTE] key. B: Auto exposure (Density detection) mode setting
The shading correction is executed and the correction value is dis- 0: OFF (All surface density detection)
played. 1: ON (Image lead edge section density detection)
7/13/2000 7 – 41
(Default: 0) (AR-250/281/286/287/336/337/405/407 only)
48
C: Photo mode image process setting
1: Memory dither 8x8 mode
2: Memory dither 8x8 mode 48 - 1
3: Error diffusion photo mode
Purpose Adjustment
(Default: Japan = 1, EX = 3)
Function Used to adjust the copy magnification ratio (main scan-
(Note) Except for Japan, the above C is fixed to "3."
(Purpose) ning direction, sub scanning direction).
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337)
Section ICU
Item Picture quality
Operation/ 1. Select the adjustment mode with [], [¯] keys.
Procedure 2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.
3. Press the [OK] key.
The value entered in procedure 2 is set.
a. Sub scan direction magnification ratio --- (SCAN)
The horizontal print magnification ratio (in the paper transport
direction) of the image is adjusted by changing the scan
(AR-405/407/501/505/507)
speed in the paper transport direction.
b. Main scan direction magnification ratio --- (F-R)
The vertical print magnification ratio (front frame to near
frame) is adjusted in the image process section by the
software operation.
c. Sub scan direction magnification ratio adjustment value
(When SPF is used) --- (SPF)
(When RSPF is used) --- (RSPF (SIDE1))
The horizontal print magnification ratio (in the paper transport
direction) is adjusted by changing the document transport
speed.
46 - 20 d. Sub scan direction magnification ratio adjustment value
(When RSPF is used) --- (RSPF (SIDE2))
Purpose Adjustment The horizontal print magnification ratio (in the paper transport
Function Used to adjust the copy density correction in the SPF direction) is adjusted by changing the document transport
(Purpose) copy mode for the document table copy mode. Adjust- speed.
ment is made so that the copy density is the same as (When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ratio is
that in the document table copy mode. changed by about 0.1%.)
(AR-250/281/286/405/501/505/507 series) Default: 50
Item Picture quality Density (AR-501/505/507)
Operation/ 1. Select the print mode with [] key or [¯] key.
Procedure (The display of the set value is highlighted.)
2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.
3. Press the [OK] key or the [PRINT] key.
(The value entered in procedure 2 is set.)
A: OC/SPF exposure correction value
Set range: 0 ~ 100
Center value: 50
(Default: 60) (Other models: SPF installed)
(AR-501/505/507)
(Other models)
(AR-281/250/286/336/405)
7 – 42 7/13/2000
(IMAGE LOSS)
50 This set value (timing adjustment value) is used to determine the
lead edge image loss and the image lead edge reference position
50 - 1 by using the scan image lead edge position set with RRC-A.
Effective print data is determined from the image lead edge posi-
Purpose Adjustment tion data scanned with this set value.
Function Used to adjust the copy image position and the void The image lead edge reference position on the document is at
(Purpose) area (image loss) on the print paper in the copy mode. 2mm from the right of the document position alignment plate.
(The same adjustment can be made with SIM 50-2 The effective image (effective image data) is determined by scan-
(simple method).) ning the image.
Item Picture quality Image position When the set value is increased, the image loss becomes greater.
When the set value is changed by 1, the image loss is changed by
Operation/ 1. Select the adjustment item with [] [¯] keys.
about 0.1mm.
Procedure 2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.
(DEN-A)
3. Press the [OK] key. (The adjustment value entered in procedure 2 Used to set the timing for the RRC ON timing (paper timing) set
is set.) with EEC-B.
(RRC-A) RRC ON timing = (RRC-B) - Lead edge void set value (DEN-A)
This set value is used to align the document image lead edge ad When this adjustment value is changed, the print image position
the scan image data lead edge in the document table scan mode. for the paper position is changed. As a result, the lead edge void
After starting scanning, the image lead edge position is deter- area is also changed.
mined by using the scanner home position detection signal When the set value is increased, the RRC ON timing is advanced
(MHPS) OFF timing as the reference. and the lead edge void area becomes greater.
RRC-A set value = Time (distance) from the output of the scanner When the set value is changed by 1, the lead edge void area is
home position detection signal (MHPS OFF) to the image lead changed by about 0.1mm.
edge position. (DEN-B)
If this setting is not made properly, the image lead edge position The rear edge void area is adjusted by controlling the effective
(image loss) varies depending on the copy magnification ratio. print data length with the image lead edge signal (LD START sig-
When the set value is increased, the image position is shifted in nal) output from the ICU as the reference.
the advancing direction on the paper. The effective image (effective image data) is determined when
When the set value is changed by 1, the image lead edge position scanning the image.
is varied. When the set value is increased, the rear edge void area becomes
(SPF) great.
This set value is used to align the document image lead edge po- When the set value is changed by 1, the rear void area is changed
sition and the scan image data lead edge position in the SPF scan by about 0.1mm.
mode. (REAR LOSS (SPF))
After starting scanning, the scan image lead edge position is de- Used to adjust the rear edge image loss in the SPF copy mode.
termined by using the resist sensor detection signal (REGS ON)
The greater the set value is, the greater the rear edge image loss
timing as the reference.
is.
RRC-A set value = Time (distance) from the output (resist sensor
When the set value is changed by 1, the rear edge image loss is
detection signal (REGS ON) to the image lead edge position.
changed by about 1mm.
If this setting is not made properly, the image lead edge position
(image loss) on the copy paper may vary depending on the copy Adjust in the following sequence:
magnification ratio. 1) Set the image loss amount (IMAGE LOSS) and the paper lead
When the set value is increased, the image position is shifted in edge void amount (DEN-A) to arbitrary values (20).
the advancing direction of the copy paper. (0~99: 0.1mm/step)
When the set value is changed by 1, the image lead edge position 2) Adjust the document scan start position (RRC-A) so that the ac-
is changed by about 0.1mm. tual copy image loss becomes the value set in procedure 1. (0~99:
(RRC-B) 0.24mm/step) (0.29mm/step (AR-405 series))
This set value is used to adjust the relative positions of the image 3) Adjust the resist roller clutch ON timing (RRC-B) so that the actual
position on the OPC drum and the copy paper. copy image loss becomes the value set in procedure 1. (0~99:
This adjustment is made by adjusting the time from the output tim- 0.17mm/step)
ing of the image lead edge signal (LD START signal) to RRC ON.
4) In the SPF copy mode, adjust the SPF image position (SPF) to the
At the timing of LD START signal output, the print image is made
value set in procedure 1). (0~99, 0.1mm/step)
on the OPC drum at an optional position with the laser beam.
Actually the RRC ON timing is determined as follows: 5) Adjust the rear edge image loss (REAR LOSS (SPF)) in the SPF
RRC ON timing = This set value (RRC-B) - Lead edge void set copy mode. (0~20, 1mm/step) (AR-2X1/3X1/4XX/250/XX6 series
value (DEN-A) only)
When the set value is increased, the RRC ON timing is delayed, 6) Adjust the rear edge void amount (DEN-B). (0~99: 0.1mm/step)
decreasing the led edge void area. (AR-250/280/281/285/286/335/336)
When the set value is changed by 1, the lead edge void area is
changed by about 0.17mm (about 0.21mm for AR-4XX series;
about 0.24mm for AR-5XX series).
(Note)
The value of RRC-A must be properly set in advance to this ad-
justment.
7/13/2000 7 – 43
Item Picture quality Image position
Operation/ 1. Select the adjustment item with [], [¯] keys.
Procedure 2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.
3. Press the [OK] key. (The value entered in procedure 2 is set.)
IMAGE LOSS ü
ï
DEN-A ý Same as SIM 50-1
ï
DEN-B þ
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/335/336/405/501/505)
(AR-405/501/505) This simulation is used to automatically adjust the image loss, the
void area, and the image position by directly entering the paper lead
edge and the image shift (in the unit of 0.1mm) in 400% (200% for the
SPF) copy.
a. Distance (Document table mode 400%) up to the scale of 10mm
from the image lead edge a L3
b. Distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge ® L2
c. Distance from the image lead edge to the scale of 10mm (SPF
mode 200%) ® L3
* The measurement value is multiplied with 10 to enter.
(AR-287/337/407/507) With the above procedure, the values of RRC-A and RRC-B in SIM
50-1 are automatically calculated and set.By directly setting the val-
Descriptions on adjustment items
ues (actual dimensions [mm] x 10) of IMAGE LOSS, DEN-A and
A. Document scan start position adjustment value (RRC-A) DEN-B, the lead edge image loss, the lead edge void area, and the
Used to adjust the timing of outputting the image lead edge signal rear edge void area can be set.
(SCAN signal) after starting document scanning. (0 – 99: Refer-
By setting the image loss, DEN-A, DEN-B (actual dimension (mm) x
ence value 50)
10) and REAR LOSS (SPF) (actual dimension (mm)) directly, the lead
B. Resist roller clutch OFF timing adjustment value (RRC-B) edge image loss, the lead edge void area, the rear edge void area
Used to adjust the timing of turning ON the resist roller after re- and the rear edge image loss (SPF) can be set.
ception of the resist signal (LD_START). (0 – 99: Reference value
50) Adjustment
Code Adjustment item Note
value
C. Rear edge void quantity adjustment value (DEN-B) A L1 Distance between the When the image lead
Used to set the void quantity on the rear edge. (0- 99: Reference image lead edge edge position varied
value 30) position and the scale depending on the copy
D. Image loss quantity set value (IMAGE LOSS) of 10mm. magnification ratio,
change the set value.
Used to set the image loss quantity. (0 – 99: reference value 20)
B L2 Distance between the
E. Lead edge void quantity set value (DEN-A) paper lead edge and
Used to set the void quantity on the document lead edge. (0 – 99: the image lead edge.
Reference value 20) C L3 Distance between the When the image lead
Adjustment procedure image lead edge and edge position varied
the scale of 10mm depending on the copy
1. Set the image loss quantity (IMAGE LOSS) and the paper lead
(SPF mode). magnification ratio,
edge void quantity (DEN-A) to desired values. (0 – 99: change the set value.
0.1mm/step) D IMAGE Lead edge image loss 1.5 to The greater the set value
2. Adjust the document scan start position (RRC_A) so that the im- LOSS 3.0mm is, the greater the image
age loss quantity of an actual copy image becomes the set value loss is.
of procedure 1. (0 – 99: 0.29mm/step) E DEN-A Lead edge void area 1.5 to The greater the set value
3. Adjust the resist roller clutch ON timing (RRC_B) so that the lead 3.0mm is, the greater the void
area is.
edge void quantity of an actual copy image becomes the set value
F DEN-B Rear edge void area 1.5 to The greater the set value
of procedure 1. (0 – 99: 0.24mm/step)
3.0mm is, the greater the void
4. Adjust the rear edge void quantity (DEN_B). (0 – 99: 0.1mm/step) area is.
G REAR Rear edge image The greater the set value
LOSS loss (SPF mode) is, the greater the image
(SPF) loss is. (AR-250/281/286/
336/405 series only)
50 - 2
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjust the copy image position and the void
(Purpose) area (image loss) on the print paper in the copy mode.
(Simple adjustment)
(This simulation allows the same simulation with SIM
50-1 more simply. )
7 – 44 7/13/2000
Default: 50
(AR-287/337/407/507)
Used to adjust the lead edge by entering the lead edge shift on each
lead edge of 400% copy. 50 - 6
Descriptions on adjustment items
A. Distance from the image lead edge to 10mm of the scale (Platen Purpose Adjustment
400%) (L1) Function Used to adjust the copy lead edge. (RSPF)
B. Distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge (L2) (Purpose) (AR-501/505/507)
C. IMAGE LOSS Item Picture quality Print area
D. DEN-A Operation/ 1. Perform the 0C lead edge adjustment with SIM 60-
E. DEN-B Procedure 1/2. (To use the 0C lead edge void quantity.)
Adjustment procedures 2. Set the image loss quantity (LOSS (RSPF)) to a desired value. (0 -
1. Set the image loss quantity (IMAGE LOSS) and the paper lead 99: 0.1 mm/step)
edge void quantity (DEN-A) to desired values. (0 – 99: 3. Adjust the original scanning start position (RSPF (SIDE1)/RSPF
0.1mm/step) (SIDE2)) so that the actual copy image loss quantity is as speci-
2. Set L1/L2 to 0. fied in procedure 2. (0 - 99: 0.1 mm/step)
3. Make a 400% copy with OC, and enter the shift quantity to L1/L2. 4. Adjust the rear edge void quantity (DEN-B). (0 - 99: 0.1 mm/step)
(0 – 999: 0.1mm/step) 5. Adjust the rear edge image loss quantity (REAR LOSS (SPF))
4. Repeat procedure 3 so that the paper lead edge void quantity of when the SPF is used. (0 - 20 mm/step)
the actual copy image becomes the set value of procedure 1. There are five input items of the copy lead edge adjustment; LOSS
5. Adjust the rear edge void quantity (DEN_B). (0 – 99: 0.1mm/step) (RSPF), RSPF (SIDE1), RSPF (SIDE 2), DEN-B, and REAR LOSS
(RSPF). Select the desired item with [], [¯] keys to change the set
value.
1. Image loss quantity setup value (RSPF ) --- (LOSS (RSPF))
Used to adjust the output timing of the image lead edge signal
(SCAN signal) after starting scanning of the original. (0 - 99: Ref-
erence value 20)
2. Original front surface scanning start position adjustment value ---
(RSPF (SIDE1))
Used to set the time from the start of original feed to reaching at
the exposure position. ([Front surface] (0 - 99: Reference value
50)
3. Original back surface scanning start position adjustment value ---
(RSPF (SIDE2))
Used to set the time from the start of original feed to reaching at
the exposure position. [Back surface] (0 - 99: Reference value 50)
4. Rear edge void quantity adjustment value --- (DEN-B)
Used to set the void quantity made at the rear edge of the original
when the RSPF is used. (0 - 99: Reference value 30)
5. Rear edge image loss quantity setup value --- (REARL LOSS
(RSPF))
50 - 5 Used to set the image loss quantity at the rear edge when the
RSPF is used. (0 - 20: Reference value 0)
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjust the print image position (top margin) on
(Purpose) the print paper in the print mode.
Item Picture quality Print area
Operation/ 1. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.
Procedure 2. Press the [EXECUTE] key to set the adjustment
value entered in procedure 1.
When the set value is increased, the top margin is increased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the top margin is changed
by about 0.1mm.
7/13/2000 7 – 45
50 - 7 3. Press the [OK] key to set the adjustment value entered in proce-
dure 1.
Purpose Adjustment When the set value is increased, shift is made forward. When de-
creased, backward.
Function Used to adjust the copy lead edge (simple method).
When the set value is changed by 1, the shift is changed by about
(Purpose) (RSPF) (AR-501/505/507)
0.1mm.
Item Picture quality Print area
A, B, C, E, F, G, H : Default 50
Operation/ 1. Execute SIM 50-1/2 to adjust the 0C lead edge. (To D : Default 58
Procedure adjust the 0C lead edge void quantity.)
2. Set the image loss quantity (LOSS (RSPF)) to the
desired value. (0 - 99: 0.1 mm/step)
3. Set all of L4/l5/L6 to 0.
4. Make a 200% copy with the RSPF, and enter the shift quantity to
L4/L5/L6. (0 - 999: 0.1 mm/step)
5. Repeat procedure 4 until the paper rear edge void in an actual
copy image becomes the value set in procedure 2.
6. Adjust the rear edge image loss quantity (REAR LOSS (SPF))
when the SPF is used. (0 - 20: 1 mm/step)
There are five input items of the copy lead edge adjustment (simle
method); L4, L5, L6, LOSS (RSPF), and REAR LOSS.
Select the desired item with [], [¯] keys in the touch panel to change
the set value.
This simulation allows the lead edge adjustment by entering the lead
edge shift at 200% directly.
Adjustment
Code Adjustment item Note
value
A L4 Distance between When the image lead edge
the image lead position varied depending on
edge position and the copy magnification ratio,
the scale of change the set value. 50 - 12
10mm. (RSPF
mode) Purpose Adjustment
B L5 Distance between Function Used to adjust the print image center position. (Adjust-
the paper lead (Purpose) ment can be made for each document mode.)
edge and the
image lead edge. Section ICU
(RSPF mode) Item Picture quality Image position
C L6 Distance between When the image lead edge
the image lead position varied depending on Operation/ 1. Select the adjustment item (paper feed section) with
edge position of the copy magnification ratio, Procedure [], [¯] keys.
back surface and change the set value.
2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.
the scale of 10mm
(RSPF mode). 3. Press the [OK] key to set the adjustment value entered in proce-
D LOSS Lead edge image 1.5 to The greater the set value is, dure 1.
(RSPF) loss (RSPF mode) 3.0mm the greater the image loss is. When the set value is increased, shift is made forward. When
G REAR Rear edge image The greater the set value is, decreased, backward.
LOSS loss (RSPF mode) the greater the image loss is.
When the set value is changed by 1, the shift is changed by
(RSPF)
about 0.1mm.
Default: 50
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/335/336)
50 - 10
(AR-287/337/405/407)
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjust the print image center position. (Adjust-
(Purpose) ment can be made for each paper feed section.)
Section ICU
Item Picture quality Image position
Operation/ 1. Select the adjustment item (paper feed section) with
Procedure [], [¯] keys.
2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.
7 – 46 7/13/2000
(AR-501/505/507) Time interval from the resist roller clutch (RRC) ON timing to the OPC
drum separation pawl drive solenoid (PSPS) ON.
When the set value is increased, the timing is delayed. When the set
value is changed by 1, the timing is changed by about 1.0msec.
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337/405/407)
Default 310
50 - 26
Function Used to set the folding margin of center binding.
(Purpose)
(AR-501/505/507)
Operation/ When this simulation is executed, the current set value
Default: 283
Procedure is displayed.
Under this state, the set value can be changed with the
10-key.
When the OK key is pressed, the currently set value is
stored in the EEPROM.
(1 step: 0.1mm)
Item Content Range Default
Clear quantity of the folding section of center
A 0 ~ 99 20
binding left image (when the OC is used)
Clear quantity of the folding section of center
B 0 ~ 99 30
binding right image (when the OC is used)
Clear quantity of the folding section of center
C
binding left image (when the RSPF is used)
0 ~ 99 0 51 - 2
Clear quantity of the folding section of center
D 0 ~ 99 0 Purpose Adjustment
binding right image (when the RSPF is used)
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337/405/407) Function Used to adjust the contact pressure of paper onto the
(Purpose) resist roller in each section (copier paper feed section,
duplex paper feed section, SPF paper feed section).
(When the print image position varies greatly for the pa-
per or when a lot of paper jam troubles occur, the ad-
justment is required.)
Section Paper transport (Discharge/Switchback/Transport)
Item Operation
Operation/ 1. Select the adjustment mode with [], [¯] keys.
Procedure 2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.
(AR-501/505/507) 3. Press the [OK] key. (The value entered in procedure 2 is set.)
Used to set the TRCA OFF timing.
When the set value is increased, the timing is delayed and the paper
pressure onto the resist roller is increased. When the set value is
changed by 1, the timing is changed by about 1.0msec.
TRAY Copier and desk paper feed high speed
transport resist amount adjustment (45) (Default)
MANUAL Manual paper feed resist amount adjustment
(31) (Default)
LCC LCC paper feed high speed transport resist
amount adjustment (45) (Default)
ADU ADU paper feed resist amount adjustment (30)
51 (Default)
TRAY LOW Copier and desk feed low transport resist
amount adjustment (35) (Default)
51 - 1 LCC LOW LCC paper feed low transport resist amount
Purpose Adjustment adjustment (45) (Default)
SPF SPF paper feed resist amount adjustment (50)
Function Used to adjust the OPC drum separation pawl ON tim- (Default)
(Purpose) ing. RSPF (SIDE1) RSPF (SIDE1) paper feed resist amount
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Developping/Transfer/ adjustment
Cleaning) RSPF (SIDE2) RSPF (SIDE2) paper feed resist amount
Item Operation adjustment
Operation/ 1. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.
Procedure 2. Press the [OK] key. (The value entered in procedure
1 is set.)
7/13/2000 7 – 47
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337) 51 - 3
Purpose Setting
Function Used to set the clutch OFF time. (AR-507 Europe and
(Purpose) U.K. only)
Item Operation
Operation/ When this simulation is executed, the current set value
Procedure is displayed.
At that time, the set value can be changed with [] key and [¯] key.
When [], [¯], and [OK] keys are pressed, the current set value is
stored in the EEPROM.
Destination Default
Europe 80
TRC2
U.K. 80
Europe 60
TRC1H
U.K. 60
(Europe/U.K.)
(AR-405/407)
51 - 8
Purpose Setting
Function Used to set Enable/Disable of the drum separation
(Purpose) pawl drive solenoid (PSPS) operation for each paper
feed section (Manual paper feed, cassette 1, cassette
2, duplex module, desk cassette 1, desk cassette 2,
desk cassette 3, LCC) (AR-501/505/507)
Section Image process
7 – 48 7/13/2000
53
53 - 1
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjust the document stop position in each op-
(Purpose) eration mode of ADF/RADF.
(Target model: AR-250/280/285/335/405/407)
Section ADF/RADF
Item Operation
52 Operation/ 1. Select the adjustment mode with [], [¯] keys.
Procedure 2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.
52 - 1 3. Press the [OK] key.
Purpose Adjustment The value entered in procedure 2 is set.
This is used to set the document transport belt stop timing.
Function Used to adjust the duplex print mode stacking capabil-
(Purpose) ity. (Used to adjust the stop position of the paper tray NORMAL(S) Normal paper front surface, stop position
width direction alignment plate in the duplex unit. The adjustment value
adjustment is executed by changing the width direction NORMAL(D) Normal paper back surface, stop position
alignment plate home position in the software.) adjustment value
Section Duplex THIN (S) Thin paper front surface, stop position
Item Operation adjustment value
THIN (D) Thin paper back surface, stop position
Operation/ 1. Select mode B with [], [¯] keys.
adjustment value
Procedure 2. Select the paper feed mode with the 10-key.
Relations between the adjustment value and the document stop
3. Press the [EXECUTE] key. position (Varies depending on machines.)
4. Select mode A with [], [¯] keys. 08: ±0.000mm 00: - 8.000mm 09: + 1.000mm
5. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key. 01: - 7.000mm 10: + 2.000mm
6. Press the [EXECUTE] key. 02: - 6.000mm 11: + 3.000mm
If there is no paper on the duplex tray, paper feed is performed in the 03: - 5.000mm 12: + 4.000mm
paper feed mode selected in mode B and one sheet of paper is trans- 04: - 4.000mm 13: + 5.000mm
ported to the duplex tray. Then the value set in procedure 5 is set and
05: - 3.000mm 14: + 6.000mm
the alignment plate is operated according to the home position corre-
06: - 2.000mm 15: + 7.000mm
sponding to the set value.
When the set value is changed by "1", it is changed by about 0.2mm. 07: - 1.000mm
When the set value is increased, the alignment plate paper width is Default: 8
decreased. The set value is in the range of ±50 with 50 at the center.
Set item A: Alignment plate adjustment value (Default: 50)
B: Paper feed mode selection
1 : Manual
2: Upper cassette
3: Lower cassette
4: Desk top cassette
5: Desk middle cassette
6: Desk bottom cassette
7: LCC
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337/405/407) 53 - 2
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjust the optical sensor sensitivity in the
(Purpose) ADF/RADF/RSPF.
Section ADF/RADF/RSPF
Item Operation
Operation/ 1. The sensor names are displayed. Select the sensor
Procedure to be adjusted with the key.
(AR-501/505/507) 2. Press the [EXECUTE] key.
The adjustment of the sensor selected in procedure 1 is
started. During execution of the adjustment, the [EXECUTE]
key is highlighted. If the [EXECUTE] key is pressed under this
state, the adjustment can be interrupted.
After completion of the adjustment, the COMPLETE display is shown.
7/13/2000 7 – 49
(When AR-AF1/RF1 is installed) 53 - 6
REGIST (DFD) Resist sensor
Purpose Adjustment
TIMING (DTD) Timing sensor
Function Used to adjust the RSPF width detection level.
REVERSE (RDD) Paper exit/reverse sensor
(Purpose) (AR-501/505/507 only)
(AR-AF1)
Section Image process
Item Operation
Operation/ 1. Press "TRY VR (MIN)" key (touch panel) in Fig. 2 to
Procedure close the RSPF tray guide to the minimum. Then
Press the EXECUTE key to start the adjustment.
During the adjustment, the EXECUTE key is high-
lighted. When the EXECUTE key is pressed under
this state, the adjustment is interrupted.
When two or more operations are selected, the item which is dis-
(AR-RF1) played at the top is performed and the other items are canceled.
The canceled items are returned to the normal display.
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is dis-
played with the adjustment item remained highlighted.
(Normal end)
The menu of Fig. 4 is displayed for 3 sec, then the menu of Fig. 5 is
displayed to complete the adjustment procedure.
The adjustment result data is displayed with numerical figures.
(Abnormal end)
The menu of Fig. 6 is displayed. IN this case, check the tray guide po-
sition again, and press the EXECUTE key to perform the sensor ad-
justment again.
2. Press "TRAY VR (MAX)" key (touch panel) to open the RSPF tray
guide to the maximum.
Then press the EXECUTE key to start the adjustment. During the
adjustment, the EXECUTE key is highlighted. When the EXE-
CUTE key is pressed under this state, the adjustment is inter-
rupted.
When two or more operations are selected, the item which is dis-
(When RSPF is installed) played at the top is performed and the other items are canceled.
The canceled items are returned to the normal display.
SEPARATE (SUNRIS) Post-separation sensor
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is dis-
READ (RDS) Read sensor played with the adjustment item remained highlighted.
SWITCH (SBS) Switch-back sensor
7 – 50 7/13/2000
60
60 - 1
Purpose Operation test/check
Function Used to check the operation (read/write) of ICU
(Purpose) (DRAM). (SIMM MEMORY/ONBOARD MEMORY)
Section ICU
Item Operation
Operation/ 1. Press the [EXECUTE] key to check the read/write
Procedure operations.
2. After completion of the read/write operation check, the check re-
sult is displayed with OK or NG.
(AR-281/250/286/336)
Set all to "7" except for PH256.
61
61 - 1
(AR-287/337)
Purpose Operation test/check
All must be set to "8".
Function Used to test the operation of the scanner (exposure)
(Purpose) unit.
Section Laser (Exposure)
Item Operation
Operation/ 1. Press the [EXECUTE] key
Procedure The scanner unit is started.
2. After completion of check operation, the result is displayed with
OK or NG.
Used to check whether the sync signal (HSYNC/) is normally out- (AR-405)
putted or not by operating the laser (exposure) unit (laser motor Set all to "5" except for PH256.
rotation, laser emission).
(AR-407)
All must be set to "6".
61 - 2
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjust the scanner (exposure) laser power (ab-
(Purpose) solute value) in the copy mode.
Section Laser (Exposure)
Item Operation
Operation/ (AR-230/280/285/335 series)
Procedure All must be set to "16."
7/13/2000 7 – 51
(AR-501/505) (AR-407)
All must be set to "5." Set default value 6.
(AR-507) (AR-405/501/505)
All must be set to "5." Set all the values to the default value 5.
(AR-507)
Set default value 5.
61 - 4
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjust the scanner (exposure) laser power (ab-
(Purpose) solute value) in the printer mode. (For Photoconductor
type B)
Section Laser (Exposure)
Item Operation
Operation/ (AR-280/285/335)
Procedure Set all the values to the default value 16.
62
62 - 1
Purpose Setting/Data clear
Function Used to format the hard disk. (Models with the hard
(Purpose) disk installed only)
Section Memory
(AR-281/286/336)
Set all the values to the default value 7. Item Others
Operation/ 1. Press the [EXECUTE] key.
Procedure The display for reconfirmation to clear or not is
shown.
2. Select YES/NO to format.
YES: Formatting is performed.
NO: Formatting is not performed.
3. Press YES.
Formatting is performed. After completion, the result is shown with
END.
(AR-287/337) This procedure is necessary when the hard disk is replaced.
Set default value 8. If NG is displayed, it means a hard disk trouble.
7 – 52 7/13/2000
62 - 2 (AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337)
(AR-405/407)
62 - 3
Purpose Operation test/check
Function Used to check the operation (read/write) of the hard
(Purpose) disk. (Only the models with a hard disk) (All area check)
Section Memory
Item Operation
Operation/ 1. Press the [EXECUTE] key to start the read/write op-
Procedure eration check.
2. After completion of the read/write operation check, the result is
displayed with OK or NG.
If NG is displayed, it means a hard disk trouble.
(AR-501/505/507)
63
63 - 1
Purpose Operation data output/Check (Display/Print)
Function Used to check the result of shading correction. (The
(Purpose) shading correction data are displayed.)
Section Scanner (Exposure)
Item Operation
Operation/ Used to display the result of latest shading correction.
Procedure The displayed page can be shifted with [], [¯] keys. 63 - 7
ODD/EVEN OFFSET: Difference between the average detection Purpose Adjustment
level and the max. detection level
Function Used to adjust the white plate scanning start position in
BLACK OFFSET: Dark component (average level)
(Purpose) the shading white correction. (AR-501/505/507 only)
Section Scanner
Item Operation
7/13/2000 7 – 53
Operation/ 1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set *1: In AR-250/281/286/287/336/337/405/407, only Japan specification
Procedure value is displayed. model allows density change.
At that time, the set value can be changed with the *2: In AR-250/281/286/287/336/337/405/407 series, only Japan speci-
10-key. fication model works.
2. When the OK key is pressed, the currently set value is stored in *3: AR-250/281/286/337/405/407 cannot work.
the EEPROM. *4: AR-501/505/507 cannot work.
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337)
64
64 - 1
Purpose Operation test/check
Function Used to check the operation of the printer function
(Purpose) (auto print operation). (Print pattern, paper feed mode,
print mode, the number of sheets, and the density can
be set to an arbitrary value.) (AR-405/407)
Section Printer
Item Operation
Operation/ 1. Select the item with [], [¯] keys.
Procedure 2. Enter the print conditions with the 10-key. (There are
29 kinds of print patterns.)
3. Press the [EXECUTE] Key.
Printing is executed under the condition set with procedure 2.
A: Self print pattern -------- 1.ALL 1BY1(V)
B: Density level 2.ALL 1BY1(H)
C: Self print number 3.ALL 1BY2(V)
setting
D: Picture quality mode 4.ALL 1BY2(H)
1: Auto 5.ALL 1BY3(V)
2: Character 6.ALL 1BY3(H)
3: Character/Photo 7.ALL 1BY4(V)
4: Photo 8.ALL 1BY4(H)
E: Paper feed source 9.ALL 1BY5(V)
select
1: Manual 10.ALL 1BY5(H) (AR-501/505/507)
2: Upper cassette 11.ALL 2BY2(V)
3: Lower cassette 12.ALL 2BY2(H)
4: Desk top cassette 13.ALL 2BY3(V)
5: Desk middle cassette 14.ALL 2BY3(H)
6: Desk bottom cassette 15.BLACK *1 *5
7: LCC 16.GRAY SCALE 120/4(V) *3 *4
F: Duplex print select 17.GRAY SCALE 120/4(H)
*2 *4
0: Single 18.GRAY SCALE 250/8(V) *2
1: Duplex 19.GRAY SCALE 250/8(H) *2
20.DOT PATTERN 250/2(V) *1
21.GRAY SCALE 250/2(H) *3 *4
22.SQUARE
23.SLANT 45
24.SLANT 26.6
25.SLANT 63.4
26.ID/BG
27.DOT PATTERN 12.5%
28.DOT PATTERN 25%
29.DOT PATTERN 50%
30.SMOOTHING CHECK
PATTERN
7 – 54 7/13/2000
65 67
65 - 1 67 - 1
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Operation test/check
Function Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display) detecting Function Used to check the printer PWB memory operation
(Purpose) position. (Purpose) (read/write). (When replacing the PWB with a new one,
Section Operation (Display/Operation key) this check must be performed.)
Section Printer
Operation/ Touch the four cross marks.
Procedure The coordinates at the pressed point are set. Item Data
When the coordinates are properly set, the display turns to gray and Operation/ 1. When SIM 67-1 menu is displayed, the operation
returns to the simulation sub code entry screen. Procedure check of all memory (DRAM, SIMM1, SIMM2) of the
In case of an abnormality, it returns to the input display. printer section is started.
2. For the RAM the operation check of which is started, "--------" dis-
play is changed to "CHECKING." When checking is completed,
the check result is displayed with "OK" or "NG."
When SIMM is inserted, the memory capacity is also displayed as
"OK(16MB)."
65 - 2
Purpose Operation data output/Check (Display/Print)
Function Used to check the result of the touch panel (LCD dis-
(Purpose) play) detecting position adjustment. (The coordinates
are displayed.)
Section Operation (Display/Operation key)
Operation/ When the touch panel is pressed, the AD value in each
Procedure of X and Y directions at that point and the coordinate 67 - 2
values are displayed in ( ) as well as the coordinate val-
ues of each point. Purpose Operation test/check
It is based on the coordinates set with SIM 65-1.
Function Used to check the printer parallel I/F operation. (This
(Purpose) simulation is used only for production, and a special
tool is required. Not available in the market.)
Section Printer
Item Operation Interface/Communication
Operation/
Procedure
7/13/2000 7 – 55
67 - 3 (AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337/501/505/507)
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjust the printer parallel I/F ACk signal width.
(Purpose)
Section Printer
Item Operation Interface/Communication
Operation/ 1. Enter the ACK signal width of parallel I/F with the 10-
Procedure key.
* Set range: 0 ~ 255 (*50ns) (AR-405/407)
Default: 90 (AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/
335/336/337)
Default: 10 (AR-405/407/501/505/507)
2. When the [OK] key is pressed, the value set in procedure 1) is set.
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337)
67 - 12
Purpose Data transfer/Copy
Function Used to write data into the printer flash memory.
(AR-405/407/501/505/507) (Purpose)
Section Printer
Item Picture quality
Operation/ 1. With the power OFF, change the printer PWB
Procedure jumper connection to allow writing into the flash
memory.
2. Enter SIM 67-12 mode, and wait until "--------" display is changed
to "READY."
3. Send data from PC.
(AR-501/505/507) 1) The display of the item to be rewritten is changed in the se-
quence of "RECEIVE," "SUM," "ERASE," "BLANK," and
"WRITE" and rewriting is performed.
2) The result of rewriting is displayed with "OK" or "NG."
(Note) In case of an error, "ERROR!!! Exit sub Menu" is
displayed.
In that case, press the interrupt key to exit from SIM
67-12 mode. If the machine still waits for date from
PC, stop data sending.
4. Change the jumper connection of the printer PWB again to disable
writing to the flash memory.
67 - 11
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to set YES/NO of the printer parallel I/F SELECT
(Purpose) IN signal.
Section Printer
Item Operation Interface/Communication
Operation/ 1. Set ON/OFF of the SELECT IN signal ON/OFF of
Procedure parallel I/F with the 10-key.
* Set range: 0 – 1 (0: ON, 1: OFF)
Default: 0 (AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337
/501/505/507)
Default: 1 (AR-405/407)
2. When the [ON] key is pressed, the set value set in procedure 1) is
set.
7 – 56 7/13/2000
67 - 13 67 - 15
Purpose Data transfer/Copy Purpose Operation test/check
Function Used to check the printer flash memory data. Function Used to check the sum of the printer flash memory.
(Purpose) (Purpose)
Section Printer Section Printer
Item Data Program Item Data Program
Operation/ 1. Enter SIM 67-13 mode and wait until "--------" display Operation/ 1. When the simulation is executed, flash memory sum
Procedure is changed to "READY." Procedure check is started.
2. Send data from PC. 2. For all the items to be checked, "--------" is changed to "CHECK-
1) The display of the item to be rewritten is changed in the se- ING." When checking is completed, the sum check result is dis-
quence of "RECEIVE," "SUM," "VERIFY" and checking is played with "OK" or "NG."
performed. (In case of "NG" with PS KANJI font, the sum number is also dis-
played as "SUM2 NG" because there are four sums.
2) The result of checking is displayed with "OK" or "NG."
Since no KANJI font is available for ARPB2 (for EX), "PS KANJI
(Note) In case of an error, "ERROR!!! Exit sub Menu" is
displayed. FONT" and "ESC/P KANJI FONT" are terminated with "--------."
In that case, press the interrupt key to exit from SIM
67-13 mode. If the machine still waits for date from
PC, stop data sending.
67 - 16
Purpose Operation test/check
67 - 14 Function Used to check the operation of the network card.
(Purpose)
Purpose Data transfer/Copy Section Printer
Function Used to check the printer flash memory data writing Item Operation Interface/Communication
(Purpose) and its result.
Operation/ 1. When SIM 67-16 menu is displayed, the operation
Section Printer Procedure check of the network card of the printer section is
Item Data Program started.
Operation/ 1. With the power OFF, change the printer PWB 2. When checking is completed, the result is displayed with "OK" or
Procedure jumper connection to allow writing into the flash "NG."
memory.
2. Enter SIM 67-14 mode, and wait until "--------" display is changed
to "READY."
3. Send data from PC.
1) The display of the item to be rewritten is changed in the se-
quence of "RECEIVE," "SUM," "ERASE," "BLANK," and
"WRITE" and rewriting is performed.
2) The result of rewriting is displayed with "OK" or "NG."
(Note) In case of an error, "ERROR!!! Exit sub Menu" is
displayed.
In that case, press the interrupt key to exit from SIM
67-14 mode. If the machine still waits for date from
PC, stop data sending.
4. Change the jumper connection of the printer PWB again to disable
writing to the flash memory.
7/13/2000 7 – 57
67 - 17
Purpose Data clear
Function Used to clear data in the NVRAM of the printer PWB
(Purpose) (set to the default). (Printer set data)
Section Printer
Item Data
Operation/ 1. To clear set data of the printer section, press the
Procedure [EXECUTE] key. Note Japan only
2. Confirmation is displayed whether to clear NVRAM or not.
YES: Clear
NO: Not clear 69
3. During execution of clearing NVRAM, "NOW DOING..." is dis-
played. 69 - 1
(AR-287/337)
Purpose Check
(AR-250/280/281/285/286/335/336/405/407/501/505/507 series)
Function Used to check the input/output by connecting channels
(Purpose) A and B of SCSI with the SCSI cable.
Section Interface
Item Operation
Operation/ 1. When the EXECUTE key is pressed, the SCSI in-
Procedure put/output check is performed.
2. After checking the SCSI input/output, the results are shown as
shown in Fig. 3 and Fig. 4.
67 - 18
Purpose Data clear
Function Used to clear the application data area of the Network
(Purpose) Scanner of the Flash ROM. (AR-287/337/407/507)
Item Memory
Operation/ 1. To clear data, press the [EXECUTE] key.
Procedure Clear area: 0x8f060000/0x8f07ffff
2. The confirmation menu is displayed to confirm whether the AR-
NS1 area data in the Flash ROM are cleared or not.
[YES] key: Clear
[NO] key: Not clear
3. During clearing data, "NOW DOING . . ." is displayed.
[No key entry is accepted during clearing.]
4. After normal completion, "END" is outputted. In case of any
trouble, "NG" is outputted.
[When the CA key is pressed, reset is performed.]
7 – 58 7/13/2000
[8] DISASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY, MAINTENANCE
1 Maintenance table
A. AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337 ✕ Check (Check, clean, replace or adjust according to necessity.)
❍ Cleaning ▲ Change D Adjustment ✩ Lubrication ❏ Installing position change
Unit/Option name Part name Call 80K 160K 240K 320K Remark
Drum section OPC Drum Drum ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ To be factory attached
Drum Cleaner Blade ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Drum mark sensor ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Drum destiny sensor ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Drum separation pawl Change the installing position at every 80
▲❏ ▲ ▲❏ ▲
K
Toner reception seal ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Toner reception auxiliary blade ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
TC / AC Charger wire (❍) ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Charger case ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Discharge Lamp Discharge Lamp ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Main charger Charging plate (Saw blade) ❍ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Screen grid (❍) ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Developing section Developer Box DV seal ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
DSD collar ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
DV side seal F ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
DV side seal R ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
Developer Developer ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ To be charged at the time of installation
Toner cartridge Toner cartridge To be charged at the time of installation /
To be replaced by user about 17.5 K
Waste toner bottle Waste toner bottle ✕ To be replaced by user about every 40 K
Optical section Mirror base unit Mirror ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Pulley ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Copy lamp unit Refractor ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Mirror ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Rail Rail ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Glass Table glass ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Dust proof glass ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
White reference glass ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Scanner Lens ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Sensors ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Drive belt ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Drive wire ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
OC OC ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Paper feed section Manual feed tray Rollers (❍) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 1]
Torque limitor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 1]
Paper tray Rollers (❍) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 1]
Brake spring ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Torque limitor ✕ ✕ ❍✩ ✕ ❍✩
Transport section Transport Transport rollers (❍) ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Resist roller (❍) ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Suction Suction belt (❍) ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Fusing section Fusing unit 1 Upper heat roller (❍) ✕ (❍) ✕ ▲ (❍) ✕ ▲
Lower heat roller (❍) ✕ (❍) ✕ ▲ (❍) ✕ ▲
Upper separation pawl (❍) ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Lower separation pawl (❍) ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Insulation bush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Fusing unit 2 Thermistor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Upper heat roller gear ✩ ▲ ✩ ▲
Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Paper exit section 2 Tray paper exit unit Paper exit follower roller ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Transport rollers (❍) ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Drive section Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ (Specified positions)
Belts ✕
Filters ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Print Quality ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
[Note 1] Rough guide of replacement intervals
The rollers should be replaced, using the values indicated by the counter of each paper feed port as a rough guide.
· 500-sheets cassette: 80 K or 2 years (this also applies to built-in 500-sheets container.)
· Manual feed tray: 40 K or 2 years
· Torque limitor of Manual feed tray: 120 K or 2 years
7/13/2000 8–1
B. AR-405/407 ✕ Check (Check, clean, replace or adjust according to necessity.)
❍ Cleaning ▲ Change D Adjustment ✩ Lubrication ❏ Installing position change
Unit/Option name Part name Call 90K 180K 270K 360K Remark
Drum section OPC Drum Drum ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ To be factory attached
Drum Cleaner Blade ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Drum mark sensor ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Drum destiny sensor ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Drum separation pawl Change the installing position at
▲❏ ▲ ▲❏ ▲
every 90 K
Toner reception seal ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Toner reception auxiliary blade ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Cleaner side seal F/R ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
TC / AC Charger wire (❍) ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Charger case ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Discharge Lamp Discharge Lamp ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Main charger Charging plate (Saw blade) ❍ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Screen grid (❍) ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Developing section Developer Box DV seal ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
DSD collar ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
DV side seal F ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
DV side seal R ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
Developer Developer To be charged at the time of
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
installation
Toner cartridge Toner cartridge To be charged at the time of
installation / To be replaced by
user about 22 K
Waste toner bottle Waste toner bottle To be replaced by user about
✕
every 40 K
Optical section Mirror base unit Mirror ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Pulley ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Copy lamp unit Refractor ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Mirror ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Rail Rail ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Glass Table glass ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Dust proof glass ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
White reference glass ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Scanner Lens ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Sensors ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Drive belt ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Drive wire ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
OC OC ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Paper feed section Manual feed tray Rollers (❍) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 1]
Torque limitor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 1]
Paper tray Rollers (❍) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 1]
Brake spring ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Torque limitor ✕ ✕ ❍✩ ✕ ❍✩
Transport section Transport Transport rollers (❍) ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Resist roller (❍) ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Suction Suction belt (❍) ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Fusing section Fusing unit 1 Upper heat roller (❍) ✕ (❍) ✕ ▲ (❍) ✕ ▲
Lower heat roller (❍) ✕ (❍) ✕ ▲ (❍) ✕ ▲
Upper separation pawl (❍) ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Lower separation pawl (❍) ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Insulation bush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Fusing unit 2 Thermistor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Upper heat roller gear ✩ ▲ ✩ ▲
Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Paper exit section 1 Tray paper exit unit Paper exit follower roller ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Transport rollers (❍) ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
(❍) ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Drive section Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ (Specified positions)
Belts ✕
Filters ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
TC ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Print Quality ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
[Note 1] Rough guide of replacement intervals
The rollers should be replaced, using the values indicated by the counter of each paper feed port as a rough guide.
· 500-sheets cassette: 80 K or 2 years (this also applies to built-in 500-sheets container.)
· Manual feed tray: 40 K or 2 years
· Torque limitor of Manual feed tray: 120 K or 2 years
8–2 7/13/2000
C. AR-501/505/507 ✕ Check (Check, clean, replace or adjust according to necessity.)
❍ Cleaning ▲ Change D Adjustment ✩ Lubrication ❏ Installing position change
When
Unit/Option name Part name 125K 250K 375K 500K Remark
calling
Drum peripheral Drum ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ Installed when shipping (Alldestinations)
Cleaner blade ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Toner reception seal ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Cleaner side seal F/R ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Charger wire (TC/AC) (❍)✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Screen grid (❍)✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Drum separation pawl unit Change the installing position at every 125K. (To
▲❏ ▲ ▲❏ ▲
prevent against scratches on the drum)
Waste toner bottle ✕ Replace at every 40K. (By the user)
D. L. ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Charger case (MC/TC/AC) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Charging plate (Saw teeth) ❍ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Drum density sensor ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Drum mark sensor ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Developing section Developer ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ Supply when installing.
DV seal ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
DSD collar ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
DV side seal F ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
DV side seal R ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
MG bearing ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Toner cartridge Attach when installing.
EX Japan: Supply toner every 25K with 700g. (User
replacement)
Fusing section Upper heat roller (❍)✕ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲
Lower heat roller (❍)✕ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲
Upper separation pawl (❍)✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Lower separation pawl (❍)✕ ▲❏ ▲ ▲❏ ▲
Thermistor ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Clean and remove paper dust.
Upper heat roller gear ✩ ▲ ✩ ▲
Paper guides ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Insulation bush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Cleaning roller ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Optical section Mirror/Lens/Reflector/Sensors ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Table glass/Dust-proof glass/OC ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
RSPF glass ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Drive belt/Drive wire/Pulley ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Filters ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Paper feed section Paper feed rollers (manual/550 cassette) (❍)✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 1]
500 cassette brake spring ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Torque limiter (500 cassette) ✕ ✕ ❍✩ ✕ ❍✩
Torque limiter (manual) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 1]
TC TC paper guide unit ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Suction Suction belt (❍)✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Separation lamp ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Newly provided.
Transport section PS follower roller (❍)✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Paper exit reverse Transport rollers (❍)✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
section Paper exit follower roller (inside) ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Curl correction roller ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
Transport paper guides (❍)✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Drive section Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ (Specified position)
Belts ✕ ✕
Copy quality ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Others Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
RSPF Paper feed section Pickup roller (❍)✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 2]
Separation pad (❍)✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 2]
Paper feed roller (❍)✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ [Note 2]
Resist roller (❍)✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Transport section Transport roller (❍)✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Exposure section ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Paper exit section Paper exit roller (❍)✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Wipe with alcohol for cleaning.
Others Sensors ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Blow air for cleaning. [Note 3]
[Note 1] Replacement reference: Replace according to the counter value of each paper feed port.
· 500-sheeet cassette paper feed roller and related parts: 80K or 2 years
· Manual paper feed roller and related parts: 40K or 2 years
· Manual feed torque limiter: 120K or 2 years
[Note 2] Replacement reference: Replace according to the counter value of the document feed unit. : 80K or 2 years
[Note 3] Clean according to the above descriptions or the counter value of the document feed unit: 50K
7/13/2000 8–3
2. List of disassembly and assembly Unit Parts
G. Manual paper feed (1) Manual paper feed sensor
Unit Parts unit (2) Rollers/torque limiters
A. Developing unit (1) Toner hopper H. 500 tray paper unit (1) Tray unit
(2) Developing side seal (F/R)
(2) Tray paper feed unit
B. Drum unit (1) OPC drum I. Paper transport unit (1) Paper transport section
(2) Drum separation pawl J. Suction unit (1) Suction unit
(3) Cleaner blade
K. Fusing unit (1) Thermistor
(4) Toner reception seal (2) Upper fusing separation pawl
(5) Main charger
(3) Lower fusing separation pawl
(6) Transfer/separation charger
(4) Lower heat roller
C. Discharge lamp (1) Discharge lamp (5) Upper heat roller
D. Scanner unit (1) Table glass
(6) Upper heat roller gear
(2) White reference glass (SPF/RSPF L. Two-tray paper exit (1) Paper exit/transport roller
scanning glass) unit
(3) CCD unit
M. One-tray paper unit (1) Paper exit roller
(4) Copy lamp (2) Paper exit/transport roller
(5) Mirror base unit
N. PCU/AC power/ (1) PCU/AC power/High voltage power/
(6) Copy lamp unit High voltage power/ Main motor
(7) Rails Main motor
(8) Glass section O. Major drive unit (1) Major drive unit
(9) Scanner section P. Lift-up unit (1) Lift-up unit
E. ICU peripheral (1) HD unit O. RSPF (1) Paper feed section
(2) ICU PWB (2) Transport section
(3) SCSI PWB (AR-501/505) (3) Paper exit section
F. Laser unit (1) Laser scan unit (4) Others
3. Counter clear
Maintenance cycle setting SIM21-01
Maintenance counter clear SIM24-04 At drum replacement
Developing counter clear SIM24-05 At developer replacement
OPC drum membrane decrease correction counter clear SIM24-07 At drum replacement
Jam/trouble counter clear SIM24-01
Paper feed counter clear SIM24-02 At maintenance
DF/Scan/Stapler counter clear SIM24-03 At maintenance
Printer, other counter clear SIM24-09
A. Developing unit
(1) Toner hopper
AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337/405/407
2
* After replacing developer, execute SIM 24-5 to clear the developer
(copy quantity) counter.
8–4 7/13/2000
(2) Developing side seal
AR-501/505
0.5 0.5
0 0.5 0.5 0
0 0
4
5
2
1
Cycle
No. Name Work item AR-250/280/281/285/ Remark
AR-405/407 AR-501/505/507
286/287/335/336/337
1 DV seal Check 80 K 90 K 125K For attachment position, refer to
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY.
Replace 160 K 180 K 250K For attachment position, refer to
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY.
2 DSD collar Clean 80 K 90 K 125K
3 DV side seal F Check 80 K 90 K 125K
Replace 160 K 180 K 250K For attachment position, refer to
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY.
4 DV side seal R Check 80 K 90 K 125K
Replace 160 K 180 K 250K For attachment position, refer to
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY.
5 MG bearing Check — — 125K
7/13/2000 8–5
B. Drum unit (1) OPC drum
AR-280/285/335
1
2 3 1
AR-280/285/335
1 1
AR-250/281/286/287/336/337/405/407/501/505/507
1 2 3
1
1
AR-250/281/286/287/336/337/405/407/501/505/507
5
1
1
Cycle
No. Name Work item AR-250/280/281/285/ Remark
AR-405/407 AR-501/505/507
286/287/335/336/337
1 Drum Check 80 K 90 K 125K Installed when shipping (Alldestinations)
Replace 160 K 180 K 250K Execute SIM 24-7 after replacement.
* After replacing the OPC drum, execute SIM 24-7 to clear the counter.
* When installing the OPC drum, apply starting powder(UKOG-0088CSZZ).
8–6 7/13/2000
(2) Drum separation pawl (4) Toner reception seal
3 5
6 4
1
2 3
7
7
(The illustrations are the same as those of the AR-335.) 4
* Be careful to clean the pawl lead edge (the contact section with the
drum) and keep it from foreign materials.
(3) Cleaner blade
1
1
3
2
3
4
7/13/2000 8–7
(5) Main charger
1
3
2
1
2
a
Hallmark ±1mm
* Adjust the screen grid tension so that the marking on the screen
holder and the marking on the MC holder come on a same line.
Tighten screw a, then tighten screw b.
Cycle
No. Name Work item AR-250/280/281/285/ Remark
AR-405/407 AR-501/505/507
286/287/335/336/337
1 Charging plate (Saw tooth) Replace 80 K 90 K 125K
2 Screen grid Replace 80 K 90 K 125K
8–8 7/13/2000
(6) Transfer/separation charger
10 0.5mm
3
1
Cycle
No. Name Work item AR-250/280/281/285/ Remark
AR-405/407 AR-501/505/507
286/287/335/336/337
1 Charger wire (TC/AC) Replace 80 K 90 K 125K
2 Charger case (MC/TC/AC) Clean 80 K 90 K 125K
3 Separation lamp Clean — — 125K
7/13/2000 8–9
C. Discharge lamp (1) Discharge lamp
Cycle
No. Name Work item AR-250/280/281/285/ Remark
AR-405/407 AR-501/505/507
286/287/335/336/337
1 Discharge lamp Clean 80 K 90 K 125K
D. Scanner unit (Optical system) (2) White reference glass (SPF/RSPF scan glass)
(1) Table glass AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337/405/407
1
AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337/405/407
1
1
2
2
AR-501/505/507
AR-501/505/507
8 – 10 7/13/2000
* The shape of the glass holder differs depending on the model. Shift the copy lamp unit to the paper exit side, and fix it with the
Upper side harness guide so that the distance from the lower frame is about 24 ±
2mm, (25 ~ 30mm) with the copy lamp harness extended.
Guide Paper exit
side If the copy lamp harness is loosely fixed, the copy lamp unit may jump
up when reading, resulting in abnormal reading.
White paint section
* Attach the glass along the guide so that the white pain section of
the white reference glass faces downward as shown above.
* When handling the white reference glass, be careful not to scratch
the white pain section and keep it from dirt or dust.
(3) CCD unit 24±2mm
1
2
3
3
4
* Never loosen the screws other than those which are shown in the
above figure.
If loosened, the adjustment cannot be made in the market.
* When removing the CCD unit, mark the installing position.
* When installing again, perform the main scanning direction magni-
fication ratio adjustment (CCD unit installing position adjustment)
described above.
(4) Copy lamp
3
2
7/13/2000 8 – 11
(5) Mirror base unit
2 2
Cycle
No. Name Work item AR-250/280/281/285/ Remark
AR-405/407 AR-501/505/507
286/287/335/336/337
1 Mirror Clean 80 K 90 K 125K
2 Pulley Check 80 K 90 K 125K
AR-280/285/335 AR-250/281/286/287/336/337/405/407/501/505/507
1
1
Cycle
Work
No. Name AR-250/280/281/285/ Remark
item AR-405/407 AR-501/505/507
286/287/335/336/337
1 Reflector Clean 80 K 90 K 125K
2 Mirror Clean 80 K 90 K 125K
(7) Rails
Cycle
No. Name Work item AR-250/280/281/285/ Remark
AR-405/407 AR-501/505/507
286/287/335/336/337
1 Rails Lubricate 80 K 90 K 125K
8 – 12 7/13/2000
(8) Glass section
2 3
Cycle
No. Name Work item AR-250/280/281/285/ Remark
AR-405/407 AR-501/505/507
286/287/335/336/337
1 Table glass Clean 80 K 90 K 125K
2 White reference glass (OC) Clean 80 K 90 K 125K
3 RSPF glass Clean — — 125K
Cycle
No. Name Work item AR-250/280/281/285/ Remark
AR-405/407 AR-501/505/507
286/287/335/336/337
1 Lens Clean 80 K 90 K 125K Do not use screws.
2 Sensors Clean 80 K 90 K 125K
3 Drive belt Check 80 K 90 K 125K
4 Drive wire Check 80 K 90 K 125K
7/13/2000 8 – 13
E. ICU peripheral (1) HD unit
AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337/405/407
1-1
1-1
1-1 1-2
1-2
AR-501/505/507
1-1 2
1-1
2
1-1 1-2
2
1-2
1
3
2
5
4
* Screw of 1)-1 and that of 1)-2 are different from each other.
8 – 14 7/13/2000
(3) SCSI PWB (AR-501/505/507) (1) Laser scanner unit
F. Laser unit
* Never let the laser beam directly come into your eyes, or you may
go blind.
AR-250/280/281/285/335/336/337
3
1
2
AR-405/501/505/507
3
* When installing the laser unit, check that the three points a, b, and
c are securely in positions. If not, printing errors may occur.
* Do not open the LSU cover (top plate).
Cycle
No. Name Work item AR-250/280/281/285/ Remark
AR-405/407 AR-501/505/507
286/287/335/336/337
1 Dust-proof glass Clean 80 K 90 K 125K
7/13/2000 8 – 15
G. Manual paper feed tray unit (2) Rollers/torque limiters
2 2
1 2
2
1
1 1 1
3
1
Cycle
No. Name Work item AR-250/280/281/285/ Remark
AR-405/407 AR-501/505/507
286/287/335/336/337
1 Rollers Clean 80 K 90 K 125K
Check 80 K 90 K 125K
Replace 40 K or 40 K or 2 years 40K or Reference: manual paper feed port counter
2 years 2 years
2 Torque limiter Check 80 K 90 K 125K
Replace 120 K or 120 K or 120K or Reference: manual paper feed port counter
2 years 2 years 2 years
8 – 16 7/13/2000
H. 500 tray paper unit AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337/405/407
AR-501/505/507
7/13/2000 8 – 17
Cycle
Work
No. Name AR-250/280/281/285/ Remark
item AR-405/407 AR-501/505/507
286/287/335/336/337
1 Rollers Clean 80 K 90 K 125K
Check 80 K 90 K 125K
Replace 80 K or 80 K or 80K or Reference: paper fed port counter
2 years 2 years 2 years
1
3
2
2
4
2
3
Cycle
Work
No. Name AR-250/280/281/285/ Remark
item AR-405/407 AR-501/505/507
286/287/335/336/337
1 Resist roller Clean 80 K 90 K 125 K
2 Transport rollers Clean 80 K 90 K 125 K
3 Rollers Clean 80 K 90 K 125 K
8 – 18 7/13/2000
J. Suction unit
1
1
4 1
2
7/13/2000 8 – 19
K. Fusing unit (2) Upper fusing separation pawl
AR-280/285/335 only
2
1
AR-280/285/335 only
3
(1) Thermistor
1 3
1
1 2
2
3 * Put the spring on the side of "1".
6 5
3
AR-280/285/335 only
8 – 20 7/13/2000
(3) Lower fusing separation pawl
AR-280/285/335 only
6 1
1
4
AR-280/285/335 only
4
2
3
2
1 1
2
2
1
2 1
AR-280/285/335 only
2
AR-280/285/335 only
7/13/2000 8 – 21
(6) Upper heat roller gear
3
7
3 8
Cycle
Work
No. Name AR-250/280/281/285/ Remark
item AR-405/407 AR-501/505/507
286/287/335/336/337
1 Upper heat roller Clean 80 K 90 K 125K
Replace 160 K 180 K 250K
2 Lower heat roller Clean 80 K 90 K 125K
Replace 160 K 180 K 250K
3 Upper separation pawl Replace 80 K 90 K 125K
4 Lower separation pawl Replace 80 K 90 K 125K
5 Insulation bush Check 80 K 90 K 125K
6 Thermistor Check 80 K 90 K —
Clean — — 125K
7 Upper heat roller gear Lubricate 80 K 90 K 125K
Replace 160 K 180 K 250K
8 Gears Lubricate 80K 90 K 125K
* When assembling the upper frame and the lower frame, press the upper frame securely to the lower frame and fix with the screw.
If the frames are fixed loosely, defective fusing and paper wrinkles may occur.
8 – 22 7/13/2000
L. Two-tray paper exit unit (1) Paper exit/transport roller
1
1
1
1 1
2
1
1
1 2
1
2 2 2
2 2
1
2
2 2 2
7/13/2000 8 – 23
M. One-tray paper unit AR-501/505/507
2 1
2
2
2
2
8 – 24 7/13/2000
AR-501/505/507
Cycle
No. Name Work item Remark
AR-280/285/335 AR-405/407 AR-501/505/507
1 Transport rollers Clean 80 K 90 K 125K
2 Paper exit follower roller (inner surface) Lubricate 80 K 90 K —
Paper exit follower roller (inside) Lubricate — — 125K
3 Curl correction roller Check — — 125K
Change — — 250K
4 Transport paper guides Clean — — 125K
* The PCU, AC power, the high voltage power, and the main motor can be removed by removing the screw shown with arrows.
7/13/2000 8 – 25
O. Major drive unit
AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337/405/407
AR-501/505/507
Cycle
No. Name Work item AR-250/280/281/285/ Remark
AR-405/407 AR-501/505/507
286/287/335/336/337
Gears Lubricate 80 K 90 K 125K
Belts Check 240 K 270 K 250K
8 – 26 7/13/2000
AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337/405/407 AR-501/505/507
* Each drive unit can be removed by removing the screw shown with the arrow.
7/13/2000 8 – 27
AR-250/280/281/285/286/287/335/336/337/405/407 Q. RSPF
3
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
3
8 – 28 7/13/2000
5
5 6
Cycle
No. Name Work item Remark
AR-335 AR-405/407 AR-501/505/507
1 Pickup roller Check — — 125 K
2 Separation pad Check — — 125 K
3 Paper feed roller Check — — 125 K
4 Resist roller Clean — — 125 K
5 Paper exit roller Clean — — 125 K Wipe with alcohol for cleaning.
6 Transport roller Clean — — 125 K
7 Exposure section Clean — — 125 K
Sensors Clean — — 125 K Blow air for cleaning.
7/13/2000 8 – 29
[9] TROUBLE CODE LIST
1. Trouble code
Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble
Content of trouble Remark Content of trouble Remark
code detection code detection
C1 00 MC trouble PCU L3 00 Scanner return trouble PCU
C2 00 TC trouble PCU L4 01 Main motor lock detection PCU
E7 00 ICU communication trouble ICU L6 10 Polygon motor lock detection ICU
01 Image data memory trouble ICU L8 01 No full-wave signal PCU
02 Laser trouble ICU 02 Full-wave signal width abnormality PCU
03 HDD trouble ICU U2 00 EEPROM read/write error ICU
10 Shading trouble (Black correction) ICU 11 Counter check sum error (EEPROM) ICU
11 Shading trouble (White correction) ICU 12 Adjustment value check sum error ICU
13 CCD light quantity check error ICU (EEPROM)
90 ICU communication trouble PCU U4 02 ADU alignment plate operation PCU
F1 00 Finisher communication trouble PCU abnormality
01 Finisher 1 jogger shift trouble / Finisher 2 FIN 03 ADU rear edge plate operation PCU
alignment section abnormality abnormality
02 Finisher transport motor abnormality FIN U5 00 RADF/SPF/RSPF communication trouble PCU
03 Sorter guide bar oscillation motor trouble SOT 01 RADF resist sensor trouble RADF
04 Finisher 1 elevator lower limit detection / FIN 02 RADF eject/inversion sensor trouble RADF
Finisher 2 stack tray lower limit detection 03 RADF timing sensor trouble RADF
05 Finisher 1 elevator home / Finisher 2 FIN 06 RSPF post-separation sensor trouble RSPF
stack tray sensor abnormality 07 RSPF read sensor trouble RSPF
06 Finisher shift motor abnormality FIN 08 RSPF SB sensor trouble RSPF
08 Finisher staple shift motor trouble FIN 11 RADF paper feed motor operation RADF
10 Finisher staple unit operation trouble FIN abnormality
11 Finisher 1 pusher motor trouble / Finisher FIN 16 RSPF fan motor operation abnormality RSPF
2 boomerang rotation abnormality U6 00 Desk communication trouble PCU
14 Finisher 2 stack tray abnormality FIN 01 Desk 1 CS lift up trouble Desk
15 Finisher 1 elevator motor trouble / FIN 02 Desk 2 CS lift up trouble Desk
Finisher 2 stack tray motor lock 03 Desk 3 CS lift up trouble Desk
16 Staple sorter holding moter trouble SOT 08 Desk 24V power abnormality Desk
17 ST paper exit roller pressure release FIN 09 LCC lift motor trouble LCC
trouble 10 Desk transport motor trouble Desk
18 Tray 3 paper exit paddler operation trouble FIN 20 LCC communication trouble PCU
50 Non-suport trouble in automatic detection PCU 21 LCC transport motor trouble LCC
of option connection (Sorter, finisher) 22 LCC 24V power abnormality LCC
80 Finisher power not supplied FIN 50 Non-suport trouble in automatic detection PCU
F2 00 Toner control sensor open PCU of option connection (Desk unit)
02 Toner motor connector unconnected PCU 51 Non-suport trouble in automatic detection PCU
31 Process control trouble (OPC drum PCU of option connection (LCC unit)
surface reflection rate abnormality) U7 00 RIC communication trouble PCU
32 Process control trouble (Drum marking PCU U9 00 Operation control communication trouble ICU
scanning trouble) 90 Operation control communication trouble OPE
37 Drum marking sensor gain adjustment PCU CE 00 The other communication error has Network
error occurred.
39 Process thermistor breakdown PCU 01 The print server card (AR-NC3D) is not Network
F3 12 Copier top stage CS lift up trouble PCU installed or defective.
22 Copier bottom stage CS lift up trouble PCU 02 The specified mail server or the FTP Network
F9 00 Printer communication trouble ICU server is not found.
01 PRT DRAM trouble PRT 03 The specified server does not correspond Network
02 PRT Centroport check error PRT during image transmission.
03 Network card trouble 04 The entered account name of the FTP Network
04 Printer program error server or the password is invalid.
10 PRT SCSI LSI abnormality ICU 05 The entered directory of the FTP server is Network
90 Printer communication trouble PRT invalid.
H2 00 Thermistor open (HL1) PCU CH Light Door open PCU
01 Thermistor open (HL2) PCU up
H3 00 Heat roller high temperature detection PCU EE EL Auto developing adjustment trouble In SIM only PCU
(HL1) (Overtoner)
01 Heat roller high temperature detection PCU EU Auto developing adjustment trouble In SIM only PCU
(HL2) (Undertoner)
H4 00 Heat roller low temperature detection PCU FA 00 SCSI trouble ICU
(HL1) FC 00 ASK/IrDA modulation LSI reset error
01 Heat roller low temperature detection PCU 01 ASK/IrDA switch error
(HL2) PC Personal counter not installed ICU
H5 01 3 continuous POD1 not-reaching JAM PCU PF RIC copy inhibit command reception ICU
detection –– Auditor not ready ICU
02 Fusing thermistor abnormality PCU
L1 00 Scanner feed trouble PCU
9–1 7/13/2000
2. Self diagnostics
Trouble code Trouble code
Main Sub Description Main Sub Description
code code code code
C1 00 Content MC trouble E7 02 Content Laser trouble
Detail Main charger output error (output Detail BD signal from LSU kept at OFF or ON
released) Cause Connector to LSU or harness inside LSU
Trouble signal from high-voltage disconnected or wire broken
transformer Polygon motor improperly rotating
Cause Main charger improperly installed Laser home position sensor improperly
Main charger improperly assembled positioned inside LSU
High-voltage transformer connector Laser power supply line does not have
removed proper voltage
High-voltage harness removed or wire Laser LED improperly lighting
broken ICU PWB error
Check Check main charger output with SIM8-2. Check Check LSU connector for disconnection.
and Check main charger connector for and Check LSU operation with SIM61-1.
remedy disconnection. remedy Check polygon motor for rotation.
Replace high-voltage unit. Check laser LED for lighting.
C2 00 Content TC trouble Replace LSU unit.
Detail Transfer charger output error (output Replace ICU PWB.
short-circuiting) 03 Content HDD trouble
Trouble signal from high-voltage Detail HDD is not recognized in the model with
transformer HDD installed.
Cause Transfer charger contaminated with Cause The HDD is not installed to the ICU PWB.
foreign matter The HDD does not work properly in the
Transfer charger wire broken ICU PWB.
High-voltage transformer connector The HDD is not installed to the ICU PWB
disconnected properly.
Check Check transfer charger output with ICU PWB abnormality
and SIM8-6. Check Check installation of the HDD to the ICU
remedy Replace high-voltage unit. and PWB.
E7 00 Content ICU communication trouble (ICU remedy Check connection of the HDD harness to
detection) the ICU.
Detail Communication setup error, Replace the HDD.
framing/parity/protocol error Replace the ICU PWB.
Cause Slave unit PWB connector improper 10 Content Shading trouble (black correction)
connection Detail Improper CCD black reading level for
Slave unit PWB – ICU PWB harness copy lamp going out
trouble Cause Improper installation of flat cable to CCD
Connector pin breakage of the motor unit
PWB of the slave unit PWB CCD unit error
Slave unit ROM trouble. no ROM, ROM ICU PWB error
reverse insertion, ROM pin breakage Check Check flat cable to CCD unit for
Check Connect the connector of the slave unit and installation.
and PWB and the ICU PWB. remedy Check CCD unit.
remedy Check the connection and the harness. Check ICU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier. 11 Content Shading trouble (white correction)
Check the ROM of the slave unit PWB. Detail Improper CCD white reference plate
01 Content Image data memory trouble reading level for copy lamp lighting
Detail The ICU image data memory (SIMM) is Cause Improper installation of flat cable to CCD
detected only as 8MB or less. unit
The SIMM capacity is insufficient for the Mirror, lens or reference white plate
model. contaminated
Cause The ICU PWB SIMM is not installed. Copy lamp operation error
The ICU PWB SIMM does not work Improperly installed CCD unit
properly. CCD unit error
The ICU PWB SIMM is not installed ICD PWB error
properly. Check Clean mirror, lens, or reference white
ICU PWB abnormality and plate.
Check Check installation of the ICU PWB SIMM. remedy Check copy lamp for light amount
and Check the SIMM capacity with SIM (SIM5-3) and lighting.
remedy 22-10. Check CCD unit.
Replace the ICU PWB SIMM. Check ICU PWB.
7/13/2000 9–2
Trouble code Trouble code
Main Sub Description Main Sub Description
code code code code
E7 13 Content CCD light quantity check error F1 02 Content Finisher transport motor abnormality
Detail Copy lamp light amount adjustment in Detail Transport motor drive trouble
shading cannot be made Cause Motor lock
Cause Copy lamp does not light (broken wire, Check Check transport motor operation with
improper installation) and SIM3-3.
Improper installation of flat cable to CCD remedy
unit 03 Content Sorter guide bar oscillation motor trouble
Improper connection of copy lamp CL Detail Sorter guide bar oscillation motor drive
lead wire abnormality
Mirror, lens, or reference white plate Cause Motor lock.
Dirt or dew Motor rotation abnormality.
Improper output of copy lamp power Overcurrent to motor
supply Sorter control PWB abnormality
Improper installation of CCD unit Check Check the guide bar motor operation
CCD unit error and with SIM3-3.
ICU PWB error remedy
Check Clean mirror, lens, reference white plate. 04 Content Finisher 1 elevator lower limit detection/
and Check copy lamp for light amount Finisher 2 stack tray lower limit detection
remedy (SIM5-3) and lighting. Detail When the bin is shifted, the upper limit or
Check CCD unit. the lower limit sensor is detected. / The
Check ICU PWB. elevator exceeds the lower limit.
90 Content ICU communication trouble (PCU Cause Sensor defective
detection) Sorter/finisher control PWB abnormality
Detail Communication setup Check Check sensor with SIM3-2.
error/framing/parity/protocol error and
Cause Slave unit PWB connector improper remedy
connection 05 Content Finisher 1 elevator home / Finisher 2
Slave unit PWB – ICU PWB harness stack tray sensor abnormality
trouble Detail The elevator does not detect the home
Slave unit PWB mother board connector position. / Stack tray sensors are turned
pin breakage on in the abnormal combination.
Check Check the slave unit PWB and the ICU Cause Sensor defective
and PWB connector connection. Sorter/finisher control PWB abnormality
remedy Check the copier earth. Check Check sensor with SIM3-2.
F1 00 Content Finisher communication trouble and
Detail Communication line test error occurs remedy
when power is turned on or after the exit 06 Content Finisher shift motor abnormality
of a simulation mode. Detail 1) Bin shift is not completed within 2.5
Improper communication with sorter seconds after bin shift request
Cause Improper connection or broken wire of Cause Motor lock
connector or harness between copier Improper motor speed
and sorter Overcurrent to motor
Finisher control PWB defective Finisher control PWB defective
Control PWB (PCU) defective Check Check bin shift motor operation with
Malfunction due to noise and SIM3-4.
Check Clear by turning the power supply remedy
and OFF/ON. 08 Content Finisher staple shift motor trouble
remedy Check communication line connector Detail Staple motor drive trouble
and harness. Cause Motor lock
Replace Finisher control PWB or PCU Motor rpm abnormality
PWB. Overcurrent to motor
01 Content Finisher1 jogger shift trouble / Finisher 2 Finisher control PWB trouble
alignment section abnormality Check Check the operation of the staple motor
Detail Jogger shift trouble / Alignment plate and with SIM 3-3.
shift trouble remedy
Cause Motor lock 10 Content Finisher staple unit operation trouble
Motor rpm abnormality Detail Staple operation trouble
Motor overcurrent Cause Motor lock
Finisher control PWB trouble Motor rpm abnormality
Check Check the jogger motor operation with Motor overcurrent
and SIM 3-3. Finisher control PWB trouble
remedy Check Check the staple motor operation with
and SIM 3-3.
remedy
9–3 7/13/2000
Trouble code Trouble code
Main Sub Description Main Sub Description
code code code code
F1 11 Content Finisher 1 pusher motor trouble / F1 50 Content Non-support trouble in automatic
Finisher 2 boomerang rotation detection of option connection (Sorter,
abnormality finisher)
Detail Pusher motor trouble / Paddle solenoid Detail In automatic detection of option
abnormality connection, a non-support finisher or a
Cause Motor lock / paddle solenoid operation sorter is detected.
abnormality / boomerang rotation sensor Cause A non-support finisher or a sorter is
abnormality connected to the copier.
Motor rpm abnormality Check Check the finisher or the sorter.
Motor overcurrent and
Finisher control PWB abnormality remedy
Check Check the finisher motor operation, the 80 Content Finisher power not supplied
and paddle solenoid operation with SIM 3-3 Detail 24V power is not supplied to the finisher
remedy or check the boomerang rotation sensor PWB.
with SIM 3-2. Cause Connector harness improper connection
14 Content Finisher 2 stack tray abnormality or disconnection
Detail Stack tray control sensor abnormality Finisher control PWB trouble
Cause The paper surface sensor and the full stack Power unit trouble
sensor do not turn on even when a certain Check Check the sensor operation with SIM 3-2.
time is passed after starting the tray. and
Check Check the sensor operation with SIM 3-2. remedy
and F2 00 Content Toner control sensor open
remedy Detail Toner control sensor output open
15 Content Finisher 1 elevator motor trouble / Cause Connector harness trouble
Finisher 2 stack tray motor lock Connector unconnected.
Detail Elevator motor trouble Check Check connection of the toner control
Cause Motor lock and sensor.
Motor rpm abnormality remedy Check connection of the connector
Motor overcurrent harness with the main PWB.
Finisher control PWB trouble Check for disconnection of the harness.
Check Check the elevator motor operation with 02 Content Toner motor connector unconnected
and SIM 3-3. Detail Connection detection signal with toner
remedy motor is OFF
16 Content Staple sorter holding motor trouble Cause Connector harness defective
Detail During rotation of the holding motor, the Connector disconnected
rotation pulse is not detected for 0.05sec Check Check toner motor connector for
or more. and connection.
Cause Motor lock. remedy Check connector harness to main PWB
Motor rotation abnormality. for connection.
Overcurrent to motor Check harness for broken wire.
Sorter control PWB abnormality 31 Content Process control trouble (OPC drum
Check Check the holding motor operation with surface reflection rate abnormality)
and SIM3-3. Detail Usually the sensor gain is adjusted so
remedy that the output is a certain value, by
17 Content ST pressure release HP trouble reading the drum base surface with the
Detail ST paper exit roller pressure release trouble image density sensor before starting
when turning on the power/initializing process control.
Cause ST paper exit roller pressure release However, a certain output is not
clutch abnormality obtained by adjusting the sensor gain.
ST paper exit roller pressure release Cause Image density sensor defective
clutch HP sensor abnormality Check Check process control sensor output
Check Stop the transport motor in SIM 3-3, turn and with SIM44-2. (Do not adjust)
and on the STORCL to check that the remedy If the result is far different from the
remedy pressure release roller operates. specified value, it suggests the sensor is
Check the STORHP sensor with SIM 3-2. defective. Check the sensor and harness.
18 Content Tray 3 paper exit paddler operation trouble If the deviation is relatively small, check
Detail Tray 3 paper exit paddler operation the sensor and drum surface for
trouble when turning on the contamination.
power/initializing
Cause Tray 3 paper exit paddler solenoid
abnormality
Tray 3 paper exit paddler HP sensor
abnormality
Finisher control PWB trouble
Check Operate the transport motor with SIM
and 3-3 and turn on T3PDSL to check that
remedy tray 3 paddler operates.
Check T3PDHP sensor with SIM 3-2.
7/13/2000 9–4
Trouble code Trouble code
Main Sub Description Main Sub Description
code code code code
F2 32 Content Process control trouble (Drum marking F3 22 Content Copier bottom stage CS lift up trouble
scanning trouble) Detail LPED does not turn on within the
Detail Usually the sensor gain is adjusted so specified time.
that the output is a certain value, by LLUD does not turn on within the
reading the drum base surface with the specified time.
drum marking sensor before starting Cause LPED or LLUD defective
process control. Lower cassette lift-up motor defective
However, a certain output is not Improper connection of harness between
obtained by adjusting the sensor gain. PCU PWB, lift-up unit, and paper feed
Cause Drum marking sensor defective unit.
Improper connection of harness between Check Check LPED, LLUD, their harnesses and
PCU PWB and drum marking sensor and connectors.
Drum marking sensor contaminated remedy Check lift-up unit.
OPC drum cleaning improper F9 00 Content Printer communication trouble (ICU
Charging voltage improper detection)
Check Check process control output with Detail Communication setup error,
and SIM44-02. (Do not adjust.) framing/parity/protocol error
remedy If the result is far different from the Cause Slave unit PWB connector improper
specified value, it suggests the sensor is connection
defective. Check the sensor and harness. Slave unit PWB – ICU PWB harness
If the deviation is relatively small, check trouble
the sensor and drum surface for Connector pin breakage of the motor
contamination. PWB of the slave unit PWB
37 Content Drum marking sensor gain adjustment Slave unit ROM trouble. no ROM, ROM
error reverse insertion, ROM pin breakage
Detail When the drum marking area surface is Check Connect the connector of the slave unit
scanned with the drum marking sensor and PWB and the ICU PWB.
before starting process control and the remedy Check the connection and the harness.
sensor gain is adjusted until a constant Check the grounding of the copier.
output is provided, the output is not Check the ROM of the slave unit PWB.
constant though the sensor gain is 01 Content PRT DRAM trouble
changed. Detail Option printer PWB DRAM trouble
Cause Drum marking sensor trouble (Check when turning on the power.)
Improper connection between PCU PWB Cause DRAM module is broken and access
and drum marking sensor cannot be made.
Drum marking sensor is dirty DRAM module improper installation
OPC drum cleaning trouble Check Check with SIM 67-1.
Check Perform the gain adjustment of process and
and control sensor with SIM 44-2. remedy
remedy If ERROR is displayed, it may be a 02 Content PRT Centro port check error
breakdown. Check the sensor and the Detail Centro port trouble in option printer board
harness. Cause Centro port trouble
When the adjustment is completed, Printer PWB trouble
check the drum surface conditions. Check Replace Printer PWB
39 Content Process thermistor breakdown and
Detail The process thermistor is open. remedy
Cause Process thermistor abnormality 03 Content Network card trouble.
Improper connection of the process Detail Network card self test trouble.
thermistor bar Cause Network card defecft.
PCU PWB abnormality Printer PWB defect.
Check Check connection of the process Network card connector connection
and thermistor harness and connector. defect.
remedy Check the PCU PWB. Check Check the Network card connector.
F3 12 Content Copier top stage CS lift up trouble and Replace the printer PWB.
Detail UPED does not turn on within the remedy Replace the Network card.
specified time. 04 Content Printer program error.
ULUD does not turn on within the Detail Program data trouble in the option
specified time. printer board.
Cause UPED or ULUD defective Cause Flash memory data is destroied.
Upper cassette lift-up motor defective Check Replace or rewrite the Flash memory.
Improper connection of harness between and Replace the printer PWB.
PCU PWB, lift-up unit, and paper feed remedy
unit.
Check Check UPED, ULUD and their harness
and and connector.
remedy Check lift-up unit.
9–5 7/13/2000
Trouble code Trouble code
Main Sub Description Main Sub Description
code code code code
F9 10 Content PRT SCSI LSI abnormality H4 00¼HL1 Content Heat roller low temperature detection
Detail An error occurred in SCSI 01¼HL2 Detail The temperature does not reach the
communication with the option printer preset value within the specified time (3
board. min. in usual modes; 5 min. in curl
Cause SCSI LSI abnormality correction mode.) after the power relay is
ISU PWB abnormality turned on.
SCSI connector improper connection Cause Thermister defective
Check Replace the printer PWB. Heater lamp defective
and Check the SCSI connector. Control PWB defective
remedy Replace the ISU PWB. Thermostat defective
90 Content Printer communication trouble (PRT AC power supply defective
detection) Interlock switch defective
Detail Communication setup Check Check heater lamp for blinking with
error/framing/parity/protocol error and SIM5-2.
Cause Slave unit PWB connector improper remedy If lamp blinks properly:
connection Check thermister and its harness.
Slave unit PWB – ICU PWB harness Check thermister input circuit of
trouble control PWB.
Slave unit PWB mother board connector If lamp does not light:
pin breakage Check heater lamp for broken wire
Check Check the slave unit PWB and the ICU and thermostat for operation.
and PWB connector connection. Check interlock switch.
remedy Check the copier earth. Check lamp control circuit of AC PWB
H2 00¼HL1 Content Thermister open and control PWB.
01¼HL2 Fusing unit not installed Clear the trouble with SIM14.
Detail Thermister is open (more than 4.6-V H5 01 Content 3 continuous POD1 not-reaching JAM
input voltage is detected). detection
Fusing unit not installed Detail 3 continuous POD1 not-reaching JAM
Cause Thermister defective detection
Control PWB defective Cause Check that the fusing JAM is completely
Improper connection of fusing connector cancelled. (Jam paper may be
AC power supply defective remained.)
Fusing unit not installed POD1 sensor trouble or improper
Check Check harness and connector between harness connection
and thermister and control PWB. Improper installation of the fusing
remedy Clear the display of self-diagnostics with harness.
SIM14. Check Check JAM paper in the fusing section.
H3 00¼HL1 Content Heat roller high temperature detection and (Winding, etc.)
01¼HL2 Detail The fusing temperature is over 241.5°C remedy Check POD1 sensor harness. Check the
(less than 1.3-V input voltage is fusing unit installation.
detected.) Cancel the trouble with SIM 14.
Cause Thermister defective 02 Content Fusing thermistor abnormality
Control PWB defective Detail Fusing thermistor temperature transient
Improper connection of fusing unit abnormality (Paper winding)
connector Cause Paper winding to fusing roller
AC power supply defective Fusing pawl abnormality
Check Check heater lamp operation with Fusing unit installation abnormality
and SIM5-2. Check Check for jam (winding) paper in the
remedy If lamp blinks properly: and fusing section.
Check thermister and its harness. remedy Check for installation of the fusing unit.
Check thermister input circuit of Check the fusing pawl.
control PWB. Cancel the trouble with SIM 14.
If lamp lights and stays lit: L1 00 Content Scanner feed trouble
Check lamp control circuits of AC Detail Scanner feed is not finished within the
PWB and control PWB. specified time. (timer is change by
Clear the trouble with SIM14. magnification)
Cause Mirror unit defective
Scanner wire disconnected
Check Check scanning operation with SIM1-1.
and
remedy
7/13/2000 9–6
Trouble code Trouble code
Main Sub Description Main Sub Description
code code code code
L3 00 Content Scanner return trouble U2 00 Content EEPROM read/write error
Detail Scanner return is not finished within the Detail EEPROM version error. Error in writing
specified time. (timer is change by into EEPROM.
magnification) Cause EEPROM defective
Cause Mirror unit defective Uninitialized EEPROM is installed
Scanner wire disconnected Defective EEPROM access circuit on
Check Check scanning operation with SIM1-1. PCU PWB
and Check Check EEPROM for proper set-up
remedy and To prevent the erasure of counter data
L4 01 Content Main motor lock detection remedy and adjustment values, write down the
Detail Motor lock signal is detected for 1.5 counter data and adjustment values by
seconds during main motor rotation simulation. (If there is a printer option,
Cause Main motor defective execute SIM23-1 and note counter
Improper connection of harness between data/adjustment values.)
PCU PWB and main motor Clear U2 trouble with SIM16.
Control circuit defective Replace PCU PWB.
Check Check main motor operation with 11 Content Counter check sum error (EEPROM)
and SIM25-1. Detail Checksum error in counter data area
remedy Check harness and connector between Cause EEPROM defective
PCU PWB and main motor. Control circuit hung up due to noise
L6 10 Content Polygon motor lock detection Defective EEPROM access circuit on
Detail It was judged that there is no output of PCU PWB
polygon motor lock signal of LSU. Check Check EEPROM for proper set-up
The lock signal was checked at about and To prevent the erasure of counter data
remedy and adjustment values, write down the
10-second intervals after the polygon counter data and adjustment values by
motor started rotating. As result, it was simulation. (If there is a printer option,
judged that the polygon motor failed to execute SIM23-1 and note counter
operate normally. data/adjustment values.)
Clear U2 trouble with SIM16.
Cause Disconnected connecter to LSU or Replace PCU PWB.
detached harness inside LSU or broken 12 Content Adjustment value check sum error
wire. (EEPROM)
Polygon motor defective Detail Checksum error in adjustment value
Check Check polygon motor operation with data area
and SIM61-1. Cause EEPROM defective
remedy Check harness and connector for Control circuit hung up due to noise.
connection. Replace LSU if needed. Defective EEPROM access circuit on
L8 01 Content No full-wave signal PCU PWB
Detail Full-wave signal is not detected. Check Check EEPROM for proper set-up
Cause PCU PWB trouble and To prevent the erasure of counter data
Power unit trouble remedy and adjustment values, write down the
Check Check connection of the harness and counter data and adjustment values by
and the connector. simulation. (If there is a printer option,
remedy Replace the PCU PWB. execute SIM23-1 and note counter
Replace the power unit. data/adjustment values.)
02 Content Full-wave signal with abnormality Clear U2 trouble with SIM16.
Detai Full-wave signal frequency abnormality Replace PCU PWB.
detected.
(The detected frequency: 69Hz or above
or 42.5Hz or below)
Cause Check for disconnection or improper
connection of the connector of the PCU
PWB and the power PWB harness.
PCU PWB trouble
Power unit trouble
Check Check connection of the harness and
and connector.
remedy Replace the power unit.
9–7 7/13/2000
Trouble code Trouble code
Main Sub Description Main Sub Description
code code code code
U4 02 Content ADU alignment plate operation U5 02 Content RADF eject/inversion sensor trouble
abnormality Detail RADF eject/inversion sensor detection
Detail The plate won’t move from home trouble
position more than 1 second after Cause Defective sensor
sending the command to leave home Improper connection of sensor harness
position. Or the plate won’t return to inside RADF.
home position within 5 seconds after RADF control PWB defective
sending the command to return to home Check Check eject/inversion sensor detection
position. and with SIM2-2.
Cause Home position sensor defective remedy Check sensor harness inside RADF.
Alignment shift motor defective 03 Content RADF timing sensor trouble
Improper connection of harness between Detail RADF timing sensor detection trouble
PCU PWB, motor and sensor. Cause Defective sensor
Control PWB (PCU) defective Improper connection of sensor harness
Alignment plate driving belt or gear inside RADF
damaged or improperly adjusted RADF control PWB defective
Check Check home position sensor detection Check Check timing sensor detection with
and with SIM9-2. and SIM2-2.
remedy Check alignment plate operation with remedy Check sensor harness inside RADF.
SIM9-4. 06 Content RSPF post-separation sensor trouble
Check connection between PCU, motor Detail RSPF post-separation sensor detection
and sensor. trouble (in auto adjustment).
Remove ADU and check gear and belt Cause Sensor trouble.
for damage. Bad connection of sensor harness in
03 Content ADU rear edge plate operation RSPF.
abnormality RSPF control PWB trouble.
Detail When the plate is not shifted from the Erroneous detection by paper dust.
home position for 1 sec or more or when Check Check detection of post-separation
returning to the home position is not and sensor with SIM2-2.
detected for 5 sec or more. remedy Check RSPF sensor harness.
Cause Home position sensor defect Clean and remove paper dust.
Rear edge plate shift motor defect 07 Content RSPF read sensor trouble
Control PWB (PCU) defect Detail RSPF read sensor detection trouble (in
Rear edge plate operation belt/gear auto adjustment)
damage or adjustment error Cause Sensor trouble.
Check Check the home position sensor Bad connection of sensor harness in
and operation with SIM 9-21. RSPF.
remedy Check the rear edge plate operation with RSPF control PWB trouble.
SIM 9-31. Erroneous detection by paper dust.
Check between the PCU PWB, the Check Check detection of read sensor with
motor, and the sensor. and SIM2-2.
Remove the ADU and check the gear remedy Check RSPF sensor harness.
and the belt. Clean and remove paper dust.
U5 00 Content RADF/SPF/RSPF communication trouble 08 Content RSPF SB sensor trouble
Detail Communication line test error occurs Detail RSPF SB sensor detection trouble (in
when power is turned on or after the exit auto adjustment)
of a simulation mode. Cause Sensor trouble.
Improper communication with RADF Bad connection of sensor harness in
Cause Improper connection or broken wire of RSPF.
connector or harness RSPF control PWB trouble.
RADF control PWB defective Erroneous detection by paper dust.
Control PWB (PCU) defective Check Check detection of SB sensor with
Malfunction due to noise and SIM2-2.
Check Check communication line connector remedy Check RSPF sensor harness.
and and harness. Clean and remove paper dust.
remedy Clear the trouble by turning power 11 Content RADF paper feed motor operation
supply On/Off. abnormality
01 Content RADF resist sensor trouble Detail Paper feed motor driving error
Detail RADF resist sensor detection trouble Cause Motor lock
Cause Sensor defective Improper motor speed
Improper connection of sensor harness Overcurrent to motor
inside RADF. RADF control PWB defective
RADF control PWB defective Check Check paper feed motor operation with
Check Check resist sensor detection with and SIM2-3,4.
and SIM2-2. remedy
remedy Check sensor harness inside RADF.
7/13/2000 9–8
Trouble code Trouble code
Main Sub Description Main Sub Description
code code code code
U5 16 Content RSPF fan motor operation abnormality U6 20 Content LCC communication trouble
Detail An abnormality is detected by the input Detail LCC communication trouble
of RSPF fan motor alarm signal. Error when power is turned on or in
Cause Motor lock. communication line test after exiting SIM.
RSPF control PWB trouble. Cause Connector harness improper connection
Bad connection of RSPF motor harness. or disconnection
Check Check the fan motor operation with LCC control PWB trouble
and SIM2-2. Control PWB (PCU) trouble
remedy Malfunction by noise
U6 00 Content Desk communication trouble Check Canceled by turning on the power.
Detail Failed communication with desk and Check the connector and harness of the
Communication line test error occurs remedy communication line.
when power is turned on or after the exit 21 Content LCC transport motor trouble
of a simulation mode. Detail LCC transport motor operation trouble
Cause Improper connection or broken wire of Cause Motor lock
connector or harness Motor rpm abnormality
Desk control PWB defective Motor overcurrent
Control PWB (PCU) defective LCC control PWB trouble
Malfunction due to noise. Check Check the transport motor operation with
Check Clear the trouble by turning the power and SIM 4-3.
and supply On/Off. remedy
remedy Check communication line connector
and harness. 22 Content LCC 24V power abnormality
01 – 03 Content Desk 1, 2, 3 CS lift-up trouble Detail DC24V not supplied to LCC
Detail Desk cassette lift-up trouble (1st - 3rd Cause Connector harness improper connection
cassettes). or disconnection
LCC control PWB trouble
Cause Defective sensor
Power unit trouble
RADF control PWB defective
Broken gear Check Check the connector and harness of
Lift-up motor defective and power line.
remedy Check 24V power in the power unit and
Check Check lift-up sensor detection with
the LCC control PWB.
and SIM4-2.
remedy Check lift-up motor with SIM4-3. 50 Content Non-support trouble in automatic
detection of option connection (Desk unit)
08 Content Desk 24-V power abnormality
Detail In automatic detection of option
Detail No supply of DC24V to desk
connection, a non-support desk unit is
Cause Improper connection or broken wire of
detected.
connector or harness
Cause A non-support desk unit is connected to
Desk control PWB defective
the copier.
Power supply unit defective
Check Check the desk unit.
Check Check power supply line connector and
and harness. and
remedy
remedy Check 24-V voltage on power supply unit
and desk control PWB. 51 Content Non-support trouble in automatic
detection of option connection (LCC unit)
09 Content LCC lift motor trouble
Detail In automatic detection of option
Detail LCC lift motor trouble
connection, a non-support LCC unit is
Cause Sensor trouble
detected.
LCC control PWB trouble
Cause A non-support LCC unit is connected to
Gear breakage
Lift motor trouble the copier.
Check Check the LCC unit.
Check Check the sensor detection with SIM 4-2.
and
and Check the lift motor operation with SIM
remedy
remedy 4-3.
U7 00 Content RIC communication trouble
10 Content Desk transport motor trouble
Detail Communication error with RIC
Detail Desk transport motor operation trouble
Error in communication line test after
Cause Motor lock
turning on the power or exiting from SIM.
Improper motor speed
Overcurrent to motor Cause Improper connection or disconnection of
connector and harness
RADF control PWB defective
RIC control PWB trouble
Check Check transport motor operation with
Control PWB (ICU) trouble
and SIM4-6.
Malfunction caused by noises
remedy
Check Turn off/on the power to cancel the
and trouble.
remedy
9–9 7/13/2000
Trouble code Trouble code
Main Sub Description Main Sub Description
code code code code
U9 00 Content Operation control communication trouble CE 02 Content The specified mail server or the FTP
(ICU detection) server is not found.
Detail Communication setup error, Detail The specified mail server or the FTP
framing/parity/protocol error server is not found.
Cause Slave unit PWB connector improper Cause Network Cable connection failure
connection Network setup failure
Slave unit PWB – ICU PWB harness SMTP server/FTP server/NST trouble
trouble Check 1) Check that the Network Cable is
Connector pin breakage of the motor and inserted properly.
PWB of the slave unit PWB remedy 2) Check that the connected network
Slave unit ROM trouble. no ROM, ROM supports TCP/IP protocol.
reverse insertion, ROM pin breakage 3) Check from the Web Page that the
Check Connect the connector of the slave unit Primary/Secondary E-mail Server
and PWB and the ICU PWB. Address or the Destination FTP
remedy Check the connection and the harness. server/Desktop PC address are properly
Check the grounding of the copier. set.
Check the ROM of the slave unit PWB. 4) If the above address is described with
90 Content Operation control communication trouble Hostname, check that the DNS server is
(OPE detection) properly set.
Detail Communication setup 5) Check that the SMTP server/FTP
error/framing/parity/protocol error server/NST causes a trouble or not.
Cause Slave unit PWB connector improper 03 Content The specified server does not
connection correspond during image transmission.
Slave unit PWB – ICU PWB harness Detail The specified server does not
trouble correspond during image transmission.
Slave unit PWB mother board connector Cause Network Cable connection failure
pin breakage SMTP server/FTP server/NST trouble
Check Check the slave unit PWB and the ICU Check 1) Check that the Network Cable is
and PWB connector connection. and inserted properly.
remedy Check the copier earth. remedy 2) Check that the SMTP server/FTP
CE 00 Content The other communication error has server/NST causes a trouble or not.
occurred. 04 Content The entered account name of the FTP
Detail Communication error server or the password is invalid.
Cause Network Cable connection failure Detail The entered account name of the FTP
Check 1) Check that the Network Cable is server or the password is invalid.
and properly inserted. Cause Network Cable connection failure
remedy The account name of the FTP server
01 Content The print server card (AR-NC3D) is not recorded as the destination or the
installed or defective. password for the account name is
Detail NC3D connection failure erroneous.
Cause NC-3D is not installed to the AR-PB2A Check 1) Check that the Network Cable is
board. and inserted properly.
NC-3D control PWB trouble remedy 2) Check that the account name of the
Check 1) Check that the NC-3D is installed to FTP server recorded as the destination
and the AR-PB2A board. and the password for the account name
remedy 2) Output the NIC Config. Page to check are proper.
the NIC version. 05 Content The entered directory of the FTP server
3) Replace the NIC. is invalid.
Detail The entered directory of the FTP server
is invalid.
Cause Network Cable connection failure
Check that the directory name exists in
the FTP server recorded as the
destination.
Check 1) Check that the Network Cable is
and inserted properly.
remedy 2) Check that the directory name exists
in the FTP server recorded as the
destination.
7/13/2000 9 – 10
Trouble code 3. Jam Cause Code
Main Sub Description
code code Classification Code Contents
EE EL Content Auto developing adjustment trouble
Copier body TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed jam (PFD not
(overtoner)
(Paper feed reached)
Detail A sample data is less than 0 when auto
system) PFD_ND1 PFD not reached jam (Desk tray 1
developing adjustment is executed.
Cause Toner density sensor defective feed paper)
Charging voltage or developing voltage PFD_ND2 PFD not reached jam (Desk tray 2
improper. feed paper)
Toner density improper PFD_ND3 PFD not reached jam (Desk tray 3
Developing unit defective feed paper)
PCU PWB defective
PFD_ST2 PFD remaining jam (Copier tray 2 feed
Check Make auto developing adjustment with
paper)
and SIM25-2.
remedy PFD_SD1 PFD remaining jam (Desk tray 1 feed
EU Content Auto developing adjustment trouble paper)
(undertoner) PFD_SD2 PFD remaining jam (Desk tray 2 feed
Detail A sample data is less than 99 when auto paper)
developing adjustment is executed. PFD_SD3 PFD remaining jam (Desk tray 3 feed
Cause Toner density sensor defective paper)
Charging voltage or developing voltage TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed jam (PPD1 not
improper reached)
Toner density improper
PPD1_NT2 PPD1 not reached jam (Copier tray 2
Unit defective
feed paper)
PCU PWB defective
Check Make auto developing adjustment with PPD1_ND1 PPD1 not reached jam (Desk tray 1
and SIM25-2. feed paper)
remedy PPD1_ND2 PPD1 not reached jam: (Desk tray 2
FA 00 Content SCSI trouble feed paper)
Detail Error in SCSI controller or in PPD1_ND3 PPD1 not reached jam: (Desk tray 3
communication feed paper)
Cause ICU PWB trouble
PPD1_NLC PPD1 not reached jam: (LCC tray feed
SCSI connector trouble
paper)
Check Check SCSI connector.
and Replace ICU PWB. PPD1_ST1 PPD1 remaining jam (Copier tray 1
remedy feed paper)
FC 00 Content ASK/IrDA modulation LSI reset error PPD1_ST2 PPD1 remaining jam (Copier tray 2
Detail Though the RESET signal pulse is sent feed paper)
to the ASK/IrDA modulation LSI, the PPD1_SD1 PPD1 remaining jam (Desk tray 1 feed
power signal is not turned ON. paper)
Cause 1) ICU main PWB defect PPD1_SD2 PPD1 remaining jam (Desk tray 2 feed
2) ASK/IrDA modulation LSI/Clock paper)
oscillator defect
PPD1_SD3 PPD1 remaining jam (Desk tray 3 feed
Check Perform the self diag with SIM 68-01.
paper)
and Replace the ICU main PWB.
remedy PPD1_SLC PPD1 remaining jam (LCC tray feed
01 Content ASK/IrDA switch error paper)
Detail Though the ASK/IrDA switch command MFT Manual feed tray paper feed jam
is sent to the ASK/IrDA modulation LSI, (PPD2 not reached)
the AI signal is not changed. PPD2_NT1 PPD2 not reached jam (Copier tray 1
Cause 1) ICU main PWB defect feed paper)
2) ASK/IrDA modulation LSI/Clock
PPD2_NT2 PPD2 not reached jam (Copier tray 2
oscillator defect
feed paper)
Check Perform the self diag with SIM 68-01.
and Replace the ICU main PWB. PPD2_ND1 PPD2 not reached jam (Desk tray 1
remedy feed paper)
PF 00 Content RIC copy inhibition command reception PPD2_ND2 PPD2 not reached jam (Desk tray 2
Detail Copy inhibition command received from feed paper)
RIC (host) PPD2_ND3 PPD2 not reached jam (Desk tray 3
Cause Judged by the host. feed paper)
Check Notice to the host PPD2_NLC PPD2 not reached jam (LCC tray feed
and paper)
remedy
DUP Duplex paper refeed jam (PPD2 not
–– Content Auditor not ready
reached)
PPD2_SMF PPD2 remaining jam (Copier manual
tray feed paper)
9 – 11 7/13/2000
Classification Code Contents Classification Code Contents
Copier body PPD2_ST1 PPD2 remaining jam (Copier tray 1 Desk DESK1 Desk tray 1 paper feed jam (DPOD1
(Paper feed feed paper) not reached)
system) PPD2_ST2 PPD2 remaining jam (Copier tray 2 DESK2 Desk tray 2 paper feed jam (DPOD2
feed paper) not reached)
PPD2_SD1 PPD2 remaining jam (Desk tray 1 feed DPOD1_N Desk DPOD1 not reached jam
paper) DPOD2_N Desk DPOD2 not reached jam
PPD2_SD2 PPD2 remaining jam (Desk tray 2 feed DPOD1_S Desk DPOD1 remaining jam
paper)
DPOD2_S Desk DPOD2 remaining jam
PPD2_SD3 PPD2 remaining jam (Desk tray 3 feed
LCC LCC LCC paper feed jam (LPFD not
paper)
reached)
PPD2_SLC PPD2 remaining jam (LCC tray feed
LPFD_S LCC unit LPFD remaining jam
paper)
(AR-FN1) SPOD Sorter paper exit jam
PPD2_SAD PPD2 remaining jam (ADU refeed
(AR-FN1N) FPID_N Finisher paper entry jam: Not reached
paper)
(AR-FN3)
Copier body PPD2_PRE PPD2 jam (Image ready dose not FPID_S Finisher paper entry jam: Remaining
(Transport come from the ICU.) FREV_N Finisher reverse jam: Not reached
system) PPD2_PRI PPD2 jam (RRC signal does not come FREV_S Finisher reverse jam: Remaining
from the ICU.) FPFD1_N Finisher paper transport path PFD1
PSD_N PSD not reached jam jam: Not reached
PSD_S PSD remaining jam FPFD1_S Finisher paper transport path PFD1
POD1_N POD1 not reached jam jam: Remaining
POD1_SU POD1 remaining jam (When paper is FPFD2_N Finisher paper transport path PFD2
transported in the upper exit direction.) jam: Not reached
POD1_SL POD1 remaining jam (When paper is FPFD2_S Finisher paper transport path PFD2
transported in the lower exit direction.) jam: Remaining
POD1_SS POD1 remaining jam (When paper is FPFD3_N Finisher paper transport path PFD3
transported in the reverse direction.) jam: Not reached
POD1_S POD1 remaining jam (When paper is FPFD3_S Finisher paper transport path PFD3
transported in the straight exit jam: Remaining
direction.) FPFD4_N Finisher paper transport path PFD4
POD1_SR POD1 remaining jam (When paper is jam: Not reached
transported in the reverse exit FPFD4_S Finisher paper transport path PFD4
direction.) jam: Remaining
POD2_N POD2 not reached jam FSTID_N Finisher staple tray paper entry sensor
POD2_NR POD2 not reached jam (When paper is jam: Not reached
transported in the reverse exit FSTID_S Finisher staple tray paper entry sensor
direction.) jam: Remaining
POD2_S POD2 remaining jam FT3OD_N Finisher shift tray (tray 3) paper exit
POD2_SR POD2 remaining jam (When paper is jam: Not reached
transported in the reverse exit FT3OD_S Finisher shift tray (tray 3) paper exit
direction.) jam: Remaining
POD3_N POD3 not reached jam (AR-FN2) FPIS_N Finisher paper entry sensor jam: Not
POD3_S POD3 remaining jam reached
DSBD_N DSBD not reached jam FPIS_S Finisher paper entry sensor jam:
Remaining
DSBD_SL DSBD remaining jam (When paper is
transported in the lower exit direction.) FJTES_N Finisher process tray paper exit sensor
jam: Not reached
DSBD_SS DSBD remaining jam (When paper is
transported in the reverse direction.) FJTES_S Finisher process tray paper exit sensor
jam: Remaining
(ADU DPPD1_N DPPD1 not reached jam
section) FPRS_N Finisher reverse sensor jam: Not
DPPD1_S DPPD1 remaining jam
reached
DPPD2_N DPPD2 not reached jam
FPRS_S Finisher reverse sensor jam:
DPPD2_S DPPD2 remaining jam Remaining
DPPD3_N DPPD3 not reached jam BES_S Finisher bundle exit sensor jam:
DPPD3_S DPPD3 remaining jam Remaining
Document OG_FD (R)ADF/(R)SPF preliminary paper feed
feed unit jam
OG_ST (R)ADF paper feed jam/(R)SPF
transport jam
EXT (R)ADF/(R)SPF paper exit jam
REV RADF/RSPF reverse jam
7/13/2000 9 – 12
[10] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
Correcting operation in the image forming section (Process correction operation)
Item No. Correction operations Purpose, effect Execution conditions, operating timing
Image density sensor sensitivity Allows the image density sensor to always Before process correction operation
1 correction (Calibration) (Gain detect the correct image patch density.
adjustment)
OPC drum marking sensor sensitivity Allows the OPC drum marking sensor to *1
2 correction always detect the OPC drum marking
normally.
3
Developing bias voltage correction Prevents against density change and *1
background copy.
Laser beam power correction 1 Prevent against a decrease in print density Specified rotating time of the OPC drum:
due to OPC drum membrane decrease. AR-250/280/281/285/286/335/336:
Every 20,000 sec
AR-405: Every 16,600
4
AR-501/505: Every 15,000
Laser beam power correction 2 Outputs the laser beam power Immediately after correction of the main
corresponding to the main charger grid charger grid voltage (*1)
voltage (to maintain the constant voltage).
Main charger grid voltage correction 1 Corrects a decrease in the charging voltage Specified rotating time of the OPC drum:
due to the OPC drum membrane decrease, AR-250/280/281/285/286/335/336:
maintains the correct density of print and Every 20,000 sec
prevent against background copy. AR-405: Every 16,600
5 AR-501/505: Every 15,000
Main charger grid voltage correction 2 Maintains the relations between the Immediately after correction of the
developing bias voltage and the main developing bias voltage (*1)
charger grid voltage at constant (to prevent
against background copy).
Toner concentration correction Maintains the normal toner concentration to When the developing bias voltage correction
maintain the proper density of print and is performed for the voltage higher than the
6
prevent against background copy. specified level is made immediately after the
developing bias voltage correction. (*1)
*1 During warm-up after turning on the power.
During warm-up after cancelling SIM 7-1, 24-7, 25-2, 44-2.
After completion of printing when the accumulated print time reaches 30 min from the previous correction.
When the next print is made after the unit is idle for one hour.
3. Details
A. Operating conditions and timing of the image forming section correction operation
(Process correction operation)
The image forming section correction operation (process correction operation) is performed under the following conditions and timing.
1) During warm-up after turning on the power.
2) During warm-up after cancelling SIM 7-1, 24-7, 25-2, 44-2.
3) After completion of printing when the accumulated print time reaches 30 min from the previous correction.
4) When the next print is made after the unit is idle for one hour.
10 – 1 7/13/2000
B. Details of operations
(1) OPC drum marking sensor sensitivity adjustment (Calibration) and marking detection
a. Outline and purpose
The sensor sensitivity is adjusted to allow correct detection of the OPC drum marking.
b. Details (Calibration)
The sensor LED drive voltage (current) is changed, and when the sensor output voltage reaches the specified level, the sensor LED drive current
control value is stored. In actual operations, the sensor LED is driven by the voltage corresponding to the control value and detection is performed.
5 10 15 20 25 30 35
48V (AR-250/281/286/287/336/337)
Main charger grid voltage correction value
95V (AR-280/285/335)
64V (AR-405/407)
85V (AR-501/505/507)
Main charger grid voltage correction value
5 10 15 20 25 30 35
7/13/2000 10 – 2
(5) Developing bias voltage correction
a. Outline and purpose
Deterioration of developer due to changes in the environmental conditions.
To solve the above problem, the developing bias voltage is changed according to the situation to maintain the proper density print and prevent
against background copy.
(Operation)
1) Three toner image patches are made on the OPC drum with the three voltages Vdbc and Vdbc ± (n)a. (a = 50V)
2) Connect the three points of three toner patch density points with strait lines, and check that it reaches the reference density.
If the above condition is satisfied, obtain the correction developing bias voltage (Vdbc(n)) for the reference density by linear approximation.
The reference density: 38 (set with SIM 44-4) for AR-280/285/335/405/407
58 (set with SIM 44-15) for AR-250/281/286/287/336/337
36 (set with SIM 44-4) for AR-501/505/507
3) Calculate the developing bias correction voltage (v Vdbc(n)).
The developing bias correction voltage (v Vdbc(n)) is applied to the developing bias voltage correction in all the operation modes.
If the condition of 2) is not satisfied, change the condition of 1) as follows and make three toner image patches similarly to 1).
(Contents of change)
Change the three developing bias voltages of correction for making toner image patches to Vdbc + (n ± 1) a, Vdbc + (n ± 2) a, and Vdbc + (n ± 3)
a, and execute 1) and 2). (a = 50V)
Repeat the above operation until the condition of 2) is satisfied. (n = Number of toner patch forming. 3 toner image patches are made at once.)
The correction operation of the developing bias voltage should be in the range of 0 ~ –750V.
30
CASE 2 CASE 1
∆ Vdbc(n)
20
Limit(-750v)
10 ∆ Vdbc(n)
Vdbc(n)
Higher
Vdbc(n)
Vdbc - (n)α Vdbc Vdbc + (n)α Vdbc + (n+1)α Vdbc + (n+2)α Vdbc + (n+3)α
60
Lower α = 50
50
FIRST PT1/BS1(1D1)1
PT2/BS2(1D1)2
40 PT1/BS1(1D1)1 PT3/BS3(1D1)3
38 Reference level
Image patch density (Set by T.C 44-4)
PT2/BS2(1D1)2 SECOND
30 PT3/BS3(1D1)3
∆ Vdbc(n+1)
20
Limit(-750v)
10 ∆ Vdbc(n)
Vdbc(n)
Vdbc(n+1)
Higher
10 – 3 7/13/2000
(6) Main charger grid voltage correction 2 (9) Toner concentration correction B
a. Outline and purpose a. Outline and purpose
When the developing bias voltage is changed, the main charger grid Developer shows an inclination of overtoning with age. To prevent
voltage correction 2 is performed to maintain the relation between the against this, the reference toner concentration control level is
developing bias voltage and the main charger grid voltage at con- changed according to the situation to maintain the specified toner
stant. concentration level.
b. Details b. Details of operation
After the developing bias voltage correction, the voltage of correction When the developer rotation time (SIM 44-9: DEVE MIXING TIME)
of the developing bias voltage is automatically added to the main reaches A x 1000sec, the reference toner concentration level set with
charger grid voltage. SIM 25-2 is increased by D count.
Actual main charger grid voltage variable range: –200 to –900V After that, correction by D count is made for every B x 1000sec, and
correction is ended up with C times of the number of times of correc-
(7) Laser beam power correction 2 tion.
To maintain the OPC drum bright potential at constant for changes in The correction quantity can be changed with SIM 25-8. When ship-
the main charger grid voltage due to main charger grid voltage correc- ping, correction is not used.
tion 1 and 2, the laser beam power must be changed accordingly.
<Means>
Laser beam power correction 2 is performed to output the laser beam
The accumulated use time of developer is detected. When it reaches
power according to the above situation.
the specified level, the toner concentration control reference value is
This correction provides stable print density. corrected (SIM 80-2).
(8) Toner concentration correction A
a. Outline and purpose Toner
concentration
This correction is used to correct changes in the developer charac- control level
teristics due to aging and change in the environmental conditions.
D count
When any change occurs in the developer characteristics, it causes
under-toner or over-toner, resulting in improper print density. D count
To prevent against this, the reference toner control level is changed Toner D count
concentration
according to the conditions to maintain the specified toner concentra- reference value
tion. (SIM 80-2)
Original
· The accumulated use time of developer can be reset with SIM
reference 24-11.
toner MAX 20
·
5
concentration The current correction quantity of toner concentration reference
control level
(Set by value is displayed on the menu of SIM 44-9 separately from toner
SIM 25-2)
concentration control correction A.
· The first correction time A can be set with a simulation and the
default is 200. (Set range: 0 to 500)
99
T(time)
· The second or later correction time B can be set with a simulation
and the default is 50. (Set range: 0 to 300)
Operated process(DV bias correction) correction
· The number of times of correction, C, can be set with a simulation
and the default is 3. (Set range: 0 to 10)
· The correction quantity D can be set with a simulation and the
default is 0. (Set range: 0 to 30)
7/13/2000 10 – 4
4. RSPF 6) Second page preliminary paper feed end/First page paper feed
end
A. Operational descriptions
a. Simplex operation
1) Document set (2 pages)
b. Duplex operation
1) Document set (2 pages)
10 – 5 7/13/2000
2) First page preliminary paper feed start 7) First page reverse start
3) First page preliminary paper feed end 8) First page reverse end
4) First page paper feed start (Front) 9) First page paper feed start (Back)/Second page preliminary pa-
per feed resume
7/13/2000 10 – 6
12) Second page preliminary paper feed end 17) Second page paper feed start (Back)
13) Second page paper feed start (Front) 18) Second page paper feed end (Back)
14) Second page paper feed end (Front) 19) Second page paper exit start
15) Second page reverse start 20) Second page paper exit end
10 – 7 7/13/2000
The document length is detected by counting the number of pulses of
the paper feed motor (AMOT) and the transport motor (FMOT) during
the time interval from when the paper feed motor (AMOT) starts
rotation, that is, the resist roller starts rotation, and a document is fed
from the paper feed section to the paper transport section to when
the post-separation sensor (SPS) detects the rear edge of the docu-
TRVR ment. With the detected document length and the document width
TRS-S TRS-L detected by the size volume (TRVR), the document size is identified.
(A)
Resist roller Separation roller
7/13/2000 10 – 8
[11] SPECIAL FUNCTIONS (AR-287/337/407/507)
1. Tandem function
AR-505 AR-507/407/337
Model
50 50
50 50
40 40
33 33
Job Copy
Copy
Client PC
Printer kit
Tandem print
ON/OFF selection
Limitation • System limitation (Mirror configuration)
Two models in tandem connection must be of the same ROM
version and the same option composition.
11 – 1 7/13/2000
*1: "Option" means a finisher, an ADU, a paper feed desk, a large- (Outline)
capacity tray, or a paper feed module. To protect confidential documents, print is inhibited unless the user
(Operations when there is a difference between the option com- performs the specified operation from the main operation panel after
positions) giving a print command from PC.
1. Tandem copy: The tandem copy key is displayed, but the (1) Accumulated print jobs
conditions to execute the tandem function are not satisfied.
Code: XX Number of jobs Number of pages of one job (A4, letter)
1 320 pages
Code Tandem operation condition
2 240 pages
00 SCSI communication disable
4 120 pages
Code Tandem mirror condition
10 Model code disagreement 8 60 pages
11 ICU-ROM version disagreement 16 28 pages
12 PCU-ROM version disagreement (2) The following operations can be performed during
13 OPE-ROM version disagreement operation of confidential print or during confidential
20 After-process unit connection disagreement printing.
21 Paper exit port connection disagreement · Checking all the lists of the accumulated confidential prints.
22 ADU connection disagreement · Delete of confidential print data (Password entry is required.)
23 DESK connection disagreement
· Cancel of confidential print during printing by means of the "C" key.
24 LCC connection disagreement Invalid during recovery from pre-heat.
30 ADU trouble information disagreement
40 Sim26-6: Destination setup disagreement (3) The following operations cannot be performed during
41 Sim26-46: Image output direction setup disagreement confidential printing.
50 Security mode setup disagreement · Changing the environment setup by means of the environment
51 Duplex copy inhibition setup disagreement setup key.
52 Staple inhibition setup disagreement · Command of continuous output in a different size or from a differ-
53 Manual tray select inhibition disagreement when ent tray
offset tray is selected · For confidential printing, paper selection is allowed only in AUTO
selection.
2. Tandem print: All the prints are made by MAIN.
· For confidential printing, paper insertion, booklet, and OHP index
paper insertion are inhibited.
2. Confidential print
(4) Confidential print output operation is allowed or
Client PC inhibited as follows
Enter PIN. Ready: Allowed
In the driver menu. Copy reading: Inhibited
PIN ✱ ✱ ✱ ✱ ✱ Copy outputting: Inhibited
Scanner document scanning: Inhibited
Scanner data transmission: Inhibited
Printing: Inhibited (Confidential print allowed
when interrupted in offline.)
Staple printing: Inhibited
After RIP, image data and
PIN are stored. Image data Tandem copy reading: Inhibited
PIN data Tandem copy outputting: Inhibited
Tandem print outputting: Inhibited
[1] HDD (5) Conditions of password
[2] Network card
Number of digits: 5
[3] Printer board Characters: Only numeric figures 0 to 9
[4]
(6) Process in the case of HDD overflow
[5] · The job is canceled.
[6] · The status monitor makes the error display to PC.
[7] · Notice Page output is performed.
[8] (7) Troubles during printing
When the machine is stopped by paper empty or a paper jam, re-
PIN ✱ ✱ ✱ ✱ ✱
move the trouble, and the job will be automatically continued.
Enter PIN on the operation panel.
(8) Combination with the security function
· When the security function is ON, confidential print is inhibited.
· When confidential data is received, it is automatically canceled.
· The status monitor makes the error display to PC.
· Notice Page output is performed.
Printout
7/13/2000 11 – 2
(9) Operations when the printer department 4. Security function
management function is set
· When the key operator program (to record the print quantity to Security function
each department) is ON, the department management function is ON/OFF
valid to confidential print.
· In this case, when an output command is made from the operation ON OFF
panel, entry of the department number is not required.
(10) Combination with tandem print
· Combination between tandem print and confidential print is not al- HDD HDD
lowed.
(11) In case of a trouble Data storage Data storage
· When trouble code F9 occurs, the display cannot shift to the confi-
dential menu.
(12) Data storage HDD HDD
· When an output is completed, data are deleted from the list.
· When the printer power is turned off with the confidential print data
Print output Print output
remained in the HDD, the confidential print data are deleted com-
pletely.
· When the auto power shut off function activates, the confidential HDD data
READY
HDD clear
print data are deleted completely.
11 – 3 7/13/2000
D. Note for job interruption Item Scanner expansion kit
e-mail System SMTPcomplying e-mail system
Though the security function is ON, if the machine is stopped due to
For major mail systems, SLA is under
the following causes, deletion after completion of output and deletion
investigation.
of HDD data is disabled unless the cause is removed and the job is – MS Exchange
completed. – Lotus Notes
If the machine is left, data is remained in the HDD for a long time. Be – Novell GroupWise
careful of that. Specify the Sender (Setting No
· Paper empty "From" field)
· Paper jam Destination Profile Setting About 100
· Toner empty (No. of destinations)
· Interruption copy
Scan Profile Setting Changeable by the operation panel of the
machine.
E. Combination with tandem copy Subject & Text Initial setting: 7 languages of the same
(Mail title and text/Scan to contents
· When the security mode check box is ON, tandem copy cannot be e-Mail) E-MAIL title
set. Title can be entered.
· When the security mode check box is ON, if tandem print data is
received, all are printed by MAIN. B. Features and functions
(1) Image file distribution
F. Deletion of HDD data is not performed in the
The network scanner system allows to send files of scanned image
following cases
data to each destination through the network.
· During warm-up
· E-mail distribution scan: As attached TIFF or PDF files
If the "HDD data delete" key of the key operator program is
pressed during warm-up, the message below is displayed:
· Desktop distributions can
7/13/2000 11 – 4
6. E-mail Status/E-mail Alerts C. Print controller specifications
The controllers, AR-PB2A, support the following transmission func-
A. Basic functions tions:
(1) Event driven type text message transmission by using MIB infor- · Text mail transmission by event driven setup and schedule driven
mation of AR-PB2A setup
(2) Management information which body has is coded and transmit- · Mail transmission with an attached file by event driven setup and
ted in a file type according to the schedule or in the event driven schedule driven setup.
type. In this case, the specified mail software is used to receive
However, mail transmission with an attached file stated above is en-
and develop the data.
abled only when the main body complies with generation of informa-
The above functions are available as standard provision only when tion of the attached file. That is, transmission of an attached file can
AR-PB2A and the AR-NC3D are installed. For (2), the software key be made only when the AR-PB2A is installed to the AR-287/
protect is made. 337/407/507.
B. Main body specifications For E-mail Status / Alerts without an attached file, as follows:
The body provides event information to the controller. (1) Additional machine information
The file generated by the ICU according to setup can be transmitted Information to identify the machine. The user administrator manually
as an attached file as information for dealers. When a dealer’s mail enters this information by using a browser. The information is dis-
address is set, a file can be attached only to a mail which is transmit- played in the text of the mail.
ted to the mail address.
* These items of information are kept on the controller side or on the
To read the attached file, the specified mail software is required. That NIC side.
is, the attached file includes numeral information of each main body
· Machine name
and event information in coded state. If the other mail software is
used to receive, the display contents on the client side cannot be · Machine code
guaranteed. · Installation place
11 – 5 7/13/2000
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
“BATTERY DISPOSAL”
CONTAINS MANGANESE DIOXIDE LITHIUM BATTERY
MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY.
REMOVE THE BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND
CONTACT FEDERAL OR STATE ENVIRONMENTAL
AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION ON RECYCLING
AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark Acknowledgments
Microsoft Windows, MS-DOS, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
U.S.A. and other countries.
Macintosh, Power Macintosh, Mac OS, LaserWriter, and AppleTalk are registered trademarks of
Apple Computer, Inc.
IBM, PC/AT, and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
PCL is a trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc.
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION
Digital Document Systems Group
Quality & Reliability Control Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2000 July Printed in Japan